Home

6.2 User`s Manual as PDF

1. a 276 0 105 35 Tool Arrow To import from ART or WR In TrackLayer choose File gt Import gt WinRail or Atlas Right Track 2 In the file dialog navigate to the ral file to be imported and click Open 3 Ifno image file is found alongside the ral file you are offered the opportunity to create one Click Yes to proceed to the next step If you do not care to have a background image click No to skip to step 5 4 WinRail or Atlas Right Track is launched with the selected file on display Choose File gt Save As and choose file type jpg in Atlas Right Track choose bmp Save the image file with the offered name i e Same name as the ral file Note for best resolution zoom the layout to large size before saving the image Then exit or minimize the program return to TrackLayer and click OK to proceed 5 The import proceeds with a progress bar displaying status On completion the layout is ready to test and run 6 Save the converted layout as rrw file p lt I TrackLayer Cary Grant RR2 rrw M ox ax Importing from AnyRail To convert from AnyRail you must have an installed copy of AnyRail 3 11 or above You will need to export the layout from AnyRail before you can import it into Tracklayer pres ai coe as ort a 1 IOUS 10 Ji K Help aon Mouse lost cre To import from AR 1 Start AnyRail and open the layout to be conve
2. Choose the Track Tool Drag from the stub above Gills Landing to the circle so it highlights then release This creates the first leg of the curve Create the second leg drag from the bottom left of the circle moving AN OE p Oyen May down and to the right S eaa Re E l Hr until the lower segment 4 ese V aan ue i highlights as shown and ie gt NW e i the cursor is positioned a OW OO VO Be atthe switch then release When you release this segment the circle disappears and becomes a curve and a switch is automatically created Loop with branch At this point you have a loop and a curved branch with an operating Switch as shown Toggle View Background L to check your work Test the switch by clicking the intersection point Add siding Drag a straight segment Swampscott Release at the point where the track bends as shown by the cursor position in this picture T ra i Oyrier Hey Pii y Test Complete the Siding Drag another segment starting where you released the lastone A green square highlight must be showing before you begin the dragas jp OS ee i shown above right ae 3 F HA yer Bay Release atthe point kA a VA ee 1 eat where the siding LS AN AY a intersects the loop fc T A SU i shown at right When you release this segment a second switch is created Loop branch and siding The track is comp
3. Inside Corner i NR Main line from upper left to lower right Junction Main line across bottom switchable to alternate main on each end Whatever method you use to create a module make sure itis oriented as shown here Do not use View Rotate or other means to reorient it or the Module Manager will not interpret it correctly Module Tags The program is not yet smart enough to look ata layout and determine that itis a module Itis up to the creator of the module to supply this information This is done by selecting a tag from a drop down menu in the Layout P roperties dialog Mot a module straight Comer Junction Jingide comer If you are creating a layout to be used as a module select the appropriate tag This will inform the Module Manager how to interpret the layout This is not vital for a straight module but corners and junctions must be tagged or they will not work The Module Manager The Module Manager is a dialog for organizing and assembling modules into modular layouts Called from the menu command File gt Module Manager The process you carry out in the Module Manager is called assembly It s like sliding dominoes around on a table you position them end to end using Special corner and junction units to make turns They can only fit together in certain ways so they are like magnets you drop them roughly into position and the program snaps them into place The dialog is operated mostly by dra
4. rectangle te i at Re E ae Moe S h a a A A E A A E EEEE EET i FO FC al Redcat en ae inte or smoothed Styles Every object has a Line Style which applies to the entire object for a linear shape or to the outer border fillable shape In addition a fillable shape has a Fill Style which applies to its interior region Any style can be one of a solid color b two color hatch pattern c bitmap see below or d no fill i e transparent A line style has all this info plus a thickness expressed in layout units Default Styles Each object has its own style In addition there is a set of Default Styles which determine now newly created objects will look and which can be applied to existing objects using the Painter tool The three default styles Line Fill and Text are edited in the tabs of the Scenery Styles dialog easily accessible via new toolbar buttons Layers The scenery objects on a layout reside in one of two layers Background for benchwork or ground level scenery underneath the tracks vs Foreground for structures and objects above the ground The layers are drawn and edited independently so that you can draw and manipulate foreground objects without accidentally modifying the background underneath With TrainP layer 6 2 you can now easily move scenery objects between layers by using a check mark in Scenery Properties It is no longer necessary to copy and paste to
5. Creating a Transfer Table Creating a Transfer Table A transfer table has several moving parts a combination of scenery and track They are e Pit the bed over which the bridge moves This is a rectangular scenery object so can be solid or filled with bitmap or pattern default is solid ivory color e Rails lines perpendicular to the bridge representing rails on which it rides These are non functional just for display You can change the number of them or remove them default is to show four rails e Bridge narrow rectangular platform which moves across the pit You can adjust the width default is 3 in HO By default the bridge is shown as Solid grey but you can instead display a scenery object if you wish e Bridge Track track on which the engine rides Sits on top of the bridge and bisects it This is a normal section of live track e Bridge Scenery an optional scenery object representing the bridge not shown in the above illustration Several are a in us Miscellanous scenery collection such as There is no special tool for creating transfer tables You first create a scenery object for the pit then convert it to a transfer table as described below To create a transfer table 1 Choose the Rectanglel ool Tool on the Scenery Toolbar Eii 2 Draw a rectangle for the pit below left Size position and rotate to suit on the layout 3 Right click the rectangle and choose Convert to Transfer Table
6. If you select one of the two latter choices clicking Next does not take you to the next page Instead it does the generation displays the new stations on the layout and then moves the radio button to Use Existing Stations At that point you can click Next to go on or make a different choice and repeat the generation until you get results you like Industries page Calls the Industry Generator to assign random industries to stations Ops Wizard Industries Defne ndusties for use m operations This layout has 5 industries Use existing industries e Generate new industries C Automatic Interactive Back Cancel Choose one e Use existing industries Leaves the current industries alone Click Next to go to the next page e Generate new automatic Picks random industries at all stations Click Next to do the creation and remain on this page e Generate new interactive Brings up the Industry Generator dialog below where you can generate or choose industries individually for each station Whichever way you choose to generate industries you can see what the generator came up with and cancel or do it again if you don t like the results As on the Stations page when you create new industries the wizard remains on this page until you choose Use Existing and click Next This gives you a chance to review the results and retry as needed Industry Generator Dialog i one E Industry Generator 5A Check
7. globals by These are substituted by appropriate values before the string is output may be surrounded by quotes or not author s choice Quotes are removed before output may be multi line text blocks containing returns and blank lines A multi line string must be quoted and any embedded quotes must be doubled may be components of LET statements Quotes in TPL Our general philosophy is quotes are not required except in certain situations listed below but may be used if desired Programmers used to formal languages tend to prefer quoted strings Thus either of these is valid echo this is a string to be output echo this is a string to be output In a display string variables are substituted whether or not the string is quoted Examples echo the speed of the crossing train is S train x_train speed echo today is date and it is already time Quotes are optional around most function arguments and keywords Thus both of these work echo the speed is Strain train66 speed echo the speed is Strain train66 speed Where quotes are required 1 Around a multi word command registry setting name or filename that is any of these which contains a space In a menu this applies only to a single level of a cascading menu Examples file open Co ny file tzt lt filename with space file revert to saved lt menu command set Default Car Length 400 lt reg setting name 3 Around a string containi
8. Eg X enines in ee Delete All Trams Random Train Generation Generate Trains Click Generate Trains to remove all trains from the layout if any and replace with a random new Set of trains distributed around the tracks This command cannot be undone so you might want to save a copy of the layout before trying it Settings which affect the generation are Determines the number of trains to be generated by specifying how track much of the track to cover Eligible means track which is unpopulated and long enough to hold trains Increase this value to generate more trains decrease for fewer Increase to have a larger number of trains with motive power decrease 7 engines to have a larger proportion of standing cars Increase if you prefer engines to be steam decrease if you want more steam diesels If you try a generate and don t like the results try again Each click gets you a new set Delete All Trains Click to delete all trains from the layout An alert warns that this operation is not undoable and gives you a chance to cancel If you click OK all trains will be removed from the layout Note if you just want the trains to be invisible but not deleted use View gt Trains from the main menu Car Defaults These settings choose a couple of general preferences involving cars Choose a default car collection to be in effect when you are creating a new layout See Default Cars The types of cars you se
9. Hot a toggle no effect if In 1 already going in the The Reference tab is your best source of information about the details of the language Itis built into the program so will never be out of date when new commands are added Unlike a paper manual itis always available and conveniently displayed on your screen as you work You can copy and paste from it to save typing Script Doc Notes File Much of the information shown with each reference entry is taken from a text file distributed with the program The file is named scr_doc_notes txt and it resides in the root TP app data folder If you don t have this file or your version is out of date and you have an internet connection then a new version of the file is automatically downloaded when you bring up the Reference tab List contents Tvpe Command wait condition variable or one of a dozen other types of scripting element Command names yp include subcategory Function and variable names include r w where value is settable Name Command variable or function name with calling sequence when applicable Description Brief explanation of the entry Value For system variables functions without arguments and user variables current value Actions Click list item Selects item and displays it in the text window The text includes data from the list window plus notes taken from the system doc notes file Right click row Brings up context menu with one command as indicat
10. Load Bitmap Select All Properties This adds a vertical bridge bridge track and rails above right The table is now ready to hook up and use 4 Try it Double click anywhere in the pit and the bridge will move Double click again to stop To connect external tracks The transfer table is not useful unless it has external tracks for entry and exit An external track must have one endpoint lying on the edge of the pit and is normally perpendicular to the rails You must construct the table before drawing or attaching external tracks that is if you already have tracks in place and you attempt to move a table so that it touches them it won t work Note size position and rotate the table before connecting external tracks These tracks do not move if you later decide to reposition the table 1 Choose the Track tool 2 Begin drawing a track section outside the table Drag the end until it touches and highlights the table edge as shown here left When you let go the track snaps to perpendicular right Note that the edge of the table will highlight only if you are touching a serviceable location It must be a on one of the two edges perpendicular to the bridge and b more than half a bridge width from the side of the pit 3 Test your work Double click the pit on the external track side and the bridge should move until it locks onto the track To make a cross over If you want the engine to be
11. The train jumps immediately to an end of the specified track If itlands pointing in the wrong direction read on To reverse the direction a train is pointing 1 Right click the train on the layout or in a train window 2 Choose Reverse Train The train picks itself up rotates 180 degrees and sets down again To move or copy a train to a different layout Have the target layout open in a window on the screen Unselect the selected car if any see Selecting Cars and Trains Choose Edit Copy to copy or Edit Cut to move Click in the target layout to make it active Choose Edit Paste The copied train is deposited at the normal new train location iA BW NO Naming Trains On a real railroad trains have names You can name your trains in TrainP layer to aid in setting up switching moves identifying car and train locations and giving your railroad that prototype feel In earlier versions of the program train names were provided automatically but could be overridden This is no longer the case In 4 0 if you want trains to have names you have to provide them yourself There is some complexity about what happens to a name during a series of moves so we provide the details on this page Definitions The standard AAR definition of a train is one or more engines with or without cars displaying markers A train need not have cars coupled to the engine but cars without an engine are nota train Note that this is not the sa
12. TrainPlayer TrackLayer User s Manual Version 6 2 Nov 2015 TrainPlayer TrackLayer User s Manual copyright 2005 15 TrainPlayer Software Plans from 701 Track Plans for Model Railroaders and Model Railroader are copyright Kalmbach Publishing used with permission TrainPlayer Contents Introduction Welcome to TrainP layer What s New in Version 6 2 What For About This Manual About the Layouts Where to Go for Help Getting Started About Files Opening a Layout A Tour of the Screen Layout Properties About Sizes and Scales Adjusting the View Layout Printing Exporting Images The Help Menu What s Next Running Trains About Trains The Train Control Bar Moving Trains By Hand Yard Mode Switches Coupling and Uncoupling Horns and Sounds Turntables Ca ar Collections Building Trains Stations and Industries Ops Setup Wizard Scripting About Scripting Scripting Ul Devices Working With Scripts How to Get Started in Scripting TP Programming Language Scheduling Clock Schedule Window Customizing Operation Preferences Switch Preferences General Preferences Track Preferences Train Preferences Style Preferences Road Preferences Customizing Toolbars The Customize Dialog Windows and Views TrackLayer Contents Introduction Getting Started Starting the Program Layout and Image Files The Overall Process Tutorial The Rockport amp Oyster Bay Dimensio
13. View drag by hand General options Metric units At Startup Check for program updates Create new blank layout Show control panel when opening layout Show schedule window on start script Hatin color codes as outlines Select type of units for dimension and speed displays throughout the program Note Metric units are turned on whenever you select one of the metric choices in the units drop down In various dialogs Layout sounds Running sounds Mouse wheel zoom View drag by hand Options at program startup Show splash screen Show open layout dialog Show last open layout Check to activate all sounds except loco running sounds These include train horns switch throws couplings sounds associated with stations Switchlist completion sounds and others Check to activate speed dependent engine running sounds These sounds can also be turned on or off from the layout context menu For more information see Running Sounds Check this box if you want the mouse wheel to zoom the layout in and out Uncheck if you prefer to use the wheel for default behavior vertical scrolling Check if you want to be able to scroll the view by dragging with the mouse This feature only works when the Run tool is active If the Run tool is active and this box is checked then when you press a blank spot on the layout and drag the view scrolls to follow Note dragging by hand cancels Auto Follow For mor
14. e a pink X is shown on the car top e an orange line is shown under the car in the Train Window e the uncoupling pin is positioned before or after the car e the Add Car command will deposit its new car at the pin position e Edit commands cut copy delete apply to the selected car To select a car a click its image on the layout b click its icon in a train window or c click its name in the Train Tree When you select a car you also select its train To unselect click a blank space on the layout or the blank space behind the train in the train window Train Menu To select a train on the layout you can choose from either a normal text menu or a menu of pictures These can be annotated with the train and car identifiers if you choose mm mm oo mn Train Menu Settings Train Bar Settings The Train Menu appears when you click the down arrow at the right in the train window or choose Train gt Train Menu from the main menu The currently selected train is shown with a blue outline or a checkmark if you have a text only menu To selecta train from the menu just click its row To specify what the train menu should display click Train Menu Settings and see the following dialog For information about the other menu item see Train Control Bar Settings All trains Only trains with engines Only named trains M Show train names M Show car
15. junction when one of the script editor windows is on i E ee PA display and focus is in the text box The commands on Fa Ro a ai EN this menu insert different junction based items into the text box at the position of the cursor oe Throw Switch e Insert J unction Number any junction insert the junction number prefixed by Thisis Fa typically used when entering an AT or AFTER ce icon aetna HALE 1 condition to cause an action at the junction ee l e Insert Throw Here for switches only insert a Throw statement with the clicked junction i number and a value matching the current switch ae throw 110 i position In other words cause the script to throw the switch to the same position itis now showing e Insert Throw Alternate for switches only insert a Throw statement to the next position Fora two way switch this throws to open the route which Is currently closed Action rendon iJi don to Fal Insert throw alternate Note Window The Note Window is a special window used by a script to display text There is only one such window shared by all scripts and all layouts The user can adjust its size position and style and the settings will stick until changed but the script author also has some control over these settings and may override user choices we a o TTE t F i Pie a zm Ba T 3 m Se ae or E a This is the Note Window E Itis used for displaying notes from scripts q
16. Cartypes What s New Recent additions to the web collection see What s New Tree Menu Open Open folder or download collection to cache folder to show contents Refresh Re download car collection to cache folder Dimmed unless selected item is car collection Refresh Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Download All Download and install all car collections within the selected folder and subfolders Look at all web car collections within the selected folder and subfolders if collections available on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those Download Missing Items Clear Download Cache on root Cartypes folder only Remove local cached files force re download What s New Settings on What s New folder only Set cutoff date see What s New Find Find Next Download All Download Missing Items List Menu Install Install Install selected car collection cide Views Side Views Display icons of side views Top Views Display icons of top views Top Views list View List View Show contents in list form List includes name class AAR code date Load Chooser The Load Chooser appears when you a select Load Chooser from the Load menu b choose Loaded for a car which has not yet been assigned a load or c double click the Load Car toolbar icon The Load Chooser is much like the Car Chooser It shows about a dozen folders named for type
17. Modules are by default displayed as filled rectangles with numeric labels Corners are shown as squares with 45 degree cutoff lines suggesting the typical shape of an actual unit Along one edge of the each module is the front track a line approximating the route of the main track going around the assembly In a train show viewers stand on this side of the layout Beneath the workspace is the module list a list box showing the sequence of modules with their details Each row begins with a number which corresponds to a labelled module in the assembly The highlighted row in the list shows the selected module This one is shown in the workspace with a pink frame You can select a module by clicking on it in the workspace or by clicking its row in the list box Buttons around the module list are for editing the assembly and modifying its properties as described below Adding Modules to the Assembly To begin creating an assembly 1 Click Add to bring up the Layout Chooser 2 Navigate to a Modules folder if necessary By default the chooser comes up pointing to the NTrak Components folder 3 Choose a layout to be the base module This just means all other modules will be positioned relative to it the base retains its orientation as others are moved around 4 Press on the selected layout drag it off the Layout Chooser list and drop it into the Module Manager window When you let go the module is displayed in standard orientation
18. Note it is possible to resize the control panel such that the slider shrinks to zero and disappears In this case you control speed and direction using buttons and lights alone Uncouple button click to uncouple at the position indicated by the orange pin in the train window Dimmed if pin is not between two cars To reposition the pin click the desired spot in the train window Horn button press and hold to sound train s horn Dimmed if train has no engine Right click the button to select a different horn for the train or to toggle running sounds on and off Load button click to load or unload the selected car Dimmed if no car is selected or car is unloadable otherwise click once to toggle the status Right click for more options ability to load or unload the entire cut or train access to Load Chooser or list of load names Train Window The train window in the TCB shows a side view of the selected train The same type of window is used to display car collections in the Car Inventory Bar CIB so much of this section applies to both The uncoupling pin is a tall orange spike in the train window TCB only Its position indicates where a the train will separate when you uncouple b car s will be inserted when you add or paste The selected car is indicated with a colored underline Notes about the train display and interactions Image sizes See discussion below under Control Bar Settings Tooltips menus hover over a car ima
19. Sherman Denver Serene 4 3 ISa de 226 ddd Zal 173 17a 45 43 G1 3992 Route z Shemen Denver Fierchinga 7 oo F 2 ISI 2 226 222 221 173 ira 231 HA 61 H Route J Sherman Denvera LyoraInterch 32 1 7 a 1 61 D535 227 226 J22 45 435 Gi 59 32 Route 4 Sherman Denvera Lyons Intech 49 2 5 iz F rs P55 227 220 222 5 172 91 J343 61 T3 92 Route 5 Ghenman Denar interchange aa 0 1 ii E Si T3 227 226 298 791 172 45 43 61 59 So Route 6 Sherman Demar Lyons inbe 54 6 1 14 E BS 153 AAT 236 298 291 172 173 221 P37 45 45 61 92 Route 7 Sherman Oecver interchange 70 1a a 63 USS 227 26 738 231 3343 ol 59 2 Route H Sherman Demer Lyons Inbech 3 7 5 a a 62 ISi ft 220 22 45 45 GL 59 Be Route g Shemen Demer Lyorsntench 50 eF iz fa ISa tAr 22i 222 45 L72 2il J343 61l F9 OE Route 10 Shennan Dem an lierchanje 41 84 ik a 62 ISa 227 22h 222 226 230 231 L72 45 49 61 5992 Route 11 Shennan Deme ivterchange a7 5 iz 4 75 S3 227 220 222 226 230 731 FS 43 61 59 92 Roube 12 Sherman fever Opora nbe 1 36 15 5 BE PSS 227 221 173 172 45 272 225 ee 231 33 43 Gi 5997 Route 13 Shemen Demer interchange 44 10 3 73 153 227 220 173 172 4543 61 59 92 Route 14 Chenmen Benver imerchange 47 6 5 Il F 75 S3 227 221 173172 231 3343 61 59 92 Route 15 Sherman Oenver Lyons iteh SS 10g 14 1 DE LS dar dat LF lra dal 298 26 di 43 49 61 0 Route 16 Sherman Oernver Lyons inberch 319 87 LS g 43 Loa Lo L72 SF dtd dil dir ddo dde ddi dd
20. TrackLayer In Internet Explorer you can do this by right clicking on the image and choosing Save Picture AS Be sure you re saving the largest possible image Don t save a thumbnail picture Images in CAD programs all CAD programs save files in some format and many will save to standard graphics formats If your CAD program can save to J PG BMP GIF or PNG you re all set just save the file in one of those formats and it can be used in TrackLayer Many programs allow you to set export options depending on the output format chosen If you can set options be Sure to choose high resolution or highest quality before you export If your program does not export to one of the formats listed above but to another such as DXF or EPS you will need to export to the supported format and then convert You can find conversion programs on the Internet for example a search for DXF to J PG turns up several programs for converting CAD files to graphics As a last resort you can take a screen shot 1 Open the layout in your CAD program and adjust to make the image as large as possible 2 Press Print Screen on your keyboard 3 Start Paint the system bitmap editing program On most systems Paint is found under Start gt Programs gt Accessories 4 Choose Edit Paste The screen image you captured is brought into P aint 5 Move the image When you paste the image Is automatically selected and ready to drag Drag so that the top
21. Trigger Trigger type direction and identifier if any as specified in unction Action Editor First Line First line of action script Actions Selects action script and displays it in the text window The corresponding junction on the layout is highlighted Double click row Brings up J unction Action Editor for editing and viewing script Right click row Brings up context menu commands as listed below Text is editable Text is in code style fixed size font no wrap Changes are saved on clicking OK or Apply or on changing tabs Click list item Text window Context menu Edit in JA Editor Brings up J unction Action Editor for editing and viewing script Delete Deletes action and removes from the list Enabled Check to enable action uncheck to disable When disabled no cars or trains cause action to trigger Refresh Rebuilds list sometimes needed if changes have been made externally
22. Truckee RR 12X3 03 08 2011 09 51 42 What s New Of 49 Fairhaven amp Ideal River 9X 10 03 08 2011 09 51 42 f A9 Fairhaven A Iden River AXI _ _ MAARN 1 9 51 4 4 TM Note practically all ofthe 107 Track Plans are ops ready as is the entire Demo folder and many from the Standard and Premium sets 2 Choose Tools gt Ops gt Generate Ops or click the El button on the Ops Toolbar That s it You get a switchlist ready to execute If you can make sense of what you see on the screen you re good to go Se ae nn ae Lae be REIP i ee as a i ia 7 n F Original copyright Skarta Ready CAF NUMI SCRL Schedule x Return Boxcar X10 tools trom GSW Inc to Hamilton Yard Send Gondola G67 fempty from track 443 to Ingersoll Machine Deliver Gondola G61 coiled wire trom Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Return Flatcar F48 fempty from track 6 to Hamilton Yard Return B Boxcar HS fempty from track 29 to Hamilton Yard Send Flatcar F63 empty from Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Return Flatcar F4 fempty from track 29 to Hamilton Yard Send Boxcar X60 fempty trom Hamilton Yard to GSW Inc yr Ops Slightly Less Quick Start 1 Open any layout Add some engines and freight cars if it doesn t have any 2 Choose Tools gt Ops gt Generate Ops orclick on the toolbar Color Action Class BW r Boxcar B sent Gondola BD elves conco E ctu atc Tetum
23. ae i Pin oe i l ates T g a ote cee oun TOWN i F b l ko au at 1 C Program Filesi ALIO re EF Z M a N Tah 2 C Program Files LZZ rra 3 CiProgram Filesi L355 rrm 4 C Program Filesi Le5 rrvy 5 Railroadd rr 6 Ci 1Program Files L634 rrm z C Program Filesi LS rra 6 ERR AW supertrain rr Exit The image is always scaled to fit the page For most images landscape orientation works best choose in Print Setup There is currently no way to scale up to print to multiple pages Exporting Images Export Image was introduced several versions ago as a way of creating a Snapshot of your layout in a graphics file In 4 1 the feature has been improved in a number of ways e Anew Merge Background mode is designed for layouts with lots of scenery especially roadbed and ties It draws the scenery into the background image then deletes it from the layout and swaps in the new background The result Is a richer background underneath a simpler more responsive track scenery layer e Anew graphics engine is now doing the export This produces better output and allows higher resolution e The exported image is no longer limited to what you see on the screen You can now choose at export time which features you would like to see in the output track trains scenery Stations etc e Output sizes are now more sensible The default is the native size of the current background adjustable within reasonable limits e A
24. enclosed tracks to the previous selection To remove a section from the selected set shift click it Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Retouchable Link to Layout Grow Roadbed Track Color If you are creating an interchange the sections you select should form a single length of track ending in a stub 3 When all the tracks you want are selected blue right click any of them and choose Selection To Station This creates the station and attaches the selected tracks then brings up Station Properties so you can supply a name A default name is offered starting with Yard If you are creating an interchange change the name to Interchange 4 While the properties dialog is up choose the appropriate industry Click Choose Industry This brings up the Industry Browser dialog In the folder Miscellaneous choose either Yard Tracks or Interchange 5 Click OK to dismiss the dialog The new Station is shown with a big rectangle completely surrounding the set of tracks Wardi hi Tracks Station 614 Vardl Industry Yard Tracks Don t worry about the size of this rectangle itis not used to detect car arrivals and departures See below 6 Check your work Choose the Station tool then hover over an edge of the rectangle The tracks associated with the Station will highlight in green as shown above right To modify a station To change a Station s name position the cursor on one
25. encryption prevents the image from being used in programs other than TrainP layer and TrackLayer and protects the file from opening without the appropriate license If you are licensed to use a layout in TrainP layer then you can open the TPG file in TrackLayer to use as background Layouts distributed with TrainP layer are installed in the trainplayer layouts directory rrw files and trainplayer layouts images tog When you create a new layout with TrackLayer you can store it in the same directories and it will Show up in the Open Layouts dialog The rrw file contains the name and relative location of its image file The two files need not be in the same location Preparing an Image Images on Paper f you have a track plan from a book or magazine or a drawing on a sheet of paper the picture will need to be scanned or otherwise digitized Here are three ways to do this e Scan it yourself Ifyou have a scanner set it for 300 DPI scan and use the scanner software to crop and rotate the image if necessary Save as PG e Visit Kinko s Many outfits will do scanning Take the picture a few dollars a blank CD if you have one and return with an image file e Use a camera A good high resolution image can be made with a digital camera aimed at a layout picture or at the layout itself if you have the equipment and the Know how Images from the Web f you have a track plan on a Web page you can save it as a J PG file for use in
26. it must be rotated until the bridge track joins to a connector An alternative to a turntable is a transfer table a rectangular bed with a bridge which moves laterally For details see Turntables and Transfer Tables To rotate a turntable Right click a point on the circle and choose Rotate R ight clockwise or Rotate Left counterclockwise As a shortcut double click a point on the circle to rotate right i G Double click the rotating turntable to stop rotating Se ia ees The turntable rotates slowly until the bridge track aligns with a connecting track then itstops A train can then be driven onto the turntable from that connector or off it Rotate Right Rotate Left Each time you rotate the turntable it moves to the next connecting track it encounters in the direction of rotation B Turntables are tricky to get right If you rotate one and find it doesn t stop where it should or stops twice at the same connector it means the track isn t laid just where it should be Please report any problems you find with turntables on the published plans You do not have to rotate through each stop You can double click any connecting track and the turntable will rotate directly to that stop by the shortest route double click on rim rotates to next stop same direction as last rotation double click on junction rotates to there via shortest route al aig ft fe eet z l aii T if Hpee i ot Pa Pi F
27. when prompted if ok to overwrite Tour of the Screen Here is a screen shot of the Elizabeth amp Rahway River surrounded by various gadgets main toolbar control bar track tools train window scenery tools File Edit View Tools Train Window Help F E S a a E vanna m Trains x E W Elizabeth amp Rahway Riv EF X6 boxcar40ft or ae Lacawanna Drag gi ES13 4 6 0 swit st Me ETl4 tender AEM X17 boxcardofti Bn G18 gondola TU R19 reefer zm H20 2 bay hop ie N16 caboose Ee a r a Tagga he lt ae ay vo Ao H j A s hi r HEUBEN J g a EET b iena H k p ii E z E r ia on n i iy esc Orginal copyright Kalmbach Publishing Co Licensed to TP Developer ft lt aT Set out Boxcar X15 dry goods trom Lackawanna Jct at Interchange Send Gondola G26 empty from mterciapgs to Py ents E 1 TI a Z Ep m m S oN fo from Interchange to o o Jamesville Salvage a eh sae oe fae The A SS ARS RRS NRE A Clock starts on first train mov 1 15 p Ey Ni eae Tr chock car inventory bar schedule ops window switch window Status bar zoom slider train tree Shown here are Toolbars main and others depending on your license track scenery scripting ops Train control bar a combination control panel and train window for operating and displaying the selected train Layout top v
28. which you normally do once then toggling it on or off whenever the car is loaded or unloaded To select a load for a car e Right click the car and make a choice from the Load Menu described below This lets you choose from a list of load names or from the gallery of pictures in the Load Chooser Both the Load Menu and Load Chooser offer ways to load more than just the selected car e Or right click choose Properties and select from the Load drop down in Car Properties Either way if the car already has a load assigned it will be replaced by the new choice and the car status will be set to Loaded Note another way to seta load for a car is to seta default load for the car type Then every time you create a car of that type it will be assigned the default load See Default Loads below To load or unload the car e Right click the car and choose Load gt Loaded to mark the car as loaded or Load gt Empty to mark it empty e Or click Loaded or Empty on the toolbar GEP GEP Setting the loaded empty status of a car modifies its image in side and top views Emptying the car does not remove its assigned load type Car Load Menu 1 Right click a freight car to see the Load submenu Cut Car Copy Car Delete Car Uncoupte Add Car Train G Empty Loaded Load Chooser Load Unload Car coal Load Unload Cut coal Load Unload Train gravel gravel iron ore The menu does not appear for unlo
29. working together to bring you the world s finest collection of track plans on your screen and runnable with TrainP layer ae Pms cme ee me res indera m a a a ha i one i Bo Sere acca irda ao an Since the first release of TrainPlayer we have featured the most popular book of track plans in history Linn Westcott s classic 101 Track Plans for Model Railroaders First published in 1956 the book has sold over 500 000 copies worldwide and is still in print The plans in this book come in all shapes and sizes 101 of them to be exact most illustrated with that great Linn Westcott artwork which while nowhere close to what today s MR artists can do on their Macs has an Irresistible old fashioned railroad charm about tt 101 Track Plans is just the beginning The TrainP layer collection includes hundreds of track plans contributed by users as well as several sets of professional plans drawn exclusively for TrainPlayer If you have an internet connection you can browse the collection and download any you you are licensed to use There s one plan more interesting than any of these your own If you have a picture of your plan or your club s or the one you Operate once a week there are a couple of ways you can convert it for TrainP layer use So you can run your own trains on your laptop e Do it yourself with TrackLayer TrackLayer is a part of TrainP layer designed to do a very specific job apply track on top of diagrams It s n
30. you are informed and are then licensed to use the program Purchase Upgrade Dialog This dialog takes your current license into consideration and shows you what upgrades are available if any Purchase Upgrade You are licensed for TrackLayer Deluxe Upgrades are available To purchase click one Upgrade to TrackLayer 6 BUILDER Adds Scenery Toolkit Premium Layouts Ops Modules 50p 1000 high quality cars with large images Clicking one of the large buttons takes you to a checkout page on the TrainPlayer shop site where you can complete the transaction You will then typically need to wait for a response by e mail containing the purchased license after which you enter it using Upgrade License fez Running Trains If you ve operated trains on a model railroad then operating them in TrainP layer should come easily This chapter gives the details About Trains The Train Control Bar Moving Trains By Hand Yard Mode Switches Coupling and Uncoupling Horns and Sounds Turntables About Trains In TrainP layer a train is defined as any contiguous set of cars whether moving or not with or without motive power a Single car sitting on a Siding is considered a train However a train will not move unless ithas an engine To move an engineless set of cars you must either couple them to a powered train or use artificial means equivalent to a railroader s hand reaching across the tracks In some areas
31. you indicate settings only for the Scenery Grid To set preferences for default styles use the Scenery Styles dialog Preferences Grid Preferences e Color color of grid dots Default is medium grey e Spacing distance between dots Default is 100 RRU or 1 in HO e Units units for display of spacing value Local Scenery Chooser The local scenery chooser is for selecting scenery objects and adding them to the layout 2 coal_ore mines_sand_coal loader ia gee gt factories J lumber_saw _paper mills J miscellaneous tree 1 bmp tree 1 3 bmip For general information about choosers see Choosers To Add Scenery to the Layout 1 The local scenery tree shows folders of scenery objects residing on your disk Click a folder to see its contents as icons in the list window 2 Click an icon to see a larger view in the preview window 3 To add the selected object to your layout point to Its icon press the mouse button and drag the object to a spot on your layout Alternatively click OK to deposit the selected object in the center of the layout and take down the dialog Note Y ou can click on a spot on your layout with the chooser open then double click with your mouse on a scenery object in the chooser to place that scenery object directly where you wish it on your layout The scenery chooser is a modeless dialog it remains on the screen so you can keep adding scenery unless you clicked OK in step 3 When you
32. 43 Gi 59 Fe Route 17 Shenae Oenver LyorsJnterch 28 7 4 LF i Pi ISa 73 i72 45 fed 26 258 ddi J3 43 Sl 2 Pe Route 1a Sherman Denver Iierchonge il 8 2 a J 5 53 L73 17245 45 6 59 92 Route 19 Shennan Denver Iierchinge a 0 6 G 2 E7 P53 173 172 271 3I 43 Gi 5992 Route 20 Shemen Demer Lyosa hibah i 45 14 5 85 155 173 172 211 238 226 227 J21 272 45 4361 1 92 Route 21 Sherman Denver Lyora bech 37 2 1 iz 1 25 153 173 172 231 258 226 222 45 43 61 59 SF Route 22 Sherman feeover LyorsjInterch 25 7 7 5 1 ae L53 173 221 227 45 43 61 59 92 Fl Route 23 Sherman Oenover Lyorsinterch 42 85 2 Click a route to highlight amp on the Done 75 E53 173 221 222 45 172 231 33 4361 59 92 se To operate 1 In the From and To boxes select the endpoints of the route you want to find For each end you can select either a station by name or a junction by number using drop down menus If you select a station the route will go to or from the junction nearest the center of the station rectangle As soon as you have made choices for both ends the dialog will display the distance a crow would fly between the two points expressed in actual feet and inches 2 Click Go The program begins finding routes and displays a new row in the list for each one it finds The information shown for each route Is e Name an arbitrary but unique name assigned to the route e From To endpoints as chosen in step 1
33. AAR code displayed but not editable AAR code s a comma delimited string of AAR codes indicating car types suitable to carry the load For details see Load AAR Strings Usually you enter a single code for a closed car X boxcar T tank car S stock car R refrigerator car LO covered hopper If more than one type can be used for this load enter a list for example RB RBL X all can carry boxed fruit For more see AAR codes Choose Code button click to display the AAR Codes dialog for choosing one or more codes The list of codes defined in TP is presented in a list box Click a row and the selected code Is entered in the text box Shift or ctl click to select multiple rows and a list of codes is generated lt lt Back Next gt gt move to previous or next load being defined Next changes to OK at the end of the list click to save all the changes and return to the calling dialog Cancel dismiss dialog without adding or modifying any loads Switchlist Window The Switchlist Window shows the current switchlist Each row describes one car movement a car a destination and a load When the car in a row arrives at the given destination then the move is finished and an X appears in the Done column Selecting a row in this window helps you visualize the move When you click a row header left end of row it selects the indicated car on the layout and shows color codes for that car and its destination only hiding all other
34. Begin on the circle at about the same place as in Step 3 10 and drag to form a new handle near but not right on top of the first 11 You now have one complete but kinked loop and another almost complete loop with handle 12 Fix the kink Use the Edit tool E Point to the junction so it highlights as shown press and drag to move tt into position 13 Release when the junction is on the circle 14 And so on Mark the second curve untouchable 15 Draw the next circle Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Rebouchable Add Car Here d 16 Draw the segment to connect to the previous handle 17 Release when connected 18 Draw the upper approach track tangent to the topmost circle 19 Fix the kink in the previous layer Be careful when moving this junction that it does not land on top of the earlier one e do not release where you see a green highlight square 20 And you re done 21 Test the helix Add a loco on one of the approach tracks give it some speed and watch the show It should make two complete loops around before exiting Notes e For best appearance the train should hide as it goes around the lower loops and appear when it gets to the top one You can arrange this by marking track as hidden starting with the lowest loop and continuing until the top loop Mark each track as you add it and be sure to apply the hidden mark before yo
35. Boxcar B send car E i rca B send Boxcar Cars Switchlrst Car To At X10 Hamilton Yard G6 Ingersoll Mac G61 Ingersoll Mac F48 Hamilton Yard X5 Hamilton Yard F63 Ingersoll Mac F4 Hamilton Yard X60 GSW Inc Load From tools a5 Empty trac coil Ha Empty trac Empty Ha Empty trac Empty Ha When the Ops Generator finds an unprepared layout it brings up the Ops Setup Wizard Here you go through the steps to set up your layout and set some ops generation preferences The last step generates a switchlist and brings you to the same State as Quick Start above ready to start delivering cars Ops Manual Setup Here s what it takes to prepare a layout in Get the trains ready You will need freight cars and engines If your layout doesn t already have some create them If you are starting with bare track and aren t too picky about what you get you might try the Random Train Generator Get the track ready For best results you will need a yard or two and an Interchange track You can create these by hand or let the Ops Setup Wizard do the job automatically For more information see Yards and Interchanges Create some industries You will need stations around the layout with industries defined for them Again you can create them by hand or let the Wizard do it For more see Industries Itis up to you to make sure that the industries o
36. Building a Module Check to mark the layout as open for read only When this box Is checked then the next time you save the file you will be prevented from overwriting the original For more see Read Only Layouts Control Panel For operating trains Called from menu command View gt Control Panel Note this control panel has been superseded by the Train Control Bar The one described below is still available call it the old fashioned free standing control panel but the TCB is the preferred device The TrainP layer Control Panel provides all the tools you need to operate trains in a classy brass and walnut frame If it takes too much room on your screen you can choose the minimized version and still control speed and direction The panel operates a single train ata time If you have more than one train select the one you want to operate by one of these methods e Choose a train from the Train menu e Choose from the drop down list in the Train Toolbar e Click a car or train in the Train Tree e Click any car of the train on the layout The selected train appears in the control panel train window and speed and direction indicators are adjusted to match Features of the control panel Locked Yard Mode enabled Train Window Uncoupling Pin Horn Button Train Scroller Speed Dial Uncouple Button Speed Dial Knob Speed Display Forward Reverse Stop Button Minimize Button Close Button Train Window Displ
37. Check Track Options Office 2007 Ht Dodge Ak City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help b 100 150 200 400 2 k 4 NS Fy d Unload Cut Load Unload Train Publish Check Track Options TrainPlayer LA TrackLayer Ft Dodge Ek City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help ET ew Oo 50 100 150 200 400 i k Load U d Cut Load Unload Train Publish Chea Carbon I TrackLayer Ft Dodge amp Elk City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help he lt 2 amp Fa amp Bee Q Q 50 100 150 200 400 GH fk o oe g a U a a a ss ee sd cs Load Unload Cut Load Unload Train Publish Visual Studio Style Road Preferences Settings for tle and roadbed styles Called from menu command File gt Preferences Ties and roadbed are track drawing styles meaning they are displayed on the image as the track is being drawn pian tache e with ties and solid roadbed gt sss In Road Preferences you indicate whether you want to see ties or roadbed on the track and how you want it to appear Preferences ES General Operation Trains Track Switches Style Road Scenery m lies MW Show ties Length 112 Width 10 W Showroadbed Style Bitmap OK Cancel Defaults Help By default settings apply to all track on the layout you get ties and or roadbed on all or none However you can mark individual tracks to be exempt see Track Properties
38. Collections A car collection is a set of car type definitions To add a car to the layout you choose it from a car collection If you use a quick method click a button on the toolbar or choose from the Add Car menu you are choosing from a special collection called the Default Car Set The other method is to select from the Car Chooser where you can browse through many collections and choose cars from any TrainP layer is installed with several car collections including a few default sets There are many many others available for download from the TrainP layer website You can shop through these on the Web tab of your Car Chooser if you find a collection you like you can download the entire set with one click and then use the car types in your layouts If you have a layout which uses cars from some non default collection and you want to send it to your friend J oe then if he is going to see the right cars he will need the same collection on his machine Ifthe collection came from TrainP layer J oe will be given a chance to download a copy for himself If itis a custom set you created yourself then you will need to publish the collection process it into a separate folder and send him a zip of that Using Car Collections Most of the instructions for using car collections are found in other sections of the manual Follow links below for details To browse car collections choose Other from one of the Add Car commands a on th
39. Ctrl A to that line and start execution there on the next Play This gives you a way to run a part of the script over and over Go To Statement Warning it is up to you to make sure the trains are in the right places to be starting at the indicated statement Some statements are more Suitable than others as starting points Working with J unction Actions A junction action is attached to a junction activated when a given car or train passes across it triggers it The trigger can a particular car or train or any or a particular type for details see unction Action Editor When triggered the script attaches itself to the crossing train and starts executing Once it has carried out all its instructions it stops and turns control back over to the train You might think of a junction action as a robot sitting at a trackside location when it sees the appropriate train come by it climbs into the cab and takes over runs until the end of the script then climbs off and goes back to wait for the next one Creating Creating a junction action requires TrackLayer Using the Track or Edit tool right click a junction and choose Action This brings up the unction Action Editor where you can define one or more actions to occur at the junction Once a junction action has been created at a junction itis displayed with a little circle symbol as shown at right The symbol 3 does not appear when the Run tool is active Pi actions Editin
40. Help provide help for the current tab The Apply button is dimmed until you modify some property Once you click it the modifications are applied to the layout and you can no longer cancel the Cancel button becomes dimmed and OK becomes Done At this point if you want to revert back to the original you can use Edit gt Undo The dialog belongs to the layout window It does not remain on display if you close minimize or deactivate the layout Edits are applied automatically when you change the selected car or train If you select a car edit one of its properties then select a different car it behaves as if you had clicked Apply About Sizes and Scales The layouts in 707 Track Plans are designed to be independent of scale so that any plan can be used to design a railroad in any scale Each plan in the book is overlaid with a square grid with the following legend on most pages Ruled lines across plan are 6 apart in N 9 apart in TT 12 apart in HO 18 apartinS 24 apart in O This means a plan designed for a 4x8 HO railroad would serve just as well for a 2x4 layout in N scale or an 8x16 in O TrainP layer adopts the same scheme The program has its own internal grid which is aligned with that of the drawing as the layout is being prepared Aligning the grid establishes the connection between pixels in the image and real world dimensions and allows the program to report measurements in your choice of scale The fol
41. It the right size and shape painting labelling and adding trim This section describes how to edit scenery objects whether drawn by hand or dragged in from the chooser About Editing Scenery Most editing is done using Scenery Select tool the green arrow Ms at the end of the toolbar With this tool active you can click on any type of scenery object to select or modify it As a convenience you can edit some objects when using other tools when using the Rectangle tool you can edit rectangle objects the Ellipse tool can edit ellipses and the Line P olygon tool can edit linear or polygon objects Selecting Objects Before you can work with a scenery object you must select it A selected object is drawn with drag handles as shown at right one on each corner and one in the midpoint of each edge e To select a single object click anywhere in the interior of the object To unselect click outside the object e To select multiple objects a hold the Shift key down while clicking to select an object This will add the object to the selection or remove itif itis already selected or b use the Scenery Select tool and drag a rectangle around the objects you want to select Press Shift to add the surrounded objects to the selection Standard Editing Operations As with just about any selection in any Windows program e To delete selected object s choose Edit Clear from the main menu or press Del e To copy selected object
42. Layout Importing CAD Layouts Debugging and Repairing Preparing a layout in TrackLayer is a many step process fraught with possibilities for error This section gives some tips for avoiding errors and describes tools to help you spot and correct them Zoom in Work on one section of the layout at a time Zoom in so you have room to work You can draw tracks out to the edges of the window then when you scroll over to work on the next section hook up or move the disconnected track ends Inspect visually When you are working in a crowded area it s easy to forget a crossover or siding and it s not easy to tell you ve done it Here are two ways to check for missing track Mouse over With the Track tool E or the Edit tool E active when you move the cursor over a section of track it highlights in green and stands out against the background This makes it easy to tell where there is a background line with no track on it e Flash the background inthe picture at right there is a crossover missing can you spot it Try this use the View Background button E to turn the background on and off say once per second As it flashes on and off your eye can usually spot differences in the track patterns Test the layout e Throw the switches If you can t get a switch to throw it probably means bad trackwork in the vicinity e Test the turntables Make sure rotation stops where it should e Drive a train The ultimate test of a la
43. Properties dialog appears 3 Enter station properties Enter a station name and optional sound Note that we now have a large collection of industrial sounds in the Web chooser under Layouts A sound selected for a station will play when a train first crosses the station boundary Name the station in a way that describes the location The name must be unique for the layout This name will show up in messages like Train 5 arriving at lt station name gt 4 Choose or enter industry properties The bottom half of the dialog is where you define the industry and specify incoming and outgoing loads at this station You can choose a predefined one from the Industry Browser or just type in an industry name and some load names 5 Click OK The program then checks the data you entered and if valid copies it to the selected station If the data is invalid or incomplete you will be prompted to fix it If the incoming or outgoing lists contain load names not Known to the system you will be asked to define them in the next step 6 Define unknown loads Unknown loads are presented in the Load Definition Dialog where you can fix mistyped names or define new ones Loads you create here are added to the closed car loads folder in the Loads collection If you prefer to create a visual load for an open car follow the procedure below insert link here 7 Save the layout The modified station properties are not saved to disk until you save the
44. StartsWith argument STRING string EndsWith argument STRING string NextToken delims File Functions FILE name Open FILE id Close FILE id ReadAll SFILE id ReadLine FILE name SaveVars FILE name ReadVars System Functions RAND I1 12 SUBSTR i1 n S FINDSTR sub s SETTING name RRCLOCK arg READ f SWRITE F a s STRLEN s M SGBOX type s VIEW op name SWITCH j SYSTEM cmd System Variables TIM E DATE LAYOUT TRAIN CAR SPEED KEY X_TRAIN X_ SPEED returns 1 if string contains argument 0 if not returns 1 if string starts with argument returns 1 if string ends with argument returns next substring removes from string open named text file return id or 0 if fail close file read contents and return as string read next line return EOF when done write all user variables to named file read all user variables from named file random integer between i1 and 12 defaults false 100 if not specified substring of s starting at 11 n chars long if n 1 go to end return zero based position of sub within s or 1 if not found return named registry setting rrclock functions get set t add t return contents of text file f as string write string s to file f optionally append 0 if fail return length of s show message s with ok cancel or yes no buttons return 1 0k yes O no get set visibility of named window or feature opSsVisible Show Hide return switch p
45. The Script Editor is always working on a single script If you bring it up on a train having no Script it creates an empty one for you to fill in Editable box for script text Highlight shows current line Right click for Text box editing or Go To commands Play Begin executing the script at the current line Stop Stop the script and the train If recording is in progress stop It Reset to first line of script restore train and switch positions to layout Rewind Point Record Begin recording train moves capturing them starting at the current line Apply update scripts on layout not saved permanently until layout save Buttons OK apply and dismiss Cancel dismiss without saving changes to Done after any save Rewind Go To Statement For debugging and development Go To Statement Is a convenience Point to any line in the script right click and choose Go To Statement and that line becomes highlighted the next to execute when you press Play This gives you a way to run through a section of code while you work on it start at some line run the script a ways stop then go back to the starting point using Go To Statement There is a catch This feature goes to the script statement to be executed but does not reposition the trains It s up to you to make sure the trains are in suitable positions when you Start playing the script Switch Shortcuts As another convenience for script authors you can insert text into the
46. The checks indicating what to hide and show are view settings they are saved with the layout Other choices are global and apply to all displays of ties and roadbed in all layouts Thus you can have one layout showing ties only another showing ties and roadbed but both use the same tie length and spacing settings Tie Properties e Show Ties check to have ties displayed on all non exempt track e Length length of each tie in units selected in the Units drop down at the bottom of the ljen eth dialog The diagram at right shows which dimension is which length e Width width of each tie e Spacing distance between tie centers e Color color of ties Default is dark brown as shown here 7 spacing width Roadbed Properties e Show Roadbed check to have roadbed displayed on all non exempt track e Style choose solid color and specify the color using the color button at right or choose bitmap and browse through the scenery background collection using the browse button e Width width of the generated roadbed in units specified in the Units drop down at the bottom of the dialog To exclude ties or roadbed from specified tracks By default every track on the layout is affected by the Preferences settings You can override this for a specific track section as follows Using the Track Edit tool right click a track section or shift click to build a multi track selection choose Properties and set checkboxes as desired
47. Then a Script was something rather simple that you could attach to a train In versions 6 0 1 we introduce Advanced Scripting with plenty of enhancements such as e Scripts may now be attached to locations on the layout to spring into action when specified cars pass by e A master script can be attached to the layout to carry out startup operations when the layout opens e The script language now becomes a full programming language Including variables if while subroutines inline procedures arithmetic system functions property set get e New Script Central dialog organizes all scripts and reference materials e Variables system functions function families This chapter has been completely rewritten to describe the new system See About Scripting for a guide to the documentation or just march through the links below About Scripting Scripting Ul Devices Working With Scripts How to Get Started in Scripting TP Programming Language For more information visit the Scripting Page on the TrainP layer website About Scripting A TrainPlayer script is a series of instructions for operating a layout It may contain commands to drive trains throw Switches set preferences execute menu commands make decisions pretty much everything you need to choreograph a complex operation then play it back and watch It all run automatically Scripting is the name we give to the enjoyable and challenging activity of designing and developing thes
48. This command is dimmed ifa master script is already defined for the layout S Select All Editing edit the master script directly in Script Central or launch the Script Editor from there EE al Enabled l Refresh Deleting Use Script Central or see note Add Note Playing back by default the master script starts automatically as soon as the layout is Add Master Script Opened and it runs to completion You can prevent this from happening by disabling the master script using the Enabled toggle on the context menu If you want to rerun the master script bring it up in the Script Editor click Rewind then Play Working with Subroutines A subroutine is a named batch of code residing outside of any script which can be called in and used when needed That is instead of having ten lines in a script to perform some action say reverse an engine using a turntable you could replace it with a single line calling a ten line subroutine named something like ReverseViaTurntable Subroutines make for cleaner code help organize complex tasks and have other benefits A subroutine is stored in a text file located in a special folder the Scripts folder in your TrainP layer data directory If you build up a collection of these you can browse and edit them in Script Central ipts Junction Actions Subroutines Reference Settings Routine First Line fe Subroutine ArriveStation lt Train Py Sample Proc proc echo this
49. Ways to operate a turntable e Right click anywhere on the rim of the table or the center point if not occupied by a car and choose the direction of rotation from the context menu The table rotates in the indicated direction to the next stop e Double click the rim or center The table rotates to the next stop going in the same direction as any previous rotation counter clockwise the first time e Double click a junction where a connecting track touches the rim The table rotates to align with the indicated connector rotating in whichever direction is closest Managing Cars Railroads need cars to carry goods and passengers The typical model railroad has cars of various types sitting around on the track a bunch more in a cabinet on the wall and probably a few more still in their boxes waiting to be painted In TrainP layer there are no cars waiting to be painted and that cabinet is huge There are thousands of car types to choose from and an infinite supply of each when you pull one down from the cabinet another appears in Its place All Kinds of cars are available diesel locomotives steam engines freight cars passenger cars Snowplows in a large variety of colors and styles Cars are organized in car collections groups of cars related by style or road name like individual shelves in the cabinet Several car collections are provided with the program many more are available by download If you don t find what you n
50. You can drag resize or right click for more options gt i l i Hide SS o Framed Auto Frt Properties 7 Z Behind the scenes the note window Is a floating window containing a rectangular scenery object which supplies the style By default it has a thin resizing border drag an edge or corner to resize the window or press and drag anywhere inside to move It Right click for the context menu with these commands e Hide take down the window To bring it back a script must execute another Note command e Framed if checked the window gets a title bar with close box as shown above Default is a thin resizing border e Auto Fit if checked causes the window to resize automatically when its text changes The width of the window is unchanged height is adjusted so text will just fit Default is off meaning the window size remains unchanged regardless of text e Properties brings up the Scenery Properties dialog where you can set text and background styles Managing the window from a Script involves these commands bring up Note Window and display the string May be a multi line string if quoted see Display Strings note with no argument gt take down Note Window note lt string gt Specify size and position to apply at next showing set NoteWndRect lt t 1l1 b r gt Coordinates are relative to main app window sect NOCEWnCAULOPAL lt 071 gt turn off on auto fit at next showing
51. a dashed line Any train passing over this section will appear hidden Delete Track d Hidden Tunnel Untouchable Al Petouchable Pe Chyrter Hay alge qe fe Place Train Here fe tri Add Car Here Paste Here Completed track Congratulations The track for the Rockport amp Oyster Bay is complete Add properties Choose File Properties Enter the layout name add some comments and save the completed layout Add trains and enjoy Use Train New Train to create a train LESM SY Sa E pu on the layout You re We a A Shee Ye ready to begin operating i o r ee W a Dimensions The first part of the process of developing a layout in TrackLayer is to specify its size and dimensions This is done by overlaying the image with a grid of standard size as described in this chapter For background on layout dimensions and scaling see About Sizes and Scales in the TrainP layer part of the manual About the Grid Adjusting the Grid Resizing and Rescaling About the Grid On every diagram in 7107 Track Plans Linn Westcott drew a grid of evenly spaced lines accompanied every few pages by a legend like this Ruled lines across plan are 6 apart in N 9 apart in TT 12 apart in HO 18 apart in S 24 apart in O If you have a plan and a modelling scale in mind you can measure distances or find the total size of the layout by counting grid lines The
52. add it to the master list How this works is described below Instead of or in addition to typing load names you may choose incoming outgoing loads from the Load Chooser as follows Choose Loads Brings up the Load Chooser for selecting incoming and outgoing loads The Load Chooser gives you browsable access to the entire collection of loads on your machine and on the web When the Load Chooser is called up from incoming outgoing text boxes it arranges itself so the two windows are side by side and operates by drag and drop You select a load in the chooser window drag It to either the Incoming or Outgoing Loads box and it adds the load name to the list The chooser window remains up so that you can do this repeatedly ound Local Web m coal gravel or ndustry id ainers Hercules Cement Co Choose Industry i heavy _ soe et m luner ogs 1 Incoming Loads Outgoing Loads cal military cement bulk Portand cement bags aa miscellaneous E a EA a chemicals cement tanks m steel goods chem tanks small O iW truck trailers 7 eae cement tanks foad for class FG Click a highlighted car to load or unload Ctr click loads cut shift click loads train ok _ Canel __ Hep ie a jeie Dme a Or instead of drag and drop you can select a load and click OK This will dismiss the chooser and add the load to either the Incoming or Ou
53. another copy of the train in the current one You can paste either a car ora train to a specific point on the track Right click the track and choose Paste Here Generate random trains When you choose the Generate Random Trains command on the Train menu it erases the current set of trains and replaces it with a random collection of cars and trains scattered around the layout You can control the generation to some extent by setting Train Preferences Removing Cars and Trains To delete a train right click the train image or one of the train windows and choose Delete Train The train is permanently erased from the layout To delete a car do one of the following e right click the car image or icon In a train window and choose Delete Car e click to select the car image and press the Del key e select the car and choose Edit Cut or Edit Delete All these actions are undoable Relocating a Train Normally you place a train where you want it by driving It there However not all situations allow that and sometimes you find yourself wishing you could just reach out and pick the thing up off the track TrainPlayer has a couple of commands for this purpose one moves a train from its current location to the spot of your choice the other turns a train around end for end To move a train to a specific location 1 Select the train to be moved 2 Position the cursor on the destination track right click and choose Place Train Here
54. are finished click Done or Cancel Tree Contents lt named folders gt Scenery objects in the named categories 1 1 Folders in this tree are those in the Scenery folder in your TrainPlayer app data directory By default these match those available on the web However if you change the arrangement of files on your disk the changes will be reflected in the tree Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files by Refresh Refresh Reload contents from disk Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Find Find Next Properties Display folder properties wi Properties Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Export Filenames List Menu Add selected scenery object to layout Icon View Show scenery objects as icons pyres Show scenery objects in list form Web Scenery Chooser The web scenery chooser is for downloading folders of scenery objects from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Scenery Folder 1 The web scenery tree shows folders of scenery objects available on the web Click to open a folder containing the types of object you want 2 The objects in the folder are downloaded to a temporary folder on your disk called the cache and the list window displays the
55. as follows Some are duplicates of commands available in TrainP layer Edit tool for selecting moving deleting track or other objects Track tool for drawing straight track sections and switches Circle tool l or l for drawing guide circles used in making curves T le tool urntable too for drawing turntables Station tool for drawing station areas also available in TrainP layer Run tool View Background View Tracks View Grid View Refresh The Blank Layout for running trains behaves just like TrainP layer turns on off background image turns on off display of tracks turns on off display of grid refreshes and updates screen When TrackLayer starts it presents a default blank layout 4 x 8 HO scale with a 12 grid At this point you can e Load an image Ifyou have a picture or track plan you want to work with ignore the default layout and instead load the picture If the image Is already in the form of a graphics file see Loading an Image in the next section otherwise see Preparing the Image to get the image ready for TrackLayer use e Start drawing The default 4x8 space is ready for track and useful for learning or sketching If you want to start drawing you can go to Straight Track and Switches e Change the size and scale fa 4x8 HO layout isn t what you have in mind create a new blank layout the size and shape you want See Creating a New Blank Layout Once you choose a part
56. as you can add connecting tracks at the side edges and tie them somehow into the existing track To make room for the connectors it may be necessary to resize the layout using the Resize Rescale tool Here is an example in which the Custer amp Front Range has been enlarged and modified to work as an NTrak module Connecting tracks were copied from a template and pasted into the enlarged side areas then connecting tracks Shown in red were added by hand is a Ea a OUARESTOWH j i i a J rA i rai DLL y a i i e Otiginal copyrigh SKsimbach Publishing Co Licensed to TP Develape a e From scratch Even if you start with a blank layout TrackLayer provides assistance in creating modules Choose File gt New to bring up the New Layout dialog Choose one of the standard NTrak sizes from the Size drop down If Add connectors is checked then the new layout will be created with stubs on each side appropriately positioned as shown below Scale s M Add comectors Cancel Dimensions Heaght 2 Layout inches Width 24 This feature is available only for NTrak modules not HO or other scales Module Orientation The Module Manager requires module layouts to be oriented in specific ways as shown in the following table Straight a Main line across bottom Corner i fff Main line from lower left to upper right a a n a e ee al ce bil sssnonnnn y a eem En a
57. author If this box is blank please provide some information to be included in the published version Full pathname of original layout file This file is not modified by the publish operation Destination for the published layout Three new files will go in this folder To select a new output folder use the Browse button Name to be given to the published layout file This is usually the layout name plus rrw extension Errors encountered while processing list of external links if any Click to carry out the publish operation Click to abort without publishing be a Jk PTOI a A F Y p 5 7a eee ere ervey a oo eeeoee 2 ta What s New Since 4 0 In 4 2 e Revamped graphics Infinite zoom smoother performance better appearance e View drag grab the view and drag it around with the hand cursor just like in a map program e Carsizes specify sizes of individual cars rather than settling for the defaults the way it used to work e Background colors choose your favorite background color for a blank layout and another for the area outside it e Fixes many small fixes and enhancements as detailed in the Readme In 4 1 e Ties precise railroad ties laid for you automatically with a single click e Export image save your layout as a picture or merge scenery with background and reduce layout complexity e rack transforms flip or rotate track sections or entire yards e Animation add
58. balona then dkE Go Spociy location by choosing ether station came or junction Fyer 133 227 226 222 270 173 17 45 43 61 50 92 153 227 226 222 45 43 61 9 92 ITI 227 225 222 45 172 291 33 43 61 39 oe 133 227 226 258 201 172 45 435 61 Se a2 1S3 P27 221 P22 45 49 G1 59 92 dod fa 220 173 172 45 49 61 59 Fe oe _ Zit sc r al EDER EEN Dim r Interthange war aa herrea Dim r Lyons interch 32 17 s Route 4 Sherman Deret Lycncinterch 49 2 5 iz Dewar Interchange i ii Denar byg b 37 7 5 7 Route 17 Sherman Derwer Interchange as 4 ig aun a 183 173 TET a3 43 i 92 153 173 221 222 45 172 291 3343 61 59 92 153 175 228 222 22 230 241 33 43 61 59 92 153 173 220 227 226 222 45 43 Gl S3997 Denver Lyons niech 42 4 5 F Route 293 Sherman Dems r a Interchange k aie e E F Rewer Lyons imi 286 5 H EEE ui or os Ta gesevate ruled daien From ond Te enoees than ob Ga Spey keien by choca emer Gane pem OF jinete i was Dimar pos ie W217 3 Hiria ARNA r M Dimar iiarchage Ha Li DEMET s Cpa a IAF 8 Demrar Reerchenge M4 i benet ea Lie a Pal Tals Dinei Lyetaiterch 4705 it bemear interchange aS 12 Hima SL Teas L At the moment this is as far as you can g
59. be edited so you can change it to say whatever you like You do not need to ensure the label is unique Unfortunately the terminology in the program confuses these two The menu command for turning car labels on and off is Show Car IDs on the Train menu The text box where you edit the label in Car Properties is called Car ID Both actually refer to car labels not internal IDs In Ops windows the car label is displayed in a column simply called Car For information about how to display car IDs see Car ID Display Car Notes New in version 6 0 is the ability to add a car note to any car This can be any string of information you wish to attach to the car like a post it note stuck to the side You create a car note in the Car Properties dialog Itis saved with the car in the layout file and displayed in various places tooltips dialogs Itis accessible via the car system function In scripts so itis handy for script authors keeping track of car movements Car Images Cars are displayed in two ways as top views on the layout and as side views in the train windows Each view of each car type is in a separate file so a typical car collection has a folder containing dozens of small image files You can find plenty of examples in your Cartypes folder These image files are not created or edited in TrainPlayer If you want to modify car images say to apply your own paint scheme to a set of cars or create a new collection from scratch you
60. bit of information depending on the condition For example superimposed junctions shows one of the two junctions in the No column the other under E xtra The dialog not only reports errors but helps you fix them When you double click a numbered item in the list it zooms in and highlights the track or junction in error The dialog is modeless so it stays up while you fix errors In addition to reporting errors the Layout Check dialog reports if your layout has any links to external layouts or requires any car collections not normally installed This information can be useful if you are planning to publish the layout Dialog controls Displays errors and external links list box l Ifan error has a number in the No column you can double click that line to zoom in and highlight the error area Refresh Click to repeat the track check for example after you have fixed an error The layout is rechecked and a new list of errors presented Repair IDs Click to repair Duplicate ID errors Track Errors The comprehensive list of errors reported by the track checker are listed here Many of these are designated internal meaning they are program errors a user should not see unless the layout has been corrupted Unspecified error Object flagged for delete Invalid object ID Unretrievable object Invalid junction number on track Same junction number on both ends of track Bad track length Invalid station number Object has ze
61. block is indicated by endproc The thereafter any script can call the proc by name to execute that block of statements bee Master script on layout Tremont Se echo This layout has scripts For d proc SanpleProc echo this 18 a sample inline procedu endproc Procs are typically defined inside the master script they are recognized as soon as the layout is opened and can be called by any scripts therein Procs defined inside other scripts are not recognized until the containing script has been run i once and the proc statement encountered How To Get Started There is a lot of material to be covered on the subject of scripting Here is a Suggested recipe for easing your way into it 1 Watch the L27S in action Included with the latest release is the Scripted Tremont amp Cambridge RR filename L27s rrw This layout has a single passenger train which makes regular rounds stopping at several stations along the way The train is driven by a train script When it reaches each scheduled stop a junction action at that location kicks in and takes over the train parks It in the station waits for a change of passengers then moves back out onto the mainline where the train script again takes control In addition to demonstrating train and junction scripts the L27s has a master script which does nothing but put a message on the status bar and illustrate the concept Here s how to get the most out of the L27s demo 1 Op
62. can see how you like it before you commit Clicking Cancel in this dialog will revert back to your previous app style The TrainP layer style is one we developed to match the brass and wood motif of the program For pictures of other styles see Sample Application Styles below Some styles have adjustable colors TrainP layer is one of them With one of these styles in effect you can move the Hue and Saturation Sliders to adjust the colors and brightness of the theme There is no recipe for doing this fool with it until you get Something you like Background Colors There are two types of background on the TrainPlayer screen You can choose your favorite colors for each of these window background Layout background color of the layout surface for a new layout or one which does not have a background image The default for this color is off white To seta different background color for a particular layout use the Color button o Window background color surrounding the layout when it does not fill the document window Default is a light gold To change one of these colors click the appropriate color button in the dialog and select from the system color chooser Sample Application Styles x TrackLayer Ft Dodge Elk City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help ia ie ed i ch GS OX Lh Se QQ 50 100 150 200 400 SB g 0 2 MGA 2 oe D ee 0 a M ee ed cs load Unload Cut Load Unload Train Publish
63. car type First you will need to decide which load collection you want it to go into and use a paint program to prepare top and side images of the load Then bring up the Load Collection Editor and follow the instructions for Adding a New Car Type Creating a closed car load is simpler because it requires no images The easiest way to do this is to edit an industry in Station Properties in the Incoming or Outgoing Loads box type in the name of the load you want to create then click OK If the load name is not recognized you get an alert asking if you want to create it and prompting for additional necessary info For advanced users there is a quicker way Closed car loads are defined in the following file located under your TrainP layer application data directory TrainPlayer Cartypes Loads z_closed_car_loads xml You can open this file in Notepad and if you can make sense of it feel free to add delete or modify lines But caution if you change your version layouts you obtain from the web may complain about missing loads Car Properties For viewing and editing properties of the selected car Called from Properties on the Car context menu See also About the Properties Dialog Car Train Layout Advanced Type 3 bay hopper Collection Default Steam Class HT 3 bay hopper Load loaded gravel Car properties are of two kinds those associated with the general car type and those of the
64. change layers Polylines and Polygons A polyline is a series of connected line segments In a polyline of two or more segments add one more between the start and end points and you have a closed fillable polygon Both types which we will call poly objects have e Two editing modes Click to select a poly object and you see normal drag handles at the comers of the rectangle occupied by the object Click again and the handles appear on segment endpoints shared ones are called vertices which you can move to change the shape of the figure a A ng a gt Mn Mig anata Nar a a Sed eee sates i i h italy ean FP ial Miia an e Smoothing at vertices Smoothing means changing a sharp corner to a smooth curve a Bezier curve to be exact You can request to have this done at any or all vertices of a poly object An example is shown in the right hand vertex of the polyline at the top of this page e Special context menu commands When you right click a Segment in a poly object the command Delete Polygon Segment shows up on the menu choose It to delete the clicked segment If you do this to a segment of a polygon It becomes an unclosed polyline When you right click a polyline the command Close Polygon becomes available to automatically connect the endpoints and create a closed polygon a Bitmaps We use the term bitmap image to refer to any image coming from a graphics file bmp jpg png or other
65. choose Action 2 In the J unction Action Editor you can choose a triggering device or leave the default Any Train then click in the text box to enter your script You might start with something like this echo Crossing the junction 3 Click OK This saves the action to the layout but not yet to the disk until you save the layout Bring up the Schedule Window so you can see the output 5 Runa car across the junction using the throttle As soon as the center of an eligible car crosses in this case the first car of any train the action should trigger and show the message 6 Go hog wild Look at the Reference window in Script Central to get an idea what commands you can use type one into the text box run your car across and see what happens gt 4 Write a Train Script Writing a train script is no harder than writing a junction action but it involves an additional complexity or two The procedure 1 Select the train you want to drive and move it into a starting position The script will begin running the train from this position 2 Right click any car and choose Train gt Script gt Edit Either that or click the Edit button on the Script Toolbar Either way you get the Script Editor showing a blank script with a machine generated header 3 Type some commands into the text box The most reasonable way to start is to give the train some speed and throw some switches to direct its route Your code might look like spe
66. default set zoom To Diesel For more see Car Inventory Bar and Adding Cars and Trains MEn eE Steam Tender Properties Creating Your Own Default Set Pullman There is a white paper on this subject in the How To section saggage of our website see Customizing Default Cars m Reefer Hopper Gondola Boxcar Tankcar Flatcar Caboose Car Loads A load is a batch of goods you can carry in a freight car Ithas a name like coal or pipes along with top and side images which are superimposed on the car images when you load a car Associated with each load is a list of car types eligible to carry the load so you can t put coal in a flatcar or farm equipment in a hopper Loads with images are suitable for use in open top cars like flatcars gondolas and hoppers For closed cars like boxcars and tankcars there is a large collection of closed car loads represented by generic symbols on top views and by text on side views TrainP layer comes with hundreds of load types and easy ways to browse and deposit them in cars The loads come ready to use open a random layout and you ll see that every freight car has already been assigned a typical load ready to be loaded or emptied with a click You can change the load associated with any car and or set a default load for each car type About Loads Loads come in two varieties Open car loads are for open top cars gondolas flatcars hoppers and have a pa
67. diagrams below this is at the bottom The track closest to the front is the main line which generally runs uninterrupted around the entire layout For full details about the the Ordering positioning and labelling of tracks see Building a Module Sizes of modules vary but are not random The typical NTrak straight module is 2 feet deep and 4 6 or 8 feet wide The depth may vary an extension may be added to front or back but if the widths were to vary It would become impossible to arrange a series of modules into a seamless loop And if the width were much bigger than 8 feet you d never get the thing in the truck Module Types a J AA Straight Corner Junction A straight module has connection points on opposite edges of a rectangle You can join another module on either side The main line is in front and generally goes straight across A corner module has connection points on adjacent sides of a square with curved track between When you join two modules onto a corner they form a 90 degree angle Only the outer tracks proceed through a corner module An inside corner module is an inverted corner which introduces a turn in the opposite direction Inside corner modules are not common A junction module has four sets of connection points on three sides of a rectangle in a back to back corner arrangement You can join up to four other modules to a junction one on each side two at the top i e with reference to the above dia
68. download only those items you do not yet have on your local machine e Improved car descriptions Tooltips and dialogs are now more consistent in displaying car type and car class names See the updated definitions under About Cars e Improved handling of car and scenery errors f you open a layout requiring external cars or scenery the alert dialog is now more sensible and more useful and now includes a page of help e Plenty of bug fixes and small improvements e Internal work related to Mac development and change of web host For a complete list of what has changed see the Readme What Was New in 5 0 Modular Railroading Version 5 brings you the ability to create exposition size layouts the same way they do at the train shows by hooking together pre built modular units Choose from our large collection of modules and module templates or build your own then snap them together on a virtual show floor in your choice of arrangements One click turns the assembly into a fully connected modular layout ready to run There is a whole new chapter of the manual on the subject see Modular Railroading See also What s New Since 4 0 What s New Since 3 0 Web Car Chooser The web car chooser is for downloading and installing car collections from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser JJ Steam For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Car Collectio
69. edge of the station s rectangle so it highlights right click and choose Station Properties You are prompted to enter a new name To change size shape or position position at a side or corner of a station then press and drag To delete a station Position the cursor on one edge of the station s rectangle so it highlights then press the Del Key To define a sound at a station Right click the station and choose Station Properties Click the browser button and you are presented with the Sound Chooser dialog Choose a sound from the list Click the preview window to hear the sound If you like it click OK and it will become the station sound played once whenever a train arrives at the station Industries Industries give your railroad a purpose By defining industries in conjunction with the load system you specify what sorts of goods are to be transported from where to where and by what means About Industries An industry in TrainP layer is defined as a place where goods are exchanged where cars are loaded and or unloaded Industry properties include a name a location and two lists of load types incoming and outgoing The loads define what car types are required to haul them Industries are different from other TrainP layer objects they do not have icons and are not selected from a chooser or downloaded from the web We do provide a list you can choose from but it is mainly designed to give you ideas and templates
70. end of the bridge track so it highlights with a green square When you are pointing to the bridge track end only the track end highlights not the circle 4 Press and drag outwards to form the second connector You will have to eyeball where to drop the track end so that it aligns with the bridge in this case the program does not help You can draw the other direction if you prefer starting at the far end and dragging in toward the circle ust make sure the bridge end and not the circle is highlighted when you press or release To move or resize a turntable 1 Choose the Edit Tool be 2 Click any point on the rim of the turntable or the bridge track Both are selected and colored dark blue Press the rim of the circle and drag Both the circle and the bridge track move together 4 Press the shift key while dragging to resize instead of move U Note that when you are editing the shift key behaves opposite to the way it works when creating a new circle or turntable When dragging a selected circle or turntable without shift it moves as a rigid unit with shift it resizes and also allows you to reorient the bridge as you drag To delete a turntable 1 Choose the Edit Tool bs 2 Point to the rim of the turntable so the circle highlights 3 Press the Del key You can also delete a turntable by selecting It or including it in a set of selected objects then using Edit Delete or Edit Cut Repairing a broken turn
71. filling the window Neti TF Local Web l 4 GA Layouts 101 a No Name J i Modules NT 124008 a HO NT 1foat 3i NTrak NT Zoot gg Components NTrak Foot comer fi Scenic Piara Nireak Hog junction par ENAT Ea i NTrak 4f GJ Premium z Trak 4foot comer Ui Standard T NT foot i F n A Rece a NT Boot E D iai Hadas NT 4foot 5 Choose a second module and drag it into the MM You can drop it on either end of the existing module as indicated by red highlights which show up while you are dragging see left image below Let go while a highlight is showing and the incoming module will snap onto the existing one 6 Continue dragging modules in to build the assembly Additional modules can be dropped onto either end of the chain or in between two linked modules wherever the highlight shows up 7 To replace a module drag another one onto the center of it In this case the highlight is a red X above right indicating that the incoming module will replace the existing one 8 To make a turn add a corner module 9 To make a loop add four corners and the right number of modules in between so that the ends just meet Dragging Modules from Windows Explorer An alternative method of adding modules to the Module Manager is to drag them from Windows Explorer instead of the Layout Chooser To do this 1 With TrainP layer running and the Module Manager visible bring up Windows Explorer Start gt All P
72. graphics format bmp png jpg gif and the simple text file can be created by the program or by hand This scheme was designed to make it easy for users to create their own animations Because animated images are tied to scenery creating and manipulating them requires TrackLayer with Scenery Toolkit Viewing and playing them in an existing layout can be done in TrainP layer except in the current version you cannot start or stop animation if you don t have access to the scenery toolbar Triggers events which cause animations to start and stop We have in mind a variety of these but for the time being there are only two Station trigger animation starts when the lead car of a train any train enters a given station and stops when the last car leaves This is the same scheme which controls sounds attached to stations so if you want a sound to play at the same time the animation moves use a Station trigger on the animation and specify a sound on the same Station Junction trigger animation starts when the lead car of a train crosses a given junction and ends when the last car crosses it Triggers are specified using the Scenery Properties Animation tab as described below Adding Animation to Your Layout There are two ways to add animated images to your layout from the Scenery Chooser or via Load Bitmap The first is easier the second more flexible Using the Scenery Chooser The initial release of this feature comes with a
73. grid EF Taniej E Frames auto anm e auto 1 png auto 2 png auto 3 png auto 4 png es If the animation type is anm then you can edit the values in this grid for animated gifs the data is uneditable in fact for the time being the Frames button does nothing at all if you are dealing with gif rather than anm Times are in milliseconds Filenames can be changed they need not be numbered sequentially once they have been listed in an anm file but they must exist and all be in the same folder as the anm file This dialog appears automatically whenever you import a sequence of image files Playing check or uncheck to start or stop animation The setting does not take effect until the dialog comes down Play once check if you want the animation sequence to play once and then stop instead of repeating continuously This applies whether you start the animation manually from the context menu or automatically based on a trigger Rewind after play check if you want the image to revert to its first frame after every play If you do not check this box then Stopping the animation will freeze it and starting it later will pick up where it left off Note due to a bug in the current version you may need a View Refresh to update the image so it will go back to its first frame Trigger type drop down choose a trigger action or None At the moment there are two actions available when a train passes through a station or whe
74. grid is what relates the picture to real world measurements When you load a diagram into TrackLayer the program just sees an array of dots It doesn t know where the ruled lines are or whether the picture represents a four by eight table a fifty foot clubroom or a map of the county You have to LAKE BENNETT tell it The first step in creating a layout is adjusting the TrackLayer grid t peri the nene ie of the image gt The grid is not normally visible you can toggle it P on and off using View Grid but it comes on automatically when you load an image file It 54 comes up in an arbitrary position as shown at left and normally all you have to do is drag so the two grids line up Sometimes it s a little trickier The legend for oa Springfield Electric Lines plan 70 says the ruled lines are double spaced 12 for N 24 for HO etc in which case the TrackLayer grid has to be 12 xf UTE Le For the complete list of the modelling scales and grid separations built into TrackLayer see About Sizes and Scales You can do some interesting experiments with the grid For example suppose you wanted to build the Gorre amp Daphetid plan 17 in half the space Double the grid spacing and here s what it would look like Good luck navigating those curves Adjusting the Grid There are a few things you need to know before working with the grid Grid must be on display Use View
75. gt o e FY showing the three separate car moves required to service the waybill To make this a bit more descriptive we introduce the symbol to mean car is loaded during this move Now the schematic becomes Y gt S gt R gt Y meaning the car is empty for two of the three legs of the trip loaded for the other If the industry is receiving goods instead of shipping them the same schematic applies except in this case S is the offline shipper R is the receiving industry on the layout so the cycle of moves is Y gt interchange S gt industry R gt Y How Waybills Are Used Each time you generate a new ops session a waybill is created for each industry on the layout Each industry has a list of incoming and outgoing loads the waybill generator picks one randomly and chooses whether the industry will be shipper or receiver These waybills are then used as input to the switchlist generator Each move in the generated switchlist is associated with a waybill and represents one step in its cycle To see the waybill for a switchlist move right click a row in the Switchlist grid and choose Show Waybill This brings up a dialog like that pictured above This dialog is read only you can view but not modify it In the current version of the program you cannot view the complete list of waybills you have to view them one ata time Also waybills cannot be saved and reused you get a new set for each ops generation Both of the
76. if changes have been made externally Add Note Creates a new empty note and selects itso you are ready to enter text into it See Script Notes Add Master Script Creates an empty master script if the layout does not have one Script Central Subroutines Tab For viewing and editing subroutines and procs See also Script Central Tabs script Central First Line Subroutine ArriveStation lt Train gt eee _ eae SE A am a a a a a a ee ee esaii amive iene Subroutine AniveS Parameters 41 lt Train gt i clean astblock amive leave subroutine ene a5 lt Station gt le avestation anive _leave subroutine Lea vet 23 c tation Li leavestationslow amve_leave 7 Subroutine Leave a4 wea Aea tootandga amve_leave Subroutine TootAn hot See ae _ GetCarAAR car GetCarAAR is use TT t k m m k w 5 lt Stop After 26 lt Speed Limi a to a subroutine double click to edit in TILL R R E R RE R R RE E RER R R OR LLL LiL This tab shows all the text files located in your TP Scripts folder and subfolders whether or not they are used by the current layout If you want to prevent a file in that folder from appearing in this list rename it to start with underscore e g _hiddenfile txt Also shown in the list are any procs defined in code which has been processed by the layout Usually procs are defined in the master script and are processed automatically on layout open so they appear in
77. in TrainP layer Not any more You can now reach across the track with a non prototypical railroader s fingertip and move the train along the tracks Just as you would on a real layout if you needed to relocate some cars or your engine had Stalled To move a train by hand position the cursor over the car you want to drag The cursor changes to a hand oai YJ Press and drag in either direction and the train follows You will get the hang of this in about five seconds Train dragging works no matter what tool you are using Track Edit Run etc If you have Auto F ollow enabled To throw a switch while dragging press the space bar This throws the next Switch coming up in the direction the train is moving The train must be moving for this to work To couple while dragging bump the train you are dragging into another one and they couple To uncouple position the cursor between two cars it changes to an uncouple icon like this Click to uncouple at this position Note the checkbox Shift click between cars to uncouple in Preferences gt Operation determines whether uncoupling requires shift click instead of simple click If this box is checked the uncouple icon does not appear and uncoupling does not happen unless you are pressing the Shift key If the train is already moving you can drag by hand when you let go the train resumes its previous speed and direction What does not happen while dragging some action
78. is a sample _ HHRHHHKKKHKKKAKRKKHKRNKHKRKKARNKHRHHHERE 51 Anive Station bet subroutine Subroutine Arive Sti 7 Paraneters al Train gt 52 AriveStation Testit subroutine _ Subroutine Amive Styl He lt Station gt S3 Anive Station Time t subroutine Subroutine Arive St 3 lt Station Li 4 CheckBlocksTest tt subroutine Subroutine CheckB ad lt 3top at gt Creating the program does not have a mechanism for creating a subroutine ust use Notepad or other text editor create a text file and store it in the Scripts folder in your TP App Data directory Any text file in this folder or its subfolders shows up in the Subroutines tab of Script Central The name you give the file becomes the command used to call the routine minus the txt extension The name should be one word no Spaces underscores ok and should be descriptive of what the routine does Editing you can edit a subroutine directly in Script Central or right click and choose Edit in Notepad After you edit a subroutine and save its file the changes will go into effect the next time the routine Is called Deleting you can delete a subroutine a using Script Central or b by deleting the file using Windows Explorer Working with Procs A proc short for procedure is a Subroutine not stored in its own file but fn Script Editor embedded in a larger script A proc statement in a script defines a block of Ad statements and gives ita name the end of the
79. layout as a rectangular area with a dashed blue outline and one or two lines of text Stations are visible only at certain times a when you are using the Station tool b when you choose View Stations or c when you are working In an ops session Stations may have sounds attached to them The sound will play whenever a train goes through the station Available sounds include farm noises traffic crossing bells running water and many others or you can supply your own Many of the layouts available in TrainPlayer are equipped with stations The ops version provides a generator which can create them automatically If neither of those helps this section describes how to create or edit your own stations by hand About arrivals and departures The point of a station is to let the program know where a car is located so it is useful to understand how it determines that Associated with each station is one or more track sections You can see these by hovering over a station edge using the Station tool For a car to be in a Station it must be on one of these track sections Ata normal station the car must also be sitting completely or partially within the station rectangle at a yard style station this is not required A car arrives at a normal station when it a is on one of the station s tracks and b crosses the rectangular boundary It arrives ata yard style station when it moves onto any of the station s tracks It departs when these
80. might be one or more actions defined to trigger on different events The dialog is modeless so it can remain on the screen while you work on the layout You can move around to different junctions or change your selection in Script Central and change what junction the dialog is showing The dialog works on one action at a time with arrow keys for moving through the list of actions at the junction The J unction Action Editor is a good place to develop action scripts but unlike the Script Editor itis nota place to run or test them There are no Play or Stop buttons in this dialog To testa junction action you have to run a Suitable car across the junction B Junction Action Switch 65 pos 0 rigger When crossed When Crossed By Train Type J65 action 55 minute stop at Fairfield Station at z4 top after 0 0 05 forvard speed 15 end J65 action r Actions 4 gt t0f1 Add _Deete E J unction Action Triggers A junction action begins execution when some train or car passes across it You can choose what triggers the action a specific car or train or a class of them The list of choices for trigger type is as follows where the first column is the name second tells what kind of argument is required if any third shows what will actually trigger the action Any Train first car of any train Car car id car with specified id
81. moving images which spring into action as the train rolls by e Car ID display improved mechanisms for turning car labels on and off e AnyRail improvements repaired turntables better conversion of flex track in imports from AnyRail In 4 0 Car Loads Industries Yards amp Interchanges Default Car Sets e Ops Generators e Ops Windows e Ops Setup Wizard e Waybills S witchlists Color Codes Changes in the manual for 4 0 e All new chapter on Ops includes pages on Waybills Switchlists Generators Ops Windows Ops Setup Wizard e New chapter Managing Cars includes older pages from trains chapter with reworked Car Collections and new car related features Car Loads Default Car Sets e New chapter Stations and Industries includes revised Stations page taken from scheduling chapter plus new sections for Industries Yards amp Interchanges Industry Browser What s New Since Version 3 0 In 3 3 1 Transfer Tables create working transfer tables with optional scenic objects for pit or bridge Roadbed automatically add scenic roadbed fitted around track in your choice of styles AAR Codes official codes for car types allowing detailed car classification Chooser Changes improvements and simplifications in all choosers What s New Folder special folders show recent content in the web collections Open Data Folder opens your TrainP layer application data folder in Windows Explorer In 3 3 e Scenery TrackLaye
82. numeric value you can use the name of a variable and it will be replaced by the corresponding value when the statement Is executed Statements are normally executed one after another as they appear in the script However this behavior can be altered using flow commands A oop is a block of statements which are executed repeatedly a given number of times A branch is a jump to another place in the script sometimes based on a decision made in an F statement A callis a jump to a separate external block of statements these execute in their entirety and then control jumps back to the statement after the call There are three variations on this A subroutine is a block of script code stored in a text file a call to the subroutine executes the file and then returns A proc is a small routine stored between two tags within another script the first time it is encountered as its parent script executes itis extracted and saved in memory under a speciried name subsequently it can be called using this name A function is a body of code which carries out a calculation and returns a result to be used by the calling script Whenever a train script or junction action is running it is connected to a train Commands in the script which do not specify otherwise are directed to this train Train control commands can be used to redirect commands from the script owning train to another one Variables are created and assigned using a Set statement or the equivalent
83. object images 3 Click an icon to see its larger image in the preview window 4 Ifyou like the set and would like to use it in your layouts click Install This copies the files from the cache into your local scenery folder then switches to the Local Scenery Chooser so you can add them to your layout As an alternative to icon view you can choose to view the objects in list form This displays status icons indicating which objects you do and don t have in your local set and which are new on the web S E tumtable pit bmp 8 background E utility power company z Ee sisi canis El water tower bmp _ coal_ore mines_sand_coz watertowerl bmp El water tower bmp Cf wharf concrete bmp Cf wharf ore loader bmp El wharf bmp E wood truss bridge bmp wooden water tower b Tree Contents Scenery Named folders of scenery objects What s New Recent additions to the web collection see What s New Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Re download scenery folder Dimmed on parent or root folder of tree Refresh Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Download All Download and install all scenery objects within the selected folder and subfolders Look at all scenery objects within the selected folder and subfolders if some on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those Find Find Next Dowedmad All Down
84. operations for example running its daily route or performing a switching task Creating select a train having an engine then a right click any car and choose Train gt Script gt Edit from the context menu b choose Train gt Script gt Edit from the main menu or c click the Edit button on the Script Toolbar All of these bring up the Script Editor displaying the script attached to the train If the train has no script a new empty one Is created When you create a script on a train it becomes attached to the engine and sticks with it during later couplings and uncouplings If the train has more than one engine the script attaches to the leading one the frontmost one in the current direction of travel If the train is not moving the position of the F orward Reverse switch is consulted to see which direction it is heading Editing select a train having a script then proceed as for creating above Note To see which trains on the layout have scripts look in the Train Tree Trin MM rendon toca shown at right or the Scripts tab of Script Central E W Tremont amp Cambridge RR 4M Clarendon Local 5 Deleting use Script Central or see note aL E590 0 6 0 ARR scripted ee Mee ETOL tender Note Most scripts can be deleted by erasing In a script edit window right IB B94 baggage click and choose Select All then Delete or press Ctrl A Del then click OK or am P93 pullman Apply to save the empty scrip
85. or scenery or otherwise modify as desired e From a template Inthe Components folders under Modules HO or NTrak you will find a series of bare bones module templates of various sizes Here for example is a picture of the two foot NTrak template Each NTrak template comes with five tracks going all the way across HO templates have three These tracks form different railroad lines running around the layout Each is labelled according to its purpose as follows ML1 main line 1 4 back from the front of the module This is the track which is used to align a module with its neighbors so it must be present and correctly positioned Normally the main line goes straight across each module and all the way around the layout MIL 2 main line 2 5 5 back BL1 branch line 1 7 back BL2 branch line 2 11 back M mountain line 14 back For HO modules only ML1 ML2 and BL are present at 4 7 and 14 from the front The picture shows how you can remove the inner tracks and just leave the connecting stubs Using the Track edit tool drag a selection rectangle so it Surrounds the middle portions of all five lines as shown then press Del This leaves short stubs on the sides which you can connect with your own trackage The labels on the tracks are scenery objects If you want to get rid of them use the Scenery Edit tool e From an existing layout You can Start with just about any layout and convert it into a module as long
86. other interactive devices an illustrated overview Is given in Scripting UI Devices All scripts are written in a custom programming language especially designed for operating TrainPlayer layouts An overview of the language is given in TrainPlayer Programming Language Fora detailed language and command reference use the built in guide in the Script Central Reference Tab For more information e Website for additional documentation tios samples see the Scripting page on the TP site e Forum join our Yahoo forum and get expert advice from us and our users e Customer Support if all else fails send e mail to our fine Support Dept Scripting UI Devices Scripting involves a number of dialogs menus and controls Here is an illustrated overview with links to more information Click any framed image to see it full size Start Stop Properties Rewind Train Script Menu a Edit Remove Script Script Toolbar i Script Editor Junction Action Editor Right click a train or choose Train gt Script from the main menu to get a set of commands for operating train scripts See Train Script Menu below Button based version of the menu See Script Toolbar below For editing playing and watching train scripts in action See Script Editor Script Central Schedule Window Insert Here menu spas throw J35 1 after 0O 0 02 Seript on train Traini cor Crested Padneam
87. produces a named train or cut whose name is the original name plus a number Copying and pasting The Denver Flyer gives you The Denver Flyerl However if you cut and paste the name does not change Train Properties Properties of the selected train Called from Properties on the Train context menu See also About the Properties Dialog Car Train Layout Advanced Dialog controls Shows side view of the train If the train is too long to fit in the window you can image enlarge the dialog This train window is mainly for display but is partly interactive you can select a car by clicking or access its car menu by right clicking Name Horn Running Default Car Collection The train s name used to identify it in the Train Tree on the Train menu and in scripts The initial name assigned to a train is blank for display purposes a blank name is usually shown as Train lt id gt with the current ID of the train Once you assign a name it stays with the engine as the train consist changes For more information see Naming Trains Choose the sound to be generated by this train when pressing the Horn button on the control panel or using Sound Horn from the Train menu Choose one of the four built in loco sounds or choose Other to bring up the Sound Chooser The sound you select for this train will remain attached to the engine if the train consist changes Choose the sound to be genera
88. program The Overall Process Here are the basic steps in preparing a layout for TrainPlayer use All are described in more detail throughout the manual 1 Prepare the image If you re starting with a picture of a track plan you ll need to turn it into a graphics file on your computer If the image is on paper you ll need to scan and crop it if on a website download it if in a CAD program export it The result needs to be a high resolution graphics file in any of several Standard formats You don t actually need a background image You can start with a blank screen and just lay track freehand 2 Adjust the grid To create an accurate layout you need to establish the relationship between the image on your screen and the real world dimensions on the layout You do this by adjusting the TrackLayer grid The grid is defined in real world units in HO for example grid lines are defined to be 12 apart so when you overlay the grid on the image you tell TrackLayer all it needs to know about layout size and dimensions in any scale Most published layouts including all those in 107 Track Plans have grid lines included in the image So adjusting the grid in TrackLayer is a matter of dragging the mouse a couple of times until it matches the one on the background 3 Draw curves and turntables Curves and turntables are a little tricky to create more so when working in an area already crowded with track Therefore the experi
89. s to the Clipboard choose Edit Copy from the main menu or right click a selected object and choose Copy or press Ctrl C A copy of the selected object s Is made on the Windows Clipboard If you choose Cut Ctrl X instead of Copy the objects are copied and then deleted e To paste objects from the Clipboard choose Edit Paste or press Ctri V Objects previously copied to the Clipboard are deposited at the upper left of the screen selected and ready to move into position e To undo an editing operation after any move resize rotation property change or other modification of selected objects choose Edit Undo or press Ctrl Z to revert back to the state before the change e To redo an undone operation after an Undo choose Edit Redo or press Ctrl Y to undo the undo and revert back to the changed state Moving and Resizing Once one or more objects is selected e To move the selected object s press the interior of any selected object the cursor changes to a four headed arrow and drag All selected objects will move simultaneously e To resize a single object press a drag handle on any side or corner cursor changes to a two headed arrow and drag The side or corner will move relative to the rest of the object Note this does not work if you are pointing to the upper right corner that one does rotation described below Note that the Orientation of the two headed cursor may not be correct if the object has been rotated e To r
90. scenery is automatically hidden whenever you select the Edit Background Layer tool To bring it back while editing the background layer use View gt Features gt Foreground Scenery 7 Button is dimmed if there are no selected scenery objects Scenery Context Menu Load Bitmap mh CU Ctx Right click a scenery object and you get a context menu Details of the menu depend on the type of object clicked as noted in the descriptions below If the right clicked th Coy cirit object is one of multiple selected objects then the chosen command will generally apply to all of them Where the description below says object it means the right clicked paia Dateta object plus all other selected ones if any insane oe Flip Hacitondial Flip Wertical Save to Sen File Properties Load Bitmap Browse for an image and set as background fill for the object l Sini P ae Cut Copy Delete Standard editing commands over the selection 2 Convert to Polygon Select All Select all scenery objects in the active layer Flip Horizontal Vertical Invert object across vertical or horizontal axis Smoothing gt Submenu for polylines and polygons only 3 Smooth This Vertex Smooth or unsmooth the right clicked vertex 4 Smooth All Smooth at all vertices Unsmooth All Unsmooth at all vertices Auto Smooth Smooth each vertex while drawing polyline 5 Save to Scn File Save selected object s to scn file 6 Properties Bring up Scenery Properties dialog to edit object s Con
91. script window by choosing a command from a context menu on the layout As long as the Script Editor is visible and you are using the track or edit tool then right click a junction or switch and you get three new commands on the context menu a Ena er Yard t throw 11 1 Throw Switch throw 118 O Koa throw 31 1 peed z0 at Clarendon iJa Insert throw alternate I laiter J31 Each of these commands inserts a bit of text at the position of the cursor in the text box What is inserted depends on what you right clicked Insert junction number Insert the number of the clicked junction Need not be a switch Insert throw here Inserta THROW statement with the junction number and its current position for Switches only Insert throw alternate Insert THROW plus junction number plus alternate position for 2 way switches only This applies to the unction Action Editor also and to the script windows in Script Central whenever any of these IS visible on screen junction context menus can insert into it If more than one is showing the frontmost one gets the insert J unction Action Editor The J unction Action Editor is a dialog for creating and editing junction actions To bring it up a using the track edit tool right click a junction and choose Action or b double click a row in the J unction Actions tab in Script Central Either way the dialog comes up with reference to a specific junction where there
92. set NoteWndTextPos lt L C R gt set text position for next showing In some Scripts the Note Window is used as a Sort of modal dialog It provides a prompt and the script waits for a reply e g a certain key to be pressed In these situations you are expected to provide a response and not use Hide to avoid doing so Working With Scripts All scripts are blocks of text The interesting part is what happens inside the text the commands waits logic This page is not about that Here we treat scripts as black boxes describing how to create access and manage them Much of what you need to do with scripts can be done in Script Central There you can create delete browse view and edit all types of script The rest of what you need to do is described below on this page according to script type All scripts except subroutines are layout dependent and stored as text blocks within the layout file When you modify a script in one of the script editors and click OK or Apply the changes are saved in memory They are not permanently saved to disk until you use File Save or File Save As to save the layout file Working with Train Scripts A train script is attached to an engine This is the original type of script dating back to TP 2 0 You might think of it as a little robot which sits in the cab and drives the train following a prescribed list of instructions A train script is normally used to direct a particular train through a series of
93. shapes 3 Save the file either using File Save or confirming save when closing the window Do not use Save As 4 Return to TrainP layer the modified image will show up in the Car Collection Editor Changes made and saved in Paint cannot be undone or cancelled If you want to modify factory supplied images we recommend you first make your own copy using the Save As button and work with that If you accidentally change a factory supplied image and want to revert to the default download a new copy of the collection Note if you prefer to use a program other than Paint when you click the Edit button this can be arranged There is a registry value called PaintExeName which you can set to the name of a program This value is located under HKCU S oftware TrainP layer TrainPlayer S ettings For help modifying this value send e mail to support 4 0 6 0 tank_t Paint F U b 0 tank z Paint File Edt View Image Colors Help SUS eS ean ieee Seca ree Side view images must be sized correctly so they will look ok when mixed with other cars and so they will fit in the train windows e Use a drawing space 32 pixels high e Draw the image So it touches the bottom Do not exceed a height of 26 pixels otherwise it will not show fully in the control panel e The width can be whatever you need to change the width drag the tiny blue dot at right center A good rule of thumb is that one pixel equals about a foot on the prototype
94. so that stations are visible b right click a station border and choose Properties The data you see and edit here applies to the selected station a as As ge aF i a Station Properties i J ij ae Staton Name fercules loadin 3 dock Hercules Cement Ca Choose Industry Incoming Loads Portland cement bags 7 Dialog controls Station Name A name to identify the track location You can give a station any name you like but it must be unique on this layout if not you will be alerted on clicking OK For operational purposes it should be For example atan industry with multiple stations you might want to use Acme Powder Door 1 or Baker and Co Loading The station name is used for reporting car and train locations Sound Sound to be played when a train enters the station area To choose a sound click the Browse button to call up the Sound Chooser To remove the sound erase the contents of the edit box Industry Name Name ofthe industry at this station if any If goods are to be exchanged atthis station then it must have a non blank industry name and at least one incoming or outgoing load Normally the industry name is that of a firm where goods are shipped and received but it might also be the name of an interchange dock storage location etc whatever name goes on the paperwork The industry name does not have to be unique more
95. so you can connect it to the next loop In this example we will construct a circular two loop helix with the lower approach from the northwest and the upper exit to the northeast 1 Draw a circle Circle tool 2 Draw the lower approach track Track tool f 3 Draw a short straight segment at the ae top of the circle This completes a large Curve and serves as a handle to connect to the next loop 4 Mark the curve untouchable Right click on the curve so it highlights as shown and choose Untouchable This causes the curve to become k unresponsive it will not highlight you Delete Track cannot connect track to it and most Hidden important tangents you create on the next loop will not snap to it Ium Untouchable Before you mark the curve untouchable you might want to mark it Hidden See notes below Add Car Here d 5 Draw a circle for the second loop Circle tool Start at the center of the first circle and drag until the circle is Superimposed on the first one This illustration shows the drag in process not quite finished 6 This shows the second circle in place 7 Draw a short segment to connect the second loop to the first Begin by highlighting the circle as shown 8 and connect to the handle drawn in Step 3 Don t worry about the Kink in the track you ll fix it shortly You now have the first leg of the second curve 9 Draw the other leg of the curve
96. stations where industries are to be generated Industry Generate Checked REA Express LCL kdl Lyons Baryt ergamery Selected Station L Boulder Junction Metals smelter i C amp S Junction Lumber Mill Sherman Grocery warehouse Yardi Yard Tracks _ choose Cancel To operate this dialog e Checkmark the stations where you want industries generated then click Generate Checked Or e Click a row to select a station and then click Generate to have the program pick a random industry or Choose to pick one yourself from the list The Choose button brings up the Industry Browser so you can select a preconfigured industry Starting Train page Allows you to choose the engine you will operate Starting Train Choose tain to define center of operations Operations wall be centered around the selected tram S lecta ram by engine or lead car OF Click a bain on the layout For best results select a train in a yard with freight cars Cancel e Use selected train Uses the engine selected in the drop down You may of course select a different engine from the list When you choose an engine it becomes selected on the layout and shows up in the control panel and toolbar e Or Choose a train by clicking on it on the layout When you select a train while this page Is visible the drop down updates to the same train Settings page Offers choices for tailoring the results In the current versi
97. the Car Inventory Bar can be dragged by its header to undock or dock elsewhere or it can be set up for auto hide It has a horizontal scrollbar for viewing long trains It can be resized vertically and can show large image Chris Pedersen collections at any size up to full To add a car from the Car Inventory Bar a right click a car image and choose Add Car or double click an image This adds a car of the selected type to the current train at the insert position the place where you see the orange pin in the train window To change the insert position click a different spot in the train window b select the name in the Car Types list and click Add c press the image and drag You can drag to 1 any point along any track where the cursor changes to an arrow let go and a new car is created at that position OR 2 the top of an existing train on the layout point to an end car or to a space between cars where you see one or two red highlights around the cars let go and a new car is created attached to the indicated car s OR 3 a position in the train window The orange pin moves as you drag let go and a new car is added at the pin position To display a different collection in the Car Inventory Bar Click the down arrow at the right end of the scrollbar This brings up the CIB menu with these choices a a list of all installed default collections choose one by name and it will fill the CIB window b Choo
98. the Options dialog To throw a switch position the cursor over the frog the point where the tracks join so you see a blue highlight then click The lights change to show which route is now open If there are more than two routes through a switch then each throw cycles to the next available open route For example here er are the results of repeated clicks at a four way junction A switch will not open a route which requires a sharp turn Ifa route through a switch forms too sharp an angle then throwing the switch will not open that route rs TNC AT If you prefer you can have only the green lights show or only the red or you can change to different colors For details of settings regarding switches see Switch Preferences Press the space bar to throw the next switch the selected train will cross For details see Upcoming Switch below The Switch Window W The Switch Window provides a close up of the area around a switch The chosen switch is shown in the 9 center of the window surrounded by a rectangular frame zoomed in without background so that you can 4 easily see and operate it E aN A To bring up the window choose View Switch Window The window can be positioned anywhere on the screen resized or docked to any side of the frame ae When the switch window is on display and you position the cursor over a switch on the layout the display zooms in on that switch By default
99. the layouts We don t really expect you to read the manual Most of what you need to know about TrainP layer you can figure out by opening a layout and running trains But you might glance through to pick up tins which could enhance your enjoyment TrackLayer is a little more involved so It is recommended that you at least go through the TrackLayer tutorial The manual is organized by topic The first chapter tells how to open a layout what you ll See and how you can adjust the screen as you like The next two chapters describe how to run trains and how to assemble and dismantle them The next two chapters cover advanced features scheduling and recording Lastis a chapter on how to tailor the program to suit your preferences The TrackLayer portion begins with an introduction and some basic information about files and images followed by a tutorial which goes through the process of building a layout Subsequent chapters go into detail about drawing track curves switches and turntables The manual assumes a basic level of familiarity with Windows You should know how to operate a drop down menu and what it means to navigate in a file dialog Menu commands are given as phrases often in bold type with gt symbols separating levels Tools gt Customize refers to the Customize item on the Tools menu About the Layouts TrainP layer Software is proud to be associated with Kalmbach Publishing Co the place where model railroading began We are
100. the right hand curve with center near Oyster Bay This picture shows the result when you use View Background HEI to turn off the image Toggle this every now and then to check your work Choose the Track Tool VAI P oint to the top of the left hand circle so it highlights then press and drag to the right as shown Note that the straight section remains tangent to the circle as you drag Complete the Straight Drag until the moving end touches the right hand circle so it highlights then release The straight snaps to be tangent to both circles Complete the loop Repeat the above steps to add a segment completing the loop press and drag from the bottom of one circle to the other in either direction When you release the circles disappear and become curved track sections If the result doesn t look like this picture use Edit Undo to go back a step then try again Make sure a circle is highlighted when you Start or end drawing each straight You might use File Save As to save a copy of the layout at this stage and again every so often as you work Place circle for branch Choose the Circle Tool Drag from the center near Oyster Bay and overlay the curve leading to Gills Landing Toggle the shift key on and off while you drag until you get both radius and position just right ee Oyster Bay Hai prib Complete the branch
101. the top in units selected in the drop Size down Changing the size in this dialog changes only the currently selected car To change the size of all cars of this type use the Car Collection Editor Units for car size display Units chosen in this drop down will remain in effect throughout the program until changed Name of load assigned to car Choose a different load by name from the drop down or Load select Load Chooser from the topmost item This item is dimmed if car is unloadable engine tender etc Check indicating whether car is loaded Clicking this box changes the load status of the car note Units Loaded Car and updates the picture to show or hide the load Checkbox is not shown if car is unloadable Collection Click to view or edit the car type properties in the Car Collection Editor Reverse Engine This property of an engine if true says the engine is to be pointing toward the back of the train This is designed to allow you to have back to back locomotives For example the second of the diesels in the train at left is marked as a Reverse Engine amp 40B R Reverse engines are designed to be used in a train with other non reverse engines Ifa reverse engine sits by itself or is the only engine in a train then it drives backwards i e moving the throttle forward will cause the engine to go in reverse and vice versa The program automatically sets and unsets this property on coupling and uncoupling Fo
102. the train change speed throw switches reverse uncouple every action generates the corresponding script language Press Stop when done and there you have a script you can rewind replay save and study If you have the Script Editor up while recording you can see the script as it gets created It is just that easy to record a script but here are a few disclaimers First when you replay a recorded script it may not exactly reproduce your sequence of actions You have to cut itsome slack as it tries to convert mouse moves into script commands Second the result is not optimized for readability For example varying the train speed while recording often generates a pile of soeed change commands where in a hand made script only a single Speed command is needed to do the job If you are not the programmer type you don t need to go beyond this step Use script recording to capture the action on your layout then play it back or send it to another TP user to play back 3 Write a J unction Action The low barrier way to write your first script is to right click a track junction and create a little action there say a one line script to announce something in the output window Bring a car up next to the junction roll it across and the action executes Do this a time or two and you might find yourself wanting to make fancier actions The procedure 1 Choose a convenient junction or switch use the Track or Edit tool right click and
103. to bring up Script Notes Script notes are blocks of text you the script author can add to Script Central You might use these to give instructions for a user of your script or to provide background info about it or to jot notes to yourself about what s going on in the scripts You can add one or more of these to the first tab of Script Central edit as desired and then bring up whenever useful List contents ID Unique program assigned id for each row Script For train script script name and owning train otherwise item type master or notes First Line First line of script or note Actions Click list item Selects item script or note and displays it in the text window For train or master script brings up Script Editor for editing and viewing script For note does nothing editing is done here Right click row Brings up context menu commands as listed below Text is editable Text is in code style fixed size font no wrap Changes are saved on clicking OK or Apply or on changing tabs Double click row Text window Context menu Brings up Script Editor for editing and viewing train or master script for a note editing is done in this tab Delete Deletes item and removes from the list Fora train script this removes the script from the train Edit in Script Editor Enabled Master script only check to enable automatic run on open uncheck to disable Refresh Rebuilds list sometimes needed
104. to exercise caution before moving it or sending itto someone else See the section about modular layout files below The Module Fusing Process In the real world modules are scooted around on the show floor until their connection points line up then short segments of track are added to connect them In TrainP layer the Module Manager does this automatically in a process called fusing Fusing one module to another involves several steps 1 Locating the connection points The program searches a narrow Stripe along the edge of each layout for any junctions at the ends of straight track segments 2 Aligning the modules A specific connection point on each edge the one closest to the front of the module is designated as the registration point The two modules are adjusted front to back until their registration points line up 3 Introducing gaps Ifthe connection points on a module are at the very edge then there will be no room to insert connecting track The program detects this situation and backs the connection point junctions a little ways from the edge 4 Adding connecting tracks Wherever a connection point on one module has a partner at the same position on the other a segment of straight track is added between the two points 5 Detecting loop closures After fusing one end of a module the program looks at the other end to see if it is touching any other module Ifso it means there is a loop and one more fusion will be r
105. toolbar by dragging it off into space e Adjust the sizes of non button controls on the toolbars train window train combo and speed display by clicking in the control to select it then dragging an edge of it e Add a button to a toolbar by dragging it from the Commands window Commands tab shown below to the place you want iton a toolbar If the command has no icon the button will be labelled with text Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Categories Command Oper Es Open Layout Close mj Save Save S Properties AIl eara ma A Cink Description The Customize dialog is brought to you by BCG Soft For details of the individual tabs see separate pages Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Windows and Views Some appearance features were described in Adjusting the View Others are available on the Window menu window O Me al wiry g mL L Cascade HA Tile Horizontal Tile vertical Window Manager 1 turtlecreek rew e New Window creates a new window with a separate view of the same layout Views In separate windows may be resized or zoomed independently Trains runs in all visible views e Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical rearranges the windows on the screen e Window Manager brings up a standard Windows dialog for selecting and arranging multiple windows shown below e lt Active Window gt all open windows are listed at the b
106. two formats comma delimited text or structured xml To export 1 Right click a folder and choose Export This will export data about all files contained in the selected folder and its subfolders 2 In the file dialog specify the output file and format txt for delimited text xml for structured xml 3 Click OK The file is generated Take a look at it in a text editor or web browser Local Layout Chooser The local layout chooser is for selecting a layout to open and run The San reo Central Shady Grove amp Shenill For general information about choosers see Choosers To Open a Layout The local layout tree shows folders of layouts which reside on your disk 1 Ifa folder has a sign next to it click to expand it and show its subfolders if not click to show its contents in the list window 2 Click a layout in the list to see its preview 3 To open the previewed layout and take down the dialog click OK The local layout chooser has features not available in other choosers For one you can click the Browse button to bring up a regular file dialog to choose a layout to be opened For another you can modify the contents of the tree by adding and populating your own folders For instructions see Adding Your Own Layouts below A folder is shown with a padlock if itis locked meaning it represents a folder on the disk and cannot be modified except by rearranging the files on the disk An unlocked folder is one you creat
107. you change your mind use Edit Redo Ctrl Y to undo the last undo Undoable operations include deleting adding or moving track circles stations or turntables and changing most track properties Train moves are not undoable nor changes made in the Properties dialog Deleting objects You can delete a single object track segment circle or turntable by point and press as follows 1 Choose the Track tool or the Edit tool Le 2 Position the cursor on the segment or object to be deleted so it highlights see A Ona circle or turntable point to a spot on the circumference of the circle 3 Press the Del key or right click and choose Delete Delete Track or Edit Cut from the context menu Note that context menus differ depending on what type of object Is highlighted When you delete a turntable or its bridge track both the circle and the track are deleted To delete multiple tracks or objects 1 Select the objects as described below 2 Delete with the Del key or a menu command as in step 3 above Selecting objects To move or delete a collection of objects you must first select the ones to be modified You can choose them one ata time or several at once by dragging a selection box To select individual objects 1 Choose the Edit tool bs 2 Click a track segment circle or turntable The object is selected and turns navy blue 3 To select another object press Shift and click the object 4 To unselect a
108. you click around the layout This is handy for say browsing through your inventory of cars especially if you have the Pedersen collection and can see large images Properties changes are now undoable Combo boxes and controls have been reworked for better operation More Handy Improvements e Auto Save your layout is quietly backed up every so often so you don t lose work if there is a crash More e Auto View Restore zoom and position come up just the way you leftthem More e Drag and Drop Loading drag from the Load Chooser directly onto cars load an entire cut at once More Fixes Version 5 2 includes fixes for many popular bugs in such areas as coupling and uncoupling freight loads opening large layouts train horn selection engine direction flipping changing layout background See the Readme for a complete list What Was New in 5 1 Version 5 1 introduces new layouts cars scenery and sounds for the British railway enthusiast along with new features to make the data easily accessible When you install Version 5 1 you are given a choice of US vs UK settings If you choose UK you will see e New welcome dialog offering you the possibility of downloading the entire set of UK data at once See the Readme for details e British flag on splash screen and About box e British default cars when you create a new layout This can be changed by a new drop down in Train Preferences e British folder open
109. AR Codes Dimensions of a car of this type length x width as seen from above Displayed in the units selected in the drop down Units for size values If you change the units in this drop down the choice will apply throughout the program Check to have the load displayed in the car panel Dimmed if car is not loadable Note that in this dialog the load you see is the default load connected to the car type if may not match the load of a car on the layout Buttons for scrolling through the list of car types in the collection Position of current car type within the collection You can type a number in this box to go to a specific index Click to add a new car type to the collection See Adding a New Type below Click to delete the current car type from the collection This tab is for changing the side and or top images for the current type Each car type has two images a top view and a side view Each view Is in a separate graphics file Car Collection Default Steam Propertie Car Type Images Collection Train Player Cartypes Defaults ste Paint _ Browse images Resizable car panel showing side and top views Side Image path Path to the graphics file of the side image To choose a different file click Browse Image type Image size type for the collection small medium or large see 50 pixel cars Paint Click to call up a paint program to edit the sid
110. Check this box if you want the selected item to appear in the display Applies to all items except Floor Click to choose a color for the selected item Applies to all items except Color Background in Assembly Font Click to specify a font for the selected item Applies only to Module Label and Label in Assembly Choose a line width in pixels for the selected item where zero means thinnest possible Applies to Module Frame Module Highlight Track Line and Frame in Assembly Line Width Click to retrieve an assembly previously saved as a Module Definition MDEF file For information about MDEF files see below Load Warning Loading an MDEF file replaces the current contents of the manager without asking if you want to save it first Save Click to save the current assembly to MDEF for later reuse See below Reset This Reset the current display item to factory settings Changes do not become permanent until you click OK Reset All Reset all display items to factory settings Changes do not become permanent until you click OK OK Cancel Click OK to retain the current settings and make them permanent Click Cancel to revert to settings in effect before the dialog came up Module Definition MDEF files Module definition files provide a lightweight convenient way to avoid having to rebuild the same assembly more than once A file with extension MDEF is a simple xml file readable in Notepad which contains a list of t
111. Collection has been assigned to this class For example if you click the hopper icon and the current default collection is Default Steam the car you create is of type 2 bay hopper ee a m AAR Codes e With the introduction of Ops it became necessary to be more specific about car types If you need to carry logs you need a flatcar but not one with a depressed center To classify cars more precisely we now use AAR Codes e An AAR Code is a one to three letter string representing a specific type of car as classified by the Association of American Railroads The TrainP layer list is adapted from that on the Great Northern Empire site we appreciate the author s permission to use this list For an informative article on the subject see AAR Freight Car Codes from the Model Railroad Operations SIG e In TrainP layer a two or three letter code refers to a specific type where one letter is a generic type For example a code of GD means a side dump gondola suitable for gravel G means a general purpose gondola suitable for loads which can be carried in any type of gondola The complete list of AAR codes available in TrainPlayer can be seen in the AAR Codes Dialog accessible when editing car properties Each car has both a class and an AAR code If you create or edit a car type and give itan AAR code the program assigns the appropriate class This can usually be done by looking at the first letter of the AAR code any code Sta
112. Customize Dialog Windows and Views Operation Preferences Settings related to train operation Called from menu command File gt Preferences Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches m Speeds Maximum Coupling Options Collisions Bounce Crash severity E Acceleration 10 ia 0 none 20 maximurnn i Shift click between cars to uncouple i Click on speed dial to rotate Cancel Defaults Help Speeds Sets the speed atthe top end of the dial No train can exceed this speed Use the drop down atthe right to choose whether speeds are displayed in miles or kilometers per hour Maximum speed Sets the speed below which coupling can occur If trains approach each other with a relative speed below this value the couple above this value they collide bounce or crash Coupling speed Options Collisions Crash severity Acceleration Shift click to uncouple Click dial to rotate Determines what happens when a train hits a closed Switch end of track or another train Choose Bounce if you want the train to go into reverse and keep travelling Choose Crash if you want the train to stop and destruct The destruction is temporary After a crash the train will repair itself as Soon as you begin to move it Affects the amount of destruction upon crashing The lowest values cause a bit of derailing highest values Cause Cars to blow apart and scatter across the lands
113. Freight K TI Uncouple Ctrl U Add Car d Cut Properties Sony es oe Delete Reverse Ear Properties Note as soon as you right click a car or train in the tree it becomes the selected car or train e Use up down arrow keys to navigate the tree As you move to a car or train it becomes selected Stations and Industries In TrainP layer as in your basement it s fun to watch a train run around a loop of track In the real world that s not what they do In that world a train moves from one place to another between cities industries yards freight houses and the places have names which show up on maps schedules and work orders Model railroads have place names too Linn Westcott s layouts are dotted with colorful names Port Stillwater Swampside Dead Horse Gulch At any given time a train is in near or en route to one of these places and its location is most conveniently reported by name In TrainP layer a named location is called a station Itis defined by a name one or more sections of track and a rectangular area With this information the program can detect when a train enters or leaves a Station and can use this to report to you about train locations With the introduction of ops stations take on more significance They not only have names they have functions reasons a train would stop there Some stations are industries where goods are shipped or received the definition of an industry in
114. Grid H Edit Tool l must be active You cannot drag the grid with any other tool Red lines are anchors One particular horizontal and one vertical are special and colored in red When you drag to adjust the grid dimensions these lines stay put You don t usually see these red lines when you open a layout they re often along the left and top edges just out of sight Drag by corner is different from drag by line Ifyou press and begin dragging at the intersection of two lines then the grid stays square and resizes as you drag If you press at some other point on a vertical or horizontal line the grid does not stay square you resize either the horizontal or the vertical Spacing Drag resizes shift drag moves Press and drag ona line or intersection and the grid resizes relative to the origin intersection of the red lines Hold down the shift key while you drag and the entire grid moves without resizing The cursor changes to a four headed arrow when you have the shift key down With that background here s how to use the grid to set up a layout We ll start with the easiest case where the image has grid lines spaced according to the Westcott conventions 12 apart in HO etc see About Sizes and Scales for the complete list If the spacing is different on your image or it doesn t have any grid lines see below 1 Open the image file The program grid comes up automatically not quite aligned with the image grid In this example
115. ID s Controls are choose whether you want to see all the trains on the layout or only those having show on Menu engines or only those to which you have assigned non default names Text only check if you want a normal text menu without pictures check if you want train names displayed along with the pictures The train name Show train names is shown at top left of the picture This option is disregarded if Text only is checked check if you want each car to have its ID shown underneath as in the picture Show car ID s above This option is disregarded if Text only is checked Note trains do not have names until you provide them Do not choose Only named trains or Text only unless you have some named trains on the layout Most of the ops ready layouts you can download from your web chooser have train names Settings you make in this dialog stay in effect until you change them again in this or another session Adding Cars and Trains Building trains on your layout is a matter of choosing the types of cars and locos you want and placing them on the track The usual starting point is an Add Car menu as shown here gt Accessing the Add Car menu ew Add CarAere By Name al prpnerties Car Chooser This menu provides ways of choosing the type of car ee z ip you want to add It comes up when you 3 4 ele gt 4 Steam e right click a track section and choose Add e Car Here This deposi
116. Let This takes the name of a variable and an expression the expression is evaluated and its value assigned to the variable Ifthe name is new the variable is created otherwise the existing variable is updated TPL Statements A script consists of a series of statements usually one per line in a text file Lines starting with are comments and are not executed By default comments starting with a single asterisk are echoed to the output window as the script runs those starting with are not Blank lines are ignored An executable statement consists of a command or wait condition name one of the words in the first column of the table below followed by any required arguments Multiple statements may be concatenated on a single line using semicolon as delimiter As a special case a wait statement may be followed immediately by a command on the same line Built in Commands A command is an instruction telling the program to take some action There are two types commands accessible from the program menus vs those built into the language The menu commands are described in the next section The built in commands are in these categories Train commands for setting speed and direction and operating the train owning the script This group of commands is the script equivalent of the control panel Layout commands for throwing switches rotating turntables and carrying out other layout based actions Train control commands for directi
117. Menu Options T oolbar lw Show ScreenTips on toolbars iW Show shortcut keys in ScreenT ips Large Icons Dialog controls Check if you want to see a tooltip whenever the how Screen Ti Show Screen Tips mouse hovers over a toolbar button Check if you want a tooltip to include the command s keyboard shortcut For example with this box checked the tooltip for File New becomes New Ctrl N Show shortcut keys Large Icons Check if you want larger icons on the toolbars Creating a Turntable Turntables are a little tricky to get right because the connecting tracks have to be laid precisely The program helps by snapping objects into position but can have trouble in crowded areas When you re working in an area with a turntable it works best to construct the turntable first before adding the surrounding track First zoom in so you have room to work and so junctions and tracks don t overlap There is a special tool for creating turntables It works just like the Circle Tool except that after you size and position the circle it automatically adds a bridge track and makes a working turntable Two tips about creating turntables 1 draw the circle first before adding the connecting tracks and 2 make sure either the circle or an end of the bridge track is highlighted when you start or end drawing a connecting track Ifthe track doesn t snap to have one endpoint exactly on the circle the turntable won t work If you encou
118. Scenery r m Ea naar Sage r a BS a nt ie ces ae IFF z i Pi aa r aa F 1 ea Poti a a Adjust image output quality Curent background 1133 909 Grd Iw Switch lights T Rails Stations im pee 5 ri Ly Ik a Hre Nese 10 derail Higher quality larger file gt Finish Screen Finished with the l TrainPlayer Image Expor Wizard Concludes the wizard and carries out the export Your choices are shown Checkboxes allow additional input 2 te ee Ready to create image file Show picture after export Export Image mode only launch the new FIE 3 u Fak Mode Export Image image in your default image viewing program A FAS ir e Delete scenery after export Merge Background only delete all ORES ae scenery from the layout since it will be embedded in the background ee eae Se meee Save file after export Merge Background only bring up a file dialog for Saving the modified rrw file Click Finish to do the export or Cancel to dismiss the wizard without finishing I Show picture after export lt Back Cercel He The Help Menu The Help item on the main menu provides access not only to built in help but also to license related commands Felp Contents TrainPlayer Home Page Upgrade License Purchase Upgrade Check for Updates Menu commands Brings up TrainP layer User Manual in Microsoft Help Contents Viewer You can search or brow
119. Shift key up or editing a circle with Shift down When the radius is close to one of the checkmarked choices it snaps to the exact value The radius is displayed on the status bar as you drag You may choose up to four different snap radii three standard choices and or one other value you specify All these choices are labelled in the selected units using the scale of the current layout if one is open For example the above diagram shows the standard choices as 18 24 in HO if the active layout were O these choices would be displayed as 36 48 Choose units for display of radius values The choice made in this drop down affects dimension displays throughout the program 4 Snap examples Left user drags up and left from the main line at point A when the angle is close enough it snaps to exact 4 and the cursor changes Right user drags left from a point near B starting point Snaps to the exact point B then angle snap takes effect so tracks remain parallel Any snap option can be temporarily overridden by holding down the Shift key as you drag Or the entire set of options can be overridden using the Snap On Off command on the Track context menu Train Preferences Settings for trains random train generation and car labels Called from menu command File gt Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches Style Road Random Train Generation 30 T iackto be pineal 60 X trains to have engines
120. Stop All Trains oom To zoom From Zoom uto Follow Rea Rey ST i s s r ai g N Le Layout Properties To add your own running sounds 1 If you want to add your own running sounds you will need a set of wav files each having a sound at a different speed The program cannot read mp3 or other formats in fact there are variations on wav files and not all of them work in TrainP layer In Windows Explorer locate the folder TrainPlayer S ounds C huff in your data directory You should see a collection of files with filenames like lt name gt nn_mm wav where name is the sound name which will appear in the menu nn is the minimum speed in MPH at which the sound takes effect mm is the maximum speed or the letters max representing the train s top speed For example the file diesel 26 35 wav is the sound listed on the menu as diesel which is played when the train is going between 26 and 35 MPH Name your files accordingly and deposit them in the Chuff folder Turntables Turntables are useful on model railroads and 707 Track Plans has a lot of them In TrainP layer they move and function and never need oiling A turntable is equipped with a section of track drawn with a thick line the bridge track and one or more sections of track radial to the circumference connecting tracks When you open a layout the turntable track is likely to be oriented in a random direction Before you can drive onto or off the turntable
121. The clock starts automatically the first time a train moves or you can set it manually using the clock window context menu e Schedule toggles display of the Schedule Window where you can watch reports of arrivals and departures and see status reports while running scripts e Control Panel toggles display of the Control Panel for operating trains o Switch Window 4 toggles display of the Switch Window for showing close up views around active switches e Train Tree E toggles display of the Train Tree for navigating the rolling stock inventory of the layout e Status Bar shows or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window e Toolbars toggles the display of selected toolbars and provides access to the toolbar customization dialog Zooming Zooming the document image is a feature of many Windows programs to the extent that there is a common control available for this purpose This is found on the right end of the Status bar To zoom 1 If the zoom control is not visible at the lower right of your app window use View gt Status Bar to display it 2 Click or button to zoom in or out by one tick Press and hold button to auto repeat 3 Press and drag the thumb right to zoom in left to zoom out Or click a spot along the slider bar to zoom to that point On the left of the slider is the magnification ratio where 1 1 means the image is the same size as the model For example at 1 1 a 60 foot HO boxcar would measure 8 3 o
122. The program comes supplied with a large variety of these in two general categories a Soe Background Pattern is a texture designed to be tiled and used to cover an area e g grass water Ete gravel an Object Images is a top view of an individual object on the layout building rooftop oil ewe tank tree usually with an irregular shape and a transparent background o Grouped Objects When creating a complex scenery object it is convenient to be able to assemble several Smaller objects together into a single grouped object This object behaves as a single unit when moving resizing or rotating For setting properties usually it is necessary to ungroup the object back into its original parts except when applying a style using the Painter tool which can work on individual group components Grouped objects may be contained within other grouped objects SCN Objects New in 6 2 is the SCN object a scenery object constructed from other objects Like building a structure from a kit you can assemble basic shapes into a complex object give ita name and save it to a file for reuse in other layouts Fora concrete example heh at right is a cement plant made of rectangles and circles the full assembly is treated as a single object and can be used like any image based object dragged out of the Scenery Chooser onto a layout resized rotated etc or can be modified to suit The scenery libraries offer a mixture of SCN objects and b
123. Vert Both Two Color Hatch Patterns Status Bar Measurements Line Flat Ends Plus Cursor Hide Track amp Trains Reworked Resize Keyboard Arrow Nudging Better Click Select Scenery Styles Dialog Uncoupling Pin Commands Updated Tutorial Non Scenery Features Redesigned graphics system New Track Properties dialog Double Rail Display Improved Note Window New Ordering of Drawing Export Image Fg Bg Separate drop down arrows on line text fill tools lead to matching style dialogs delete a polygon or polyline segment auto close a polyline rect gt polygon flip object or group about an axis object or line can now be filled with two color hatch pattern many choices length or dimensions are shown on status bar while drawing scenery polylines have rounded joins flat ends new cursor aids in drawing and connecting polylines precise clipping under grouped objs polylines marked as hiders resizing of multi object group now retains precision arrow key one pixel nudging now applies to resize as well as move better selection of hidden objects multiple selections groups new tabbed dialog for setting current or default fill line text styles move the uncoupling pin with menu or keyboard step by step process on web to create a detailed layout using new scenery tools revamped tile based graphics allows both maximum zoom and smooth scrolling specify detailed display features per track segment dou
124. a column header drag right or left until red arrows appear then release Right click anywhere in the grid and choose Field Chooser This brings up a list of fields available but not in the grid for a screen shot see Switchlist Window Drag one onto a division between two column headers then release To hide a column just drag it away from the grid Applies to Switchlist Window only Right click anywhere and choose Grid Editable Then you can a click ina cell and edit the text or choose from the drop down note that not all cells are editable or b add or delete rows by choosing Add New Duplicate or Delete from the context menu For more on editing see Switchlist Window Right click anywhere and choose Group By Box This displays a panel at the top of the window Drag a column header into that box and the grid will change into a sort of tree all rows having the same value in that column will become a single collapsible row For an example see Cars Window To ungroup drag the header out of the group box Click the header of any text column i e any column except pictures The grid will be sorted on that column Click again to sort in reverse order See additional notes below regarding sorting Right click and choose Print Grid This brings up the system dialog and prints the entire grid text that is no images This is quick and basic you may need to resize columns so they don t get truncated and you have no control
125. a track segment or curve you must first isolate that portion by chopping it out Note while these instructions are still valid most steps are obsolete You no longer need to introduce a temporary track in order to split a segment instead use Split Track Here To isolate a section of track Say you want to isolate the portion of this curve between the hash marks You can See the full extent of the original curve by highlighting it an Use the Track tool HA for this procedure 1 Draw a straight segment touching the curve where you want the Eg first chop point 2 When you release a switch is formed 3 Repeat drawing another segment at the other chop point 4 Point to one segment and press Del The segment and switch disappear 5 Repeat for the other segment 6 A small portion of the original curve is now isolated between two new junctions Sienna Modifying Track 1 If necessary isolate the segment of track to be hidden This is not necessary if you want to hide one or more entire segments 2 Point to the segment to be hidden so it highlights then press the right mouse button 3 Choose Hidden from the context menu i Delete Track Tunnel The track is redrawn as a dashed line Trains passing over this dashed Marauebaule section will appear hidden All Retouchable To create a section of tunnel track the procedure is the same draw the track or isolate it right opress
126. able to drive straight across the table you must take care to make sure the connecting tracks are aligned Here s the best way Draw the first track as described above to define where you want the cross over Double click to move the bridge until it locks onto that track Draw the second track dropping the end onto the highlighted junction at the end of the bridge track as shown here In this case itis up to you to make the track perpendicular to the pit When i you drop the end onto a junction instead of on the pit edge It will not snap You may have to adjust the far end until all three tracks are aligned Test Put an engine on one of the track sections and verify that you can drive it all the way across To decorate a transfer table x You can change the appearance of a transfer table in several ways e Change the pit color or background Right click the table and choose Properties to see the Scenery Properties dialog You can set the background color or image in this dialog as described In the Scenery chapter e Modify transfer table properties In the Properties dialog when you are editing a transfer table there Is a Special tab for this purpose as Shown at right In this tab you can set o Number of guide rails Set o The name of a scenery For example at left the pit has the ground concrete 01 image from the background collection a iiil to zero to remove rails Whether or not to d
127. above To uncouple by click You can uncouple two cars by holding down the shift key and clicking in the space between the cars When the cursor changes to a four headed arrow click to uncouple the cars The Run tool must be active for this to work By default uncoupling requires shift click holding down Shift as you click If you prefer you can change this so all it takes is a click see Operation Preferences To couple 1 Slow down and move toward the cars to be coupled For example if the situation is as shown in the above diagram click into Reverse so the three car train is moving toward the two stationary hoppers 2 Bump gently The cars couple automatically and the train is reassembled as shown in the top diagram These instructions would have to be reworded somewhat to apply to other configurations for example with the engine at the rear of the train or going in reverse Experiment Horns and Sounds There are two types of sound associated with a train the horn or whistle or bell which operates on demand and the running sounds which you hear constantly as the train moves There are other sounds which come from the layout and not the train these are discussed under Stations The TrainP layer website now has a large and growing selection of all types of sounds These are available on the Web tab of the various Sound Choosers To sound the horn press the Horn button t on the control panel or train toolbar Th
128. ac kLayer described in the second half of this manual is used to apply the track switches and turntables In TrainPlayer you add trains Cars and stations and you re ready to run What s New in Version 6 2 What For About This Manual About the Layouts Where to Go for Help pf Pe sa a 75707 r OFF vj i KOK A eK 2 What s New in Version 6 2 Version 6 2 is mostly about scenery It brings a great new set of pre built Scenery a wealth of new tools for developing your own and underneath a newly revamped graphics system to show off the scenic landscape at any zoom without loss of performance The new features are documented in the updated Scenery chapter of the manual In addition on the website there is a terrific Guide to 6 2 Scenery Features and a new Scenery Tutorial New Scenery Features Grid Painter Dropper Polyline Smoothing SCN Objects HQ Scenery Collection Enhanced Line Styles adjustable snap grid aids in fast drawing of precise scenery objects one click fills closed object or group with color or pattern click anywhere on screen picks up color to be applied to scenery Smoothing of polygon corners with auto generated bezier curves make a scenery object from shapes and lines save as reusable single object new collection of high quality scenery thick lines can be filled with hatch or bitmap patterns Toolbar Style Buttons Polygon Editing Flio Horiz
129. adable cars locomotives tenders passenger cars or cabooses Commands on the menu are e Empty Loaded changes the empty loaded status of the car If no load is associated with the car choosing Loaded brings up the Load Chooser Notice that these two commands are also available on the toolbar icons at right on the train toolbar next to the uncoupler Load Chooser brings up the for selecting loads Choose By Name shows a list of loads suitable for the car pick one and it deposits the load in the car Load Unload Car toggles the loaded status of the selected car Load Unload Cut toggles the loaded status of the selected car and any coupled cars of the same type Load Unload Train toggles the loaded status of all loadable cars in the train regardless of type Note the Load menu Is also available from the main menu under Train gt Car This makes it accessible in Tools Customize so you can create your own keyboard shortcuts or toolbar buttons for load commands Default Loads The load system features a scheme of cascading defaults designed to make it easy to use loads without a lot of setup The following diagram illustrates this Car Collection Default Steam Pror Gondola Defaut Steam collection Class G Gondola Car Type Images Collection General Ser
130. ain CAR label Consist one word description of train consist CAR label ExcludeOps X gt exclude car from switchlists CAR label Load current load or unloadable or empty CAR label Location at or near track or station STRAIN name ID numeric train id TRAIN name NCars number of cars in the train STRAIN name Car label of car between 0 and NCars 1 TRAIN name Name train name either user assigned or Train lt id gt TRAIN name Speed current speed same as returned by SPEED TRAIN name Direction F forward R reverse T toggle TRAIN name Length length in cars returns same value as NCars TRAIN name Flip invert train on track TRAIN name lt any gt custom property set blank to remove LAYOUT Name layout name LAYOUT NTrains number of trains on the layout LAYOUT Train name of train i i between 0 and NTrains TRACK id OccupiedBy return labels of cars on track SCENERY id Show show scenery object SCENERY id Hide hide scenery object SCENERY id Toggle toggle visibility of scenery object SCENERY id IsVisible 1 if scenery object is showing else 0 STATION id OccupiedBy return labels of cars in station TURNTABLE id OccupiedBy return labels of cars on turntable TURNTABLE id Track id of bridge track TURNTABLE id AlignedTo id s of 1 or 2 locked external tracks STRING string Length length of string in characters STRING string Contains argument STRING string
131. ain passes over a section marked Hidden the cars become thin outlines This simulates passing through a tunnel or a section of track underneath the layout Hidden track is shown on the layout as dashed lines You specify this type by choosing Hidden gt With Car Outlines from the track context menu Hidden track with hidden cars If you choose Hidden gt No Car Outlines then cars disappear completely when they pass over this section of hidden track Tunnel track When a train enters one end of a section of tunnel track it tunnels through and immediately begins to emerge at the other end Tunnel track is used when the layout has multiple images for example a separate picture for upper and lower levels As soon as the train leaves the upper level diagram it appears at the corresponding place on the lower level diagram as long as the exit and entry points are connected by a length of tunnel track Tunnel track is shown on the layout as light grey lines visible only when the Track Tool is in use This illustration shows tunnel track hard to see connecting levels of the helix in J ohn Armstrong s Southern Pacific Shasta Division from Model Railroader Apr 2005 aS Lr lo Natron Loop w Mount Shas es viewed trom a gt horthwest NATRON LOOP Eye level b Feru D O wut i E Tunnel track is also used to specify clipping regions See details below Untouchable track When track is marked Untouchable
132. ake a look around Choosing a Default Set for a Layout A default car set is assigned to each layout you open The program makes an initial assignment as described below to override it use the drop down at the bottom of Layout Properties f Default Steam Choose the default car set you want to be associated with the layout The choice you make is saved in the rrw file Modifying this choice will affect the layout and the display as soon as you click OK or Apply all standard car types on the layout will be converted to the newly chosen default set Rules for doing this are complicated but basically a boxcar of one style is converted to a boxcar of the other unless it is a car which was not chosen from the default set to begin with The initial default assigned by the program is one of four sets Default Steam Modern Brit Steam Brit Modern based on your US UK preference and the ratio of steam to diesel locos on the layout More default sets are available for download in your Web Car Chooser There is a nice set of cars from J ohn Allen s legendary Gorre amp Daphetid A beautiful set of default Chris Pedersen cars is now available for all users Using the Default Set The default set comes into play in the Add Car menu gt Uncouple The twelve class names below the line refer to cars in the dd Car By Name current default set When you choose By Name the Car Car Chooser Inventory Bar comes up showing the
133. al world for profit railroading It means moving goods by rail between shippers and receivers on and off the layout Industries issue the shipping orders the railroad carries them out money changes hands You and TrainP layer work together to carry out this simulation Your role is like that of a club member Once a week you and the boys go over to J oe s basement for an operating session As you walk in J oe hands you the controls for a locomotive and a stack of cards detailing this week s deliveries Tonight you run the AB Local serving A and B and points between Pick up two tankers of milk at the A Dairy a hopper of coal from the AA mine set them out on the interchange at B Return empties to A Your job is to plan your approach start your engine and get the cars where they need to go preferably before everyone else is done and the cookies are all gone TrainP layer plays the role of J oe It provides the layout track trains industries and random sets of shipping orders everything but the cookies Ops Components An operating session in TrainP layer is represented by a switchiist a set of instructions telling you to move a given set of cars to given destinations The program generates a switchlist and you deliver the cars as instructed When you re finished you can toss the switchlist and generate a new one or rewind and work the same one again The switchlist generator starts by creating a random set of waybills orders to shi
134. also determine which items are marked as Recent on Web in the web choosers Status icons Web chooser lists and trees show icons next to somerset county traction 2 items indicating how the local version of a file compares to its web El magnolia 1 version There are four choices magnolia 2 go B Q bristol fery terminal m r tl document you do not have a local version of EC CNW Appleton Wisconsin a Ej Saesing Station E d aia H e E filled document you have an up to date local version LJ No local Have local Ef Web newer Cf Web recen amp filled document with red star you have a local version but the version on the web Is more recent than the local one E empty document with blue star web version is recent i e meets the conditions on the What s New folder For car collections icons appear on the entire collections i e on folders in the tree rather than rows in the list window A legend at the bottom of the dialog reminds you what the icons mean Export contents of folders in chooser trees can be exported to text or xml files This is an expert feature used mostly by us to manage our file collections but you might find it useful in various ways The exported file contains the same data as what you see in list not icon view item name filename date etc for each file under the folder you are exporting To export the entire tree right click the root item Exported data can be in one of
135. am containing both TrainP layer and Tracklayer To start the program Select TrainPlayer from the Start menu under Programs gt TrainPlayer or double click the icon on your desktop The splash screen and about box will tell whether you are running in TrainPlayer or TrackLayer mode as determined from the license key you entered If you are running the demo version you have a choice At startup you are presented with an alert asking if you would like to enable TrackLayer features The demo version allows you to use all TrackLayer features except Save and Print TrainFleyer 2 The demo version contains both TranPiowe and TrsckLarer Ey dafault TratLaper feshires are noftemabled To erable thee moe click Yes Click No to proceed wiht Traine lyer onl Flu Can oraiie Track ape aires laie from the Melo menu Tha TrackLayer demo does not akre saving layout files Enable Traklar fates rile Dont ak ma this agar If you re only interested in trying TrainP layer click No To change your mind later choose Help gt Enable TrackLayer Features Click Yes to enable TrackLayer features at the outset and prevent this alert from appearing again The Track Toolbar The main difference you see on the screen when you are in TrackLayer mode Is the addition of the Track Toolbar hs O E BEL Edit Track Circle Turntable Station Run View View View View Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool Bkgmd Tracks Grid Retresh Tools on the Track toolbar are
136. am refer to it as it keeps track of your schedule If the clock is visible when you open a layout then it will start automatically as soon as any train moves To operate the clock 1 To show or hide the clock use Tools Clock Ifit IS visible when you exit the program it will come up again when you restart 2 To Start the clock right click in the clock window and choose Start from the context menu The clock hand advances about once every scale minute Skart St 3 To stop the clock right click and choose Stop Reset Settings 4 To reset the clock back to its default starting time click Reset 5 To modify the starting time or clock speed click Settings This brings up the Clock Settings dialog Schedule Window Together the station definitions and the clock give the program enough information to keep track of train arrivals and departures The Schedule Window reports and collects this data It works automatically all you have to do is display the window and then Start driving Once you have driven your route successfully the Schedule Window contains a schedule you can print out and hang on the wall for a future operating session The Schedule Window also serves as the output window when running scripts When a Script is running it can report its activities in this window By default the window comes up automatically as soon as you Start playing a Script The Schedule Window also serves as the place wh
137. ame window and in other displays Choose your modelling scale see About Sizes and Scales Scale The scale affects dimension measurements throughout the program Information about the layout For layouts from 107 Track Description Plans the description in this box is taken from the book For other layouts the description usually includes the author s name operating instructions and other information of interest Overall size of the layout image width x height in units selected from the drop down to the right The size shown here is Size approximate itis calculated from the image file not the layout itself These values are not editable to change the layout size adjust the grid Units Choose model scale or prototype English or metric Units chosen in this dialog will apply throughout the program About the Properties Dialog The Properties dialog is for viewing and editing properties of the layout and the currently selected car and train It is inconvenient to do this with a normal modal dialog because you have to close and open the dialog for each object you want to inspect Instead as of Version 5 2 the Properties dialog is modeless it stays on the screen as you click cars and trains around the layout The dialog has four buttons OK apply changes from all tabs and close the dialog Cancel close the dialog without applying changes Apply apply changes made in any tab to the selected car train and layout
138. ample Waybill No 240 a load of tools is to be shipped by boxcar code X from the industry Tool and Die Maker located at GSW Inc to a destination called Offline This means the ultimate destination of the load Is some receiver out beyond the boundaries of the layout the load is to be delivered to the interchange where it will be picked up and taken away by another possibly imaginary rail line In TrainP layer Ops either the shipper or receiver is an industry and the other Is always offline This follows prototype practice In an area the size of a model railroad it would be unusual to pick up a load at a shipper and deliver it to a receiver in the same area Ops is based on the more realistic scenario of loads entering and leaving the layout at designated interchanges Waybill Cycles To the customer the waybill represents a single job to be done to the railroad itis a series of moves which we call a waybill cycle A typical one goes like this e The railroad finds a car of the appropriate type to haul the specified load This car is sitting in some yard Y The car is taken empty from Y to the shipper industry S It is loaded with goods It is then taken to the interchange track R where itis to be picked up and taken to a remote destination There it is unloaded then brought back empty to the interchange The empty car is returned to Y ready for the next cycle This example might be represented by a schematic Y gt
139. an choose where and how to generate industries in a couple of ways e Checkmark the stations where you want industries generated then click Generate Checked Or e Click a row to select a station then click Generate to have the program pick a random industry or Choose to pick one yourself from the list The Choose button brings up the Industry Browser described on the Industries page Either way you can see what the generator came up with and cancel or do it again if you don t like the results Ops Generator This creates a scheduled train with switchlist and instructions It is a multi step process which does this 1 Chooses an engine This may be from the selected train or the choice you made in the wizard or a random choice 2 Chooses a set of outgoing cars A random selection is made from cars attached to or in the vicinity of the chosen engine The number of cars it chooses depends on a setting you can make in the wizard minimum about 5 maximum 20 3 Chooses a destination for each outgoing car Choices are limited to industries which can receive or dispatch that car type a random selection is made from these 4 Selects some cars to be picked up at some of the destinations If you are going to be making a delivery at 0e s Lumber and oe has an empty flatcar on his siding you might need to pick it up as you pass through 5 Expands some of the selected cars to include cuts If you have two identical coupled hoppers the
140. and choose Tunnel When a contiguous series of track segments are marked Tunnel the train hyperspaces across all of them at once Place Train Here Odd Car Here Paste Here To mark a section of track untouchable same procedure again Be careful when you use this feature Once a section is marked untouchable you can no longer select it move it delete it create a Switch or junction in it change its properties or connect any other track to it it becomes dead Make sure the track is fully connected and its properties set before you mark it untouchable To reenable an untouchable section right press any track and choose All Retouc hable This reverts all untouchable track to its normal state Clipping Regions Hidden track works fine for long tunnels but for short sections going beneath underpasses or behind scenery a better scheme is required In TrainP layer tricks involving track marked Tunnel are used to hide specific areas These tricks can be used to indicate clip angles at tunnel portals or to define regions of invisibility Tunnel portal clipping where the train is moving between hidden and normal track and needs to be clipped to a specific angle For this effect draw a section of Tunnel track passing over the junction between hidden and normal track This section defines the clip angle The tunnel track section must not be connected to anything else must not form a Switch with the track it crosses an
141. ar type The class name varies depending on the setting in the drop down at the bottom The US version is shown in the screen shot an alternate version is available for UK users If you change the selection in the drop down it will change the entries in the Class column and whenever a car description appears in the program on dialogs tooltips etc the name given in this column will be used This choice can also be made in Preferences see Car Defaults 2 Click a row in the list window to select a type This updates the AAR text in the Car Type tab Note if you are in the Load Collection Editor the code you select will be appended to the text in the AAR box with comma rather than replacing it 3 Or type a code directly into the AAR box Ifthe code is a valid one the list window will scroll to that type The AAR Car Types window remains up as you browse through the car collection To take it down click the close box or OK button Load Collection Editor The Load Collection Editor is very similar to the Car Collection Editor and can be operated as described above To bring up the Load Collection Editor right click a load image in the Load Chooser and choose Properties The differences between the Load version and the Car Collection one are a Some controls are removed from the former which do not apply to loads Size Units Default Load Show Load b the AAR box in the Load dialog contains a different kind of string described
142. ard Hamilton Yard le none Send Gondolsa GAY empty from track 443 to Ingersoll Machine Send Flatcar F63 empty from Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Send bondola GEI empty from Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Return Flatcar F48 empty from track 28 to Hamilton Yard Send Boscar H2l fempty trom Hamilton Yard to GSU Inc Send Boscar H60 fempty trom Hamilton Yard to GS Inc Deliver Boxcar Hoe faluminum bars from Hamilton Yard to GSW Inc Return Boxcar ES empty from track 29 to Hamilton Yard Each row in the grid corresponds to a line in the text and represents one car movement instruction The grid contains all the same data as the text so the two are redundant and you may want to dispense with the Schedule Window after you get up to speed The text line is in this format lt ACtiIOn gt lt Classe gt lt Car Load gt from lt hboGation to at lt 16 AE gt If you rearranged the columns of the grid in this order then a grid row would read just like the text instruction For details about these windows see Switchlist Window and Schedule Window How to Work a Switchlist Each instruction in the switchlist sentence in the Schedule Window or row in the Switchlist Window tells you to move a given car from its current location to a given destination Instructions contain different verbs depending on the type of move see notes under Switchlist Window Contents for a list but they all mean the same and you could just read
143. ard to move selected objects toward the back 7 N Bring to Front to bring selected objects to the front 7 O Send to Back to move selected objects to the back 7 P Scenery Chooser to bring up the Scenery Chooser for browsing downloading and introducing scenery objects onto the layout Notes 1 The first six tools selector and drawing tools are a modal set meaning you can only have one of them active at a time When you press one of these it stays pressed deactivates the current tool and becomes the active one 2 This tool is a combination create edit tool To create a new object of the selected type press and drag ata blank spot on the layout to select or edit an existing object of the selected type click or press and drag For example when the Rectangle tool is active you can create a new rectangle or modify an existing rectangle but not select or modify an ellipse 3 Shortcut to creating a polygon draw a polyline with no closing segment then right click itand choose Close Polygon 4 Pressing the Shift key while dragging with the Rectangle tool causes the shape to be locked into a square The same is not true of the Ellipse tool which is designed to work the same way as the Circle track tool 5 This tool is accompanied by a little arrow which brings up the appropriate tab of the Scenery Styles dialog The style you set in this dialog applies to new objects or can be applied to existing objects using the Painter tool 6 All foreground
144. assignment for the command This button is dimmed if no key is currently assigned Erases all key assignments and resets to factory values Customize Menu For resetting or customizing menus Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Application Frame Menus Show Menus for Layout Reset d ia Document Menu animations Hone W Menu shadows Dialog controls Application Frame Menus Context Menus Menu animations Menu shadows Contest Menus Select contest meny Pesupe Hint select the context menu change the page to Commands and drag the toolbar buttons into the menu window Help Close Choose one of the two main menus Layout the menu when a document is open or Default then click Reset to reset the selected menu to factory content Choose Popups then click Reset to reset all context menus to defaults Choose the action to be taken when you expand a menu Check if you want menus to have a three dimensional look with shadows It may be necessary to reset all menus after you upgrade to a new version if the menu commands don t seem to be doing what they should To reset all menus click Reset once for each of the three menu choices Customize Options For setting miscellaneous toolbar options Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard
145. ate and substitute variables and to separate frequently used code into subroutines and procedures It is rudimentary but reasonably complete This document gives an overview of the components of the language It does not attempt to teach you programming or even give you much more than a brief overview and a command reference The main documentation is built into the program and can be found on the Reference tab of Script Central the same table of commands and variables as shown below but with more detail and examples under each topic Further reading matter can be found on the Scripting page of the TrainP layer web site TPL Overview A script consists of a series of statements Some are comments text provided by the script author to annotate or explain and are skipped over when the script is executed Others are either executable statements which cause actions to occur or wait conditions which cause the script to pause for some specified event or time period before proceeding The text in the script is sometimes referred to as code and the act of creating it is called coding An executable statement begins with a command one of the words or phrases recognized by the language such as those listed below followed by arguments providing data needed by the command An argument might consist of a single string or numeric value or an expression formed by combining multiple values using arithmetic operators In place of a literal string or
146. ation region a car is in the station if any part of it is sitting inside the rectangle A yard style station is defined not by a rectangle but by a set of track sections A car is in a yard style station if it Is sitting on any of the sections in the set To define a yard style station you click and shift click to select tracks one ata time then use a menu command to create the station and associate it with the tracks For details and screen shots see Stations How To Create a Yard or Interchange There are three general ways to add yards and interchanges to a layout e Don t Start with one of the ops ready layouts in the web collection which already have yards and interchanges defined See Ops Quick Start e Let the program do it The Yard Finder and Interchange Generator can start with any layout having track recognize certain track patterns and automatically create yards and interchanges For details of how these work see Yard Finder and Interchange Generator For instructions on how to use them see Ops Setup Wizard e Create them by hand Draw the track select an appropriate set of them use a menu command to convert the set to a yard style station then select the appropriate industry to identify as yard vs interchange Full details of the procedure are given under Stations Station Properties The Station Properties dialog is where you define a station and optionally its industry To bring It up a activate the Station tool
147. ations and yards interchange as separate independent steps Yard Finder The Yard Finder looks around the layout for patterns of track which meet certain requirements If it finds one it creates a yard style station around the area and gives it a unique name starting with Yard Requirements are every track must be straight not curved and must be a Spur i e a dead end Each track must have a neighbor parallel to itand a specific distance away from it where that distance Is the parallel distance found in the track snap settings All sections collinear with the end section are included i e if a long straight sour is made of five short segments all five are used For example here is a typical find four parallel straight stubs highlighted in green i ji a e ra Fie p ca m h ta j if fA H i i 3 E Ta i el an gl Sie 3 f a i e a jm at Ss aire eS rr E ane ee r Pa s When creating the yard the Yard Finder includes tracks connecting the parallel sections This example has three one crossover and two end sections What this scheme tries to do is find one or more yards suitable for use in ops sessions It is not designed to find all yards It does not find those with curved track with connections on both ends or with tracks not parallel or not equally spaced If your layout has yards like those you will need to specify them by hand see Yards and Interchanges Interchange Gener
148. ator The Interchange Generator attempts to find one long spur which can serve as an interchange track It starts by finding all spurs Industry Generator Industries are stations where goods can be exchanged An industry has a name and a list of incoming and outgoing car types used by the ops generator to decide what sorts of cars can come and go there Like stations industries can be created by hand either by choosing from a master list or inventing on the spot but it s faster and more interesting to let the industry generator do the job The Industry Generator assigns random industries to stations on the layout It works like this 1 Assigns the special types Yard Tracks and Interchange to all yards and interchanges These have generous lists of car types you can set out or pick up on yards and interchanges Actually this step is done during station generation 2 Goes to each station on the layout and chooses a random industry from the master list The choice is based on car types located in the vicinity for example at a siding where there are tank cars the selected industry might be a dairy Stations with no cars nearby may not get an industry assigned 3 Updates the stations on the layout to show the industry names These steps are done automatically when you use Generate Ops A more interactive approach is to use the Ops Wizard or the Generate Industries command These bring up the Industry Generator dialog Here you c
149. ave otherwise you can download the jog from the web The R amp OB is a small loop with two branches Follow along in TrackLayer and see if you can build It Open the image file Use File Open to open the graphics file For this tutorial use L21 tpg from your trainplayer layouts images directory or click here to download the same image in jpg format download rockport jpg Copy or save the file to a convenient directory and open it from there The image opens the grid appears in a default position and the Edit Tool K becomes active Align the grid Point to an intersection point on the grid press the Shift key the cursor becomes a 4 headed arrow and drag until the red lines drawing This anchors an origin point Without the Shift key drag an intersection point to resize the grid until the grid squares match the drawing as shown at right Shift drag moves the grid drag alone resizes it Dragging by an intersection point keeps the grid square After adjusting use View Grid 4 to turn off the grid display Place a circle Choose the Circle Tool Point to the center mark amp near Gills Landing press and drag Adjust until the circle exactly overlays the left hand curve as shown To move rather than resize the circle press the shift key while you drag jisi F 1 TT i I AE Place second circle Draw a second circle overlaying
150. aw the circle 1 Choose the Circle tool 2 Press the mouse button near where you want the center of the circle 3 Drag to adjust the circle s radius 4 To move the circle instead of resizing it press the Shift Key as you drag 5 Continue dragging toggling the shift key as necessary until the circle is where you want drag shift lrag it then release Note in version 3 1 you can have the radius snap to a specific value as you drag see Track Preferences To draw the first leg e 1 Choose the Straight Track tool Fal 2 Position the cursor on the circle where you want the leg to join the curve The circle highlights 3 While the circle is highlighted press the mouse button 4 Drag to where you want the other end of the leg While you drag one end the other end adjusts automatically to remain tangent to the circle You can draw a leg in either direction either starting on the circle or ending on it J ust be sure that before you press or release the mouse button the circle is highlighted so the segment will connect To complete the curve Draw the second leg as you did the first This time when you release the mouse button the circle disappears and the arc section between the two legs becomes a curve When the train comes down one leg it will go smoothly into and oT around the curve and exit on the te other leg Notes e All curves must be horseshoes hatis if you go clockwise fr
151. ayout in the top portion of the Industry Browser or for any of the standard industries in the lower portion In the latter case they will apply to any new industry of that type For example you can modify Feed Mill so that it includes corn H and this will then apply to any feed mill you create Yard and Interchanges In the pre ops version of TrainP layer you could select a region of track and give ita name and the result was called a station It was used for a few minor purposes such as reporting arrivals and departures of trains In the ops version stations play a larger role and it was necessary to define a couple of new types yards and interchanges to serve special purposes It was also necessary to enhance the tools so that these new types could be created This section gives an overview of the new types more information can be found under Stations Yards A yard is an area of track where cars are stored until needed and where trains are made up or broken down Most are easy to recognize designed to fit as many cars as possible into a small area they usually consist of parallel tracks about a car width apart lt Ops requires yards They serve as sources of empty cars to be sent to industries and as off the mainline areas where switchers can gather cars and assemble them into trains ready to go out on the line On model railroads they serve as places to stash all that rolling stock you ve accumulated ov
152. ays the train being controlled Allows selecting a car and or uncoupling point scrolling the train viewing car or train properties For details see Train Window Note an identical train contro window is also available in the Train Toolbar Horn Button Press and hold to sound the horn Right click to choose horn type Speed Dial Controls the train speed To rotate press and drag anywhere on the perimeter of the dial Double click a point on the perimeter and the speed dial will jump to that value In Yard Mode you can rotate counter clockwise past stop and go into reverse Speed Dial Knob Shows the current dial setting Press and drag on knob to rotate dial Forward Reverse Click to change the direction of train movement Green light indicates forward red reverse Minimize Button Change control panel to compact form The minimized control panel allows dial rotation stop by click and reverse direction when yard mode is enabled Uncoupling Pin Shows location of the next uncouple add car or paste operation To change the position of the pin click between cars press right or left arrow keys or select a car For more see Train Window Train Scroller Press to scroll the train horizontally within the window Press and hold to auto scroll Pressing the right scroller moves the train to the left and vice versa e Uncouple Button Click to uncouple at the current position of the uncoupling pin This button has no effect if
153. below Load AAR Strings What you see in the AAR box for a load definition is nota single code but a ist of codes indicating all car types suitable to carry the current load For example as shown above a bulldozer can be transported by a general service flatcar FM or a well car FW or a solid bottom gondola GB A single letter code represents all car types of the same class for example G means all types starting with G A minus sign before a code means except this type for example F FA means all types F except FA A letter in parentheses is a display code for modifying the appearance of the load At the moment there is only one such code S gt stretchable meaning the load image is to be stretched horizontally to cover the entire car top Without this indicator a load image is shown at its natural size even if it is shorter than the car Stretchable loads are those like coal or gravel which look like piles covering the whole car unstretchable are those like bulldozers which remain fixed size regardless of the size of the car You can use the AAR Car Types window to create a multi code string When you click a row in that window it adds a comma and a new code to the string in the AAR box For example you can click three rows in the AAR Car Types window one ata time and get a string like FA FB FC The Car Inventory Bar The Car Inventory Bar CIB replaces the old twelve button car toolbar with a new doc
154. ble rails are now a track display style thus faster more dynamic more flexible better auto fit of text improved display and saving of Status better ground up drawing e g rails on top of roadway individual layers may be suppressed when exporting images fixes in AnyRail conversion repairs for flex track and other parts Fixes in scripting fixes in translation and parsing certain expressions Fixes in AnyRail import For history see What Was New In Older Versions What For Q Is there any point to moving little make believe trains around an image of a model pretending to be a railroad A Sure e Explore layout designs When you re thinking about designing a railroad there is nothing handier than a book of track plans Well designed plans give you ideas about how different track configurations might work with your theme and fit in the space you have Attractive artwork inspires you to think about the terrain and the scenery TrainPlayer brings you some of the world s finest track plans to browse appreciate and try e Develop operating plans Ifyou had an operating railroad and an unlimited supply of rolling stock how would you go about running it You need to figure out how to deliver goods and passengers for your customers what cars you need to run on what schedule how to avoid delaying the express while the local is tying up the main line With TrainP layer you can develop timetables and schedules by driving the layou
155. cape Has no effect unless Collisions is set to Crash Sets the amount of acceleration deceleration when trains start stop or change speed A low value reduces the effect and makes train control more responsive a high value increases the effect so that trains take longer to come up to speed or coast to a stop Set the value to zero to eliminate acceleration Affects what happens when you point the mouse cursor between two cars on the layout With this box unchecked the cursor changes to an uncouple Icon and a click causes the cars to uncouple With the box checked the cursor does not change unless you are pressing the shift key this prevents accidental uncouplings For a picture of the uncouple icon see Moving Trains By Hand Check this box to enable a special feature of the control panel When this box is checked then when you click a point on the perimeter of the speed dial the dial automatically rotates to that point Uncheck this box if you find that feature to get in the way Switch Preferences Settings for switch display and operation and for the switch window Called from menu command File gt Preferences Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches Display M Open lights m Distance to frog pa S W Closedlights M Light size j Highlighting O Operation Barrel through when closed W Gubo throw when crossed Random throw time in seconds 4 Switch Windows Background Show
156. cenery Track To Scenery Selection Jo Station Track Color 1 Using the Straight Track and other track tools draw track in the desired shape 2 Select all the track to be converted use shift click to add or subtract from the selection as needed When the whole set is selected right click any selected section and choose Track To Scenery The program converts the selected track to one or more polyline scenery objects in default style If the track forms a closed figure as shown in the picture then the resulting object will be a closed filled polygon Otherwise it will be one or more line or polyline objects If more than one polyline is created all created objects are grouped together into a single object The new scenery is created in the currently active layer If you want it to be in a particular layer choose that layer in the scenery toolbar before doing the conversion After the conversion the Scenery Edit tool will become active and the new scenery object s will be selected You can then drag them around group them restyle etc The original track will be deleted unless there are any cars or trains on it in which case it will remain intact The operation can be undone using Edit gt Undo Ifa grouped object was created the undo has two steps first undoes the grouping second undoes the track gt scenery conversion Creating Roadbed Scenery Roadbed is normally displayed as a track drawing style as described unde
157. cludes lists of incoming and outgoing loads some are yards or interchanges where cars are collected or exchanged during operations You can create stations and industries on your layout as described in this chapter Or you can take one of a couple of shortcuts a let the program generate them for you automatically see Ops Setup Wizard or b open an ops ready layout which already has them all set up see Ops Quick Start In any case you might want to skim this chapter to familiarize yourself with the various parts This chapter also includes instructions for using the Route Finder a device for finding track paths from one location to another Stations Industries Yards and Interchanges Station Properties Industry Browser Route Finder Stations In TrainPlayer a station is a named location on the layout It may represent a terminal loading dock warehouse yard city or any place a train might stop to interchange passengers or goods By defining stations on the layout you give the program a way to keep track of where a train has travelled Two new types of station have been introduced as part of the Ops system yards and interchanges These are used as areas for storing exchanging and manipulating cars when shipping and receiving goods These types of stations called yard style have somewhat different properties and methods of creation than normal stations as detailed below A station is represented on the
158. conditions are no longer met A train arrives at a station when its lead car moves into the station It departs when its last car leaves A car is considered to be ina station when it meets the above requirements Itis ata station when any car of the same train Is in the station Creating a Station 1 Click to select the Station tool on the main toolbar or choose Tools Stations If there are stations defined on the layout selecting this tool causes them to become visible as dashed blue rectangles with names ome i o o O o o beurray HE eS pe a C O a Heuben i a A Gouth Newark 3 ee 2 To create a new Station press and drag to form a rectangle around the desired station area This must enclose some section of track or it will be disregarded 3 When you release the mouse button the Station Properties dialog comes up so you can supply a name and other information for the new station Enter a name and click OK or click Cancel to abort creating the station Creating a Yard StyleStation These instructions are for creating either a yard or an interchange 1 Click to select the Edit tool 58 You do not use the Station tool to create this type of station 2 Select the track sections you want to make up the yard or interchange Hold down the Shift key then click each section and it will add to the selection Or you can drag a rectangle around an area to select all tracks in it or shift drag to add the
159. cross the bottom of the screen For example Switchlist Color Instructions ar To At From Set out Boxcar XM4H empty from Cero yard at Interchange M43 Interchange Empt Cero yard Retum Tankear T477 empty from track 227 to Cero yard ET Cero yard np track 227 Set out Hopper H706 coal from Telluride Coal at Interchange i Interchange Telluride Coal Set out Tankcar TA438 empty from Cero yard at Interchange AAS Interchange np Cero yard Send Hopper H707 empty from Tellunde Coal to Orphir Mine 1D Orphir Mine Empty Telluride Coal Cars Switchlist Editing a Switchlist Switchlists are generated automatically and are not designed to be permanent Nevertheless they are editable so if you like you can create one by hand or modify a generated one The switchlist is saved with the layout so it will be permanent until you generate a new one The first step in creating or editing is to right click the switchlist window and choose Grid Editable Without this the grid is read only and cannot be modified Once this is done then you can edit in various ways e Click a text cell to select it In some cases you can then type a new value in others a drop down list appears so you can make a choice You may have to resize a narrow column to make room for the large drop down arrow Note that not all items are editable for example you can specify a car by setting its ID in a cell but you cannot specify a location as that is a property you ca
160. d two track segments are on the same line segment Endpoint on track but no junction endpoint of one track lies near point on another track Track Numbers 732 y a 43 I 6 To identify tracks and objects use Tools gt Show Numbers to turn onthe 40 42 41 454445 allie display of track and junction numbers Track numbers are shown in blue junction ae 5 109 numbers in red IES If the Scenery Edit tool is active instead of track and junction numbers scenery od 310 object numbers are displayed in green oo N This command is a toggle use again to turn off the numbers a ba 5 108 Ad Another way is to use tooltips Choose Tools gt Show Tooltips to enable a this feature Then hover the mouse over a track junction switch circle turntable m a a H Z S 4 114 or station and you will see a note indicating its number and other data If you do not 4 see the tooltip try clicking in the layout window to make sure it Is the active window Highlight a Track or J unction If an error message gives a track or junction number you re having trouble finding on the layout use Tools gt Highlight Track ee ee ee a BO TRA ae Track Highlight Choose or enter track or junction to be highlighted Track Number 5 Junction Cancel In the Track Highlight dialog enter the track or junction number The corresponding object will be highlighted in pink on the layout To turn off the pin
161. d a left handed one you re out of luck TrackLayer 5 3 fixes this See Flipping Menu Changes Improvements in View Add Car and other menus What Was New in 5 2 Drag Trains by Hand Hands on operation Point to a train press and drag it along the track just like a railroader s fingertip on the garage layout Move the train in either direction any speed Throw switches as you go using the space bar Bump into another train and it couples click between cars to uncouple The view auto scrolls as you drag so you don t lose sight of your car You can carry out a whole switching session without ever touching the control panel More Chris Pedersen Cars Nearly a thousand great new cars from railroad artist Chris Pedersen with detailed full size images and prototype paint schemes based on actual HO models Locomotives freight and passenger cars from Athearn Walthers and others decorated for ATSF BN Chessie and dozens of others For information and screen shots see the Chris Pedersen page on our website To provide the full benefit of Chris artwork 5 2 introduces features for displaying large car images along with easy ways to browse through them For details see Large Car Images The Chris Pedersen Car collection is available for a nominal price To buy use Purchase Upgrade or Check For Updates on the Help menu New Properties Scheme The Properties dialog in 5 2 is modeless meaning it stays on the screen and updates as
162. d download layouts from within the program Car Display Improved turning car top labelling Fixes Many repairs and improvements throughout Web Layout Chooser The web layout chooser Is for downloading layouts from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser Awe Wrap RR Wabeno Beertowr Bree Tum fee 2 TP Designed Mo E Kalmbach k a For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Layout The web layout tree shows layouts available for download from the web The folders you see in the tree may show the entire collection or a subset of it depending on the license you purchased 1 Ifa folder has a sign next to it click to expand it and show its subfolders if not click the folder to show its contents in the list window 2 Click a layout in the list to see Its preview This requires a short download 3 If you like the layout and want to use it click Download to download tt and add It to your local collection The dialog then switches to the Local Layout Chooser so you can open the layout The downloaded version will go into the same folder in your local tree as its folder on the web For example in the above illustration if you clicked Download you would get a copy of Benjamin s Room deposited in your local Layouts folder under Standard User Tree Contents Demo Sample layouts for use w
163. d in this web chooser Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Download All Download and install all Sounds within the selected folder and subfolders Look at all sounds within the selected folder and subfolders if some on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those Find Next Download All Eas Download Missing Items Download Missing Items List Menu Open Download selected sound and switch to local tab For more information about sounds see Horns and Sounds also Stations The Train Toolbar This page is obsolete The Train Toolbar has been replaced by the Train Control Bar Script Central J unction Actions Tab For viewing and editing junction action scripts See also Script Central Tabs Seri pt Central forthe x Scripts Junction Actions Subroutines Reference Settings J31l action minute stop at after Jal after U 0 U02 stop after OU 0 U03 stop Click to view a script double click to after 0 0 08 forward This tab shows a list of all junction actions on the layout If there is more than one action at the same junction they are listed separately and given different id s When this tab is active a junction on the layout is highlighted to match the selected item in the list List contents ID Unique program assigned id for each action Junction ID of junction where action is attached
164. d must pass directly over the hidden to normal junction Overpass Clipping where the train is to be completely hidden as it passes through a given region For this effect draw a clipping box Surrounding each area to be hidden A box must consist of exactly four connected track segments all marked Tunnel Delete Track Hidden As a Shortcut you can shift click to select all segments at once then point to any one and choose Tunnel from the context menu Tunnel Untouchable All Retouchable Boxes appear as dotted gray lines shown ee only when Track or Edit tool is active When trains pass the portion within each clip box is completely hidden i oe Over underpass regions where trains going underneath are to hide trains on top to remain visible For this effect first draw a clipping box as above defining the hidden region Then identify the track s to be on top where trains are to remain visible To do this p introduce a junction where any top track crosses the clip box boundary Best procedure is a mark the tunnel track as Untouchable b draw a temporary segment to the point where you want the junction c delete the segment This junction serves no purpose except to flag a track as being on top All other track electrically connected to the junction is also on top Trains passing on top tracks remain visible while those on non top tracks a
165. d the view by dragging it with the mouse When the view is zoomed in So the layout is larger than the document window and the Run tool is selected then press and drag any point on the layout and the view will move Note dragging the view by hand disables Auto F ollow To re enable right click the layout and choose Auto F ollow If the layout extends beyond the window in only one direction you can only drag that way For example if the layout is a long horizontal strip which extends to left and right but is completely visible vertically then you can only drag in a horizontal direction This feature can be disabled In General Preferences uncheck the box View drag by hand Layout Printing In TrainPlayer you can print your layout as it looks on the screen with switch lights with or without trains background track or grid The printout reflects the current settings on the View menu Use Print Setup Print Preview or Print commands on the File menu the same way you do with most Windows programs TrackLayer Pittsbureh Midvale amp Ironton RR i Eile Edit wiew Tools Train Recording Window Help C O new cN Eph n 4 QE 24m mmn nn a I _ Ga Open Ctr o SSS Ss S Open Layout SEoncea ne ti Freight ha 4 Close i i Pat mi e as a Page Zoomin oom Wt Close Save as ca Properties Preferences Print Setup Ei Print Preview E Prine Li r ja
166. data Clicking a row header left end of row selects the indicated car on the layout To find a car on the layout right click a row and choose Zoom To Car Information on this page Is specific to the Cars Window See also the general instructions under Ops Windows unloadable Cars Switchhst Field Chooser Train_ID For a more manageable display the list can be grouped by Train as shown below This gives you a tree with collapsible trains an alternative to the Train Tree To arrange this choose Group By Box from the context menu then drag the Train item into the group box AAR Location Load track 247 track 247 track 4 track 4 4 Cars Switchtist The Cars Window Is for display only and cannot be edited It can be sorted on any column except picture Cars Window Contents Car Car identifier Class General car class AAR Car class from AAR codes list Location Current location of car 1 Load Load currently in car or Empty Color Color code for car h CariD Internal numeric ID of car h Train Name of train containing car if train is named h TrainiD Internal numeric ID of train containing car h Consist One word description of train consist h 2 Notes Hidden h in this column means the item is hidden by default at install time To see it drag it onto the grid from the Field Chooser 1 Location is a station name or a track location Car in station means the car is within
167. ded CAR label Loadname CAR label Label CAR label AAR CAR label RevEngine CAR label Note CAR label Track CAR label lt any gt CAR label Class CAR label Type CAR label Position CAR label SortOrder me i ee a eS return from subroutine or proc to calling script set direction to forward set direction to reverse set speed to given mph starts train moving if stopped decelerate to a stop uncouple at given position at given car or between given cars sound train horn for 3 sec or given time in millisec select given train load given car s with given load or default unload given car s transfer control temporarily to given train transfer control back to original train start train script or start train moving at 5 mph or given speed display given string in schedule window set user variable from input dialog optionally using given prompt display given string in popup window hide window if no string numeric car id 1 if car is loaded otherwise 0 name of load assigned to car if any car label Car aar code 1 if car is marked as reverse engine else 0 user applied note on car track number where car Is currently located custom property set blank to remove general car class name of car type within collection trackno dist to Send 1 gt headed S user applied integer value CAR label Train_ID id of owning train CAR label Car_ID id of car CAR label Train name of owning tr
168. der names Folders can then be expanded one by one Field Chooser display a popup window containing a button for each column not already visible in the grid To add one of these to the grid drag it from the Field Chooser to the desired spot on the grid header To remove a column from the grid drag it off the grid header it will automatically move into the Field Chooser Group By Box display a panel at the top of the grid for grouping by selected columns When the Group By box is visible drag column headers into and out of it to specify how you want the grid rows to be grouped By default the rows are grouped by Folder Other groupings are not very meaningful in the Industry Browser but feel free to experiment Column Auto Resize specifies whether columns resize proportionally as the window is resized By default this is on If you turn it off resizing the window will not affect column widths Selected Industry panel of details for the selected row Not editable unless you click Edit When editing most of the operation is the same as described under Station Properties Name name of the selected industry Folder folder containing the selected industry This is read only under all circumstances you cannot change the folder of an existing entry you must delete and re create in a different folder Loads Incoming Outgoing load lists for the selected industry These boxes work as described under Station Properties Browse bu
169. ders into the chooser tree from Windows Explorer There are restrictions on what you can do in the chooser tree The main one is that you cannot modify a locked folder you can t add a folder or file to one of these or rearrange subfolders in it or rename it otherwise it would no longer match what s on the disk In a typical situation there is only one unlocked folder in the tree the Layouts folder at the top so this is the starting place for adding your own content To create a folder 1 Right click a folder in the tree and choose New Folder below left This command is dimmed in most places but always available on the Layouts folder at the top 2 The folder is created at the bottom of the tree and called New Folder with the name selected Type the name you want for the folder below right E Layouts GHG Layouts E aa Layout F Layouts101 5 ip core Premium S Fj Refresh m Standard a MTA Find Next To create a subfolder repeat the process starting on an existing folder To delete a folder or subfolder right click and choose Remove dimmed if the folder is locked or is within a locked folder To add a layout to a folder 1 Right click the folder and choose Add File 2 In the file dialog navigate to the layout rrw file you wish to add and click OK The program adds an alias pointing to the layout file You do not see a change in the tree but if you click on the selected folder you ll see
170. drag 4 If you make a mistake or don t like the result use Edit gt Undo 5 To dismiss the tool a press ESC b click a spot inside the pink but outside the blue rectangle or c choose a different TrackLayer tool 4 Elizabeth amp Rahway River Ry Orignal copyright Kalmbach Publishing Co Licensed to TP Develope T NT Rescaling or moving track relative to the background 1 Do steps 1 and 2 as above 2 Press and drag the blue inner rectangle by a corner to resize or by the middle to move Note the blue border cannot be dragged by a side The entire set of track moves or rescales proportionately 3 See steps 4 and 5 above K Elizabeth amp Rahway River Ry T TEX Straight Track and Switches The electronic track on a TrainP layer layout is like sectional track from the hobby shop It consists of an interconnected set of line segments mostly straight but some curved The point where two segments join together IS a junction and the train rolls right across it The point where three or more segments meet is a switch which you can throw to choose between alternate routes Unlike sectional track TrainP layer track segments can be any length and joined at any angle Switches can have any number of branches Track segments can have special properties like the ability to hide the train or cause it to jump instantly from one end to the other And of course TrainPlayer track never needs cleaning Straight
171. drag the module and release it on an empty space where nothing is highlighted i e drag it out of the assembly onto the floor By list box 1 Select a module by clicking on it in the workspace or by clicking a row in the list box The module is highlighted with a colored frame and the selected row is highlighted in the list box 2 Click the up or down arrow to the right of the list box labelled move selected above The module will trade places with the one immediately above or below it in the list 3 To remove a module click Remove The selected module will be removed from the assembly Zooming Modules By default the Module Manager displays the entire assembly regardless of how large it becomes You can enlarge or maximize the window but for very large assemblies this may not be enough and you may want to zoom in for a closer look This is the purpose of the zoom controls at the lower right of the dialog To enlarge the view click the up arrow Each click zooms in by a fixed amount There is a limit you can t zoom so far that the module edges disappear the up arrow is dimmed when you reach the limit When the view is enlarged scrollbars appear so you can move around To shrink the view click the down arrow Each click reduces by a fixed amount until the assembly goes to a fixed minimum size To restore to normal fit to window mode click Fit This resizes the assembly to fit in the window Settings The Settings button a
172. e see Dragging By Hand Display the splash screen for a few seconds Click takes it down Bring up the Layout Chooser Automatically open the latest layout from the Most Recently Used list Check for program updates Other general options Show control panel Show schedule window Show industry names Show station color codes Auto save Check the website to see if a newer version of the program Is available If you choose not to have this done on startup you can do it manually using Help gt Check for Updates Automatically bring up the control panel when opening a layout having trains Automatically open the Schedule Window when starting to play a script Many scripts direct status reports to this window as they run Check to display industry names in red whenever stations are on display If unchecked industries are not shown just station names Determines the style of station display when color codes are active during an ops session If checked station colors are shown as thick outlines around the Station if unchecked colors show as Solid blocks New in version 5 2 auto save creates a copy of your layout periodically so that in case of program or computer crash you won t lose much work To enable auto save check the box Auto save every and enter the time between saves After the specified time the program makes a copy of your layout in the system TEMP directory overwriting any previo
173. e use File gt Save As choose type rzp from the drop down The program creates a Zip file copies all components into it and saves it to the indicated location To open an rzp file use File gt Open choose type rzp from the drop down then browse to the file Or drag the rzp file from Windows Explorer into TrainPlayer In either case the program unzips the file into a temporary location opens the rrw from there and locates its external files in the _ files subfolder alongside To unzip an rzp file to your disk open the rzp file as indicated above then use File gt Save As and choose type rrw The rrw file will be saved to the indicated location and alongside will be a _ files subfolder containing external files Importing CAD Layouts To convert a layout created in a CAD program you must be running TrackLayer the import feature is not available in TrainP layer Details of the import process vary depending on the input Importing from Atlas Right Track or WinRail You need a working copy of Atlas Right Track or WinRail ver 8 or 9 recommended in order to export an image of the layout If you do not have the program installed you can still convert the track but will not have a background image WinRail Cary Grant RR2 Seles File Edit View Element Properties Tools Statistics Special Help 000 8 SGe66E0NeE IIE xo oom 1 at a PRRECEan0TKKA HS m m ot h m F i
174. e Train menu b on right click of a car c on toolbar button Ge d from Add Car Here on a track section Any of these brings up the Car Chooser where you can browse and select cars to be added Cartypes P Seed Defaults ifa Default Classic 3 Default Lionel 8a Default Modem covered hopper class LO Show loads he To edit a car type or collection right click an icon in the Car Chooser middle window or a folder in the tree at the left and choose Properties This brings up the Car Collection Editor for browsing and editing the selected car type or any other type in the same collection To download a car collection in the Car Chooser go to the Web tab Browse and find what you like then click Install The actual download is done into a temporary directory while you browse so that you can view the images clicking Install copies the files from the temp location into Cartypes To publish a car collection in the Car Collection Editor Collection tab click Export Creating a Collection by Hand If you know Microsoft Paint Adobe Photoshop or some other bitmap editing program you can create your own car side and top images This doesn t require a lot of artistic skill it s a little grid of pixels not a blank mural and even less if you just want to copy an existing set and do a recoloring or kitbashing job To create your own collection from scratch 1 Create an image for eac
175. e by hand which you can populate with layouts from anywhere and organize as you wish Tree Contents Layouts Entire layouts folder from TrainP layer app data directory Recent Layouts recently opened Same as at bottom of File menu Downloads Downloaded layouts note 1 CD Layouts Layouts residing on CD note 2 lt user added folders gt Folders created manually or dragged in see Adding Your Own Layouts 1 The Downloads folder contains aliases to layouts recently downloaded There is no actual folder named Downloads on the disk 2 The CD Layouts folder appears in the tree if a you ran the installer from a TrainPlayer CD and chose to run the layouts from CD and b you have the CD currently mounted In this case the CD Layouts folder contains the entire set of layouts on the CD If you have been running an earlier version of TrainP layer you may not see all your previous layouts in the tree Folders you previously added by hand or by drag and drop will need to be re added Tree Menu Fj Refresh Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Reload folder contents from disk note 1 Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find New Folder New Folder Create folder in tree 2 Find Find Next Add File Add File Browse for file add to open folder 2 Remove Remove Remove file or folder from tree 2 3 Rename Rename folder in tree 2 3 Properties Display folder p
176. e daily run of a train which goes from A to B with several stops in between You will need to know the average time it takes to get from one stop to the next The scheduling features help you with this by reporting when the train arrives and departs at stations along the way You can use these reports to calculate travel times for your schedule In TrainP layer the travel times are likely to be in minutes rather than hours as the prototype would take For this reason there is a scale clock a clock which runs faster than the one on your wall so that say ten minutes on the layout equals an hour on the railroad So you can run your simulated eight hour shift all the way from A to B and still be done in time for lunch This chapter used to be bigger With the introduction of Ops the part about Stations was removed and expanded Into its own chapter Clock Schedule Window Clock When operating a model railroad it may take one minute to travel from Cincinnati to Columbus Such time spans don t make for very convincing schedules The model railroader s solution to this is the scale clock which runs at some multiple of normal speed If that multiple is say 6 then it appears to take 6 minutes to make the trip which Is still record time but at least more manageable TrainP layer offers an adjustable speed railroad style scale clock in its own dockable resizable window You can use It to time your operations or start it and let the progr
177. e horn continues to sound as long as the button is held down To choose a different type of horn either a right click the Horn button on the control panel and the train choose Properties and select a horn type from the drop down in the Train Properties dialog Horn Choose Other at the bottom of the menu to pick from a Bel wider variety of horn and engine sounds via the Sound Whistle Other Chooser To turn running sounds on or off check or uncheck Running Sounds from the context menu on the Horn button pictured or the one you see when you right click an empty space on the layout Running Sounds In TrainP layer you have several choices of speed dependent running sounds steam or diesel To choose running sounds 1 Right click a train or engine and choose Properties Go to the Train tab shown below 2 There is a drop down menu for running sounds Choose one If you see only a small number of choices as shown below left choose Download and you will get the complete set of running sounds available on our site This may take a few minutes but next time your choice of running sounds in this drop down will be much larger 3 To hear the sounds start the train moving If you don t hear anything right click a blank spot on the layout and check Running Sounds on the context menu below right ate mr Tt Taka i Eire You t Fropermles en Aerie a ms os mi z ma Piria arat Li i wre mm La
178. e image See Editing Images Browse Click to call up a file dialog to select a side image file Supported types are as listed in the drop down bmp jpg gif png Top image path Path to the graphics file of the top image To choose a different file click Browse Choose Select a new top image from a chooser of available tops Paint Click to call up a paint program to edit the top image See Editing Images Browse Click to call up a file dialog to select a top image file Note CP car images are special cases in the Images tab Ifa car type has a CP image itis in a file with the same name and path as the top image but with F instead of t at the end If you want to view the large image in Paint make this change in the Top Image box and click Paint But then be sure to click Cancel You do not want either of the paths in this dialog to point to a_F file Collection Tab This tab is for editing properties of the overall collection Car Collection Default Steam Properties Car Type Images Collection Defaut Steam 1930 1960s Steam Ops default collection IC Users Jim App Data Roaming TrainPlayer C Name This can be any name you like but best to keep it short Info Description and author If the collection is of your own creation include some information about it Path Full pathname to the xml file defining the collection You cannot change the path in this dialog Export Copy coll
179. e indicated by r w in the Reference listing in Script Central Example echo The load in box 44 is SCAR x44 Loadname let newhLoad Toy Tractors echo Changing load to newLoad set SCAR x44 Loadname newLoad A local variable is one which is inaccessible outside of a certain limited region of code or scope Normally when a variable is defined and assigned a value itis global it can be referenced by any scripts or actions anywhere But if itis named in a preceding LOCAL statement then it is Known only to the script or subroutine or proc where it is defined Example train SOript 1 let gv a global value local 1v let lv a local value Crain Seripe z echo global value was defined as gv echo value local to script 1 is undefined here lv An excellent discussion with detailed descriptions of each system function can be found on the web in TrainPlayer 6 1 Extensions to the Trainplayer Programming Language TPL Subroutines A subroutine is a named body of code stored in a file outside a script The code can be executed within the script by inserting a CALL statement including the name of the file To pass data into and out of the subroutine one or more arguments may be included in the call Arguments are numbered from left to right in the call and are represented within the Subroutine as placeholders starting with For example wherever the subroutine contains 1 it will be replaced by the first argu
180. e left text box on the right and support many of the same operations such as Click a row in the list and its contents show up in the text box In tabs 1 3 the text can be edited and saved Right click a row in the list and you get a context menu with commands applying to the selected script Double click a row or choose Edit from the context menu to edit in the appropriate editor depending on the script type Click OK or Apply to save changes made to the text These changes are saved with the layout in memory they are not saved permanently until you save the layout Click Cancel to take down the dialog without saving Cancel changes to Done after you have saved any change Note that changing tabs in the dialog saves your changes quietly For details of the individual tabs and their context menus click links above Script Central Reference Tab A compact reference to the scripting language Provides information about commands wait conditions system and local variables See also Script Central Tabs command set direction tof E set direction to 1 Everse Speed lt lt mph gt set speed to giv set direction to reverse decelerate to a TARN TR uncouple at give Applies to the train being Throw lt p gt lt pos gt throw switch to driven by this script Set vars expr gt set variable to v When autopause if in effect a pause i inserted before andor Click a row to see details after this action
181. e more than one unknown load the Load Definition dialog operates in a Wizard like way You edit one item ata time and use Next and Back buttons to browse through the list At the last item Next changes to OK which saves all the changes and dismisses the dialog E 1 Defin T Fir R oad Lenitror nme tot A E This load name is not recognized F i lt EP TE FW Well Car 40 containers spine c cement bulk Choose Load FHE heavy duty fat 12 18 wheeled G Gondola To add this load to your list specify carrier AAR code s GA Drop Bottom C GB Mill solid bottom GBH equipped w bulkhead GE End Dump G5 Gravel GT High Side H Hopper HEA floeners Goirnnce Controls in this dialog Load name not recognized name of the load as entered in the Incoming or Outgoing box lf the name is that of a valid load which you wish to add to the list proceed to the next box If itis a misspelled version of an existing load you can edit to correct the spelling As soon as the name becomes recognizable the text above the box changes to known load and its AAR code is displayed dimmed not editable for a Known load Choose Load button click to bring up the Load Chooser if you want to look for a Known load rather than create a new one The chooser is modal in this case find the load you want double click it or click to select and click OK to return The selected load is shown as Known load with
182. e multiple scripts This can be set or cleared using buttons in this Settings tab If the rewind point is cleared then it reverts to the initial train and switch positions as they were when the layout was opened Dialog Buttons Save the current train and switch positions as the layout s rewind point This overwrites any previously defined point Erase any saved rewind point and replace it with the initial positions when the layout was opened Save the current train and switch positions to a file with extension xml and _ situ appended to the filename Load a saved situation and position the trains and switches accordingly This does not change the layout rewind point Script Central ScriptsTab For viewing and editing train scripts master script and script notes See also Script Central Tabs Script Central Scripts junction Actions Subroutines Reference Settings Welcome to Script Central yg oe eR REE meena This version of the Tremont script 1 on train Clare Main script for passenger Ic Cambridge has a set of scripts for master script Master script on layout Tre running the Clarendon Local along ita route At each stop a Junction Action takes control of the train pulls it into the station waits While passengers exchange then pulls it out again and turns it back over to the main script Click to view a script double click to edit To watch the action 1 Use View Schedule
183. e things It s a form of computer programming is what it really is Possibly you have done some of this in the past possibly not but if you are a railroader and a do it yourselfer you will probably enjoy tinkering with it You can actually get started without doing any programming at all just use the script record playback machinery to create and run scripts For more see How to Get Started in Scripting There are several types of script different in how they are connected to the layout and how activated Types are Train Script a script attached to an engine designed to drive a train through a series of moves Junction Action a script attached to a track junction activated when a given car or train goes across Master Script a script attached to a layout designed to run automatically when the layout is opened Subroutine a batch of script language designed to be called and executed from within other scripts Proc a Subroutine stored notin a file but between special delimiters inside another script For more about these types and procedures for handling them see Working With Scripts Some layouts have multiple scripts of various types To manage and keep track of all of them use the handy new tabbed dialog called Script Central This dialog gives you a way to browse through scripts and subroutines not just examining but also editing deleting and setting properties Scripting also involves a collection of menus dialogs toolbars and
184. e view Schedule manually via scrollbars or hand drag Control Panel Switch Window e Loco Sounds toggles steam chuff sounds on or off When loco sounds are enabled you hear speed dependent chuffs as the selected train moves Train Tree s oo k wf status Bar Toolbars FA Main tools Train tools Track tools e Background Hl toggles the display of the background image with the image off you can clearly see the track Whenever you turn off the background track display is turned on Car tool _ _ This and the other items in this section also affect printing and export image Use View commands to get the screen looking the way you want before printing Script tools Customize o Tracks k toggles the display of the track Normally track display is off because the lines in the image serve the same purpose o Grid 4 toggles the display of the grid This is normally not displayed unless you re curious about the fit between the program and the drawing e Trains toggles the display of all trains new in 3 1 Trains continue to move when they are not on view e Rails kA toggles the display of double rail new in 3 1 not shown at left See details below Here is an example of a plan with the background off tracks and grid on e Clock toggles display of the Clock The first time you bring up the clock the schedule window automatically comes up too
185. e way of changing the layer of a scenery object is to use the Foreground checkbox in General Scenery Properties Editing Scenery Properties In case you don t want all your scenery objects to be plain Load Bitmap yellow you will need to learn about the Scenery Properties dialog This is a dialog with four tabs used to modify the b Cut Ctrl x properties of one or more objects Each tab has its own help Chio Cirle page linked from the Help button on each tab For general Delete Delete info see Scenery Properties for detailed instructions on each tab see Select All Ctrl A Properties e General Scenery Properties e Background Scenery Properties e Line Scenery Properties e TextScenery Properties The easy way to bring up the appropriate page Is to click the Help button on the dialog The Scenery Properties dialog has a preview pane showing a Eei picture of the selected object s with changes as they are being cees pactgound ine tex applied The changes do not affect the objects on the layout Maia Ricci until you click OK or Apply size eal i E B16 To change the properties of one or more objects 1 Select the object s 2 Right click a selected object and choose Properties as shown above This brings up the Scenery Properties dialog 3 Change values in the dialog as desired Refer to the above helo pages for details A sample drawing of the object s shows how the changes will
186. earance of the id display can be customized You can set font and background color in Train Preferences To turn id s on or off for specific cars 1 Right click a car and choose Show Car ID This displays the id on the selected car and turns on the master Switch if necessary so you can see it If the id is already showing the command changes to Hide Car ID Choose that to turn off the id 2 To toggle id s for an entire train right click any car of the train and choose Train gt Show Car IDs This changes to Train gt Hide Car IDs if any car in the train is displaying an id To turn all car id s on or off master switch 1 Choose View gt Car IDs from the main menu This is a toggle If some id s are already showing choose this command to turn them off Choose it again to turn them back on This item is checkmarked on the menu so you can tell if the switch is on or off If you have not yet turned on id s for any cars or trains then as a convenience View gt Car IDs turns them on for all cars on the layout Car Collection Editors The Car Collection Editor is for viewing and editing properties of car types within a collection Also described on this page are the related dialogs Load Collection Editor and AAR Car Types To bring up the Car Collection Editor a click the Collection button in Car Properties or b in the Car Chooser right click a collection in the tree and choose Properties This dialog has three or four tabs O
187. ection data to output directory and prepare for publication see Car Collection Publisher Load Tab This tab gives properties of the default load for the car type and access to adjustable parameters having to do with how loads sit in this type of car Most of these parameters are new in Version 6 0 and are intended for experts to fine tune their loaded cars These settings take effect immediately on the car images so you can fool with them to see what effect they have then Cancel if you did not intend to make changes i a eres Car Type Images Collection Load drop center flat Default Load bulldozer Chooser Display Length FM GB FW FD SE Show load as text l Draw load in front Floor Height 0 oo fr Insets images car type name Default Load Chooser Load AAR Closed Car indicator Display Length Show load as text Draw load in front Floor Height Insets units arrows Layout inches Resizable car panel showing side and top views Name duplicated from Car Type tab Name of load to fill this car by default if no other has been defined Drop down gives list of load names suitable for this car type Click to bring up Load Chooser where you can choose a new default load graphically instead of by name List of AAR codes indicating cars which can accept this load this duplicates what Is seen in the Load Chooser A text label Closed Car appears above the display frame
188. ection is nota folder See Creating a New Collection Properties List Menu Add Car Add Car Add selected car to layout Side Views Side Views Display icons of side views Top Views Top Views Display icons of top views List View List View Show contents in list form List includes name class AAR code date Properties Display and edit car type properties Properties Creating a New Car Collection Here s how you can create a new car collection if you have a set of side and top images For more information see Car Collections 1 Collect or prepare the set of images You will need at least a side view for each car type for top views you can create your own or choose from among the ones you already have Many side view Icons of the correct size are available as gif files for download from various web sites 2 Gather the image files into a folder named as you want to name the collection If you have created car top images you need to make sure their files are named correctly In the example below we have prepared a folder of images called My Cars EA Lom PALSU AMAIE Re Pipe Misc J Mac Lik Alstrom A352 t bmp D My Cars J My z E Alstrom A35 1 bmp viy Layouts mid A Alstrom A35 1_t bmp Four T we Gb Baldwin AS616 GIF ee _ 4d Baldwin AS616_t bmp a i e E Rslchaisen POTH 3 Point to a folder in the tree where you want the new collection to appear This must be a folder not a car collection I
189. ecute it then return and continue at the next statement Procs Use Proc to define a small subroutine within a script goto nextPart jump to statement nextPart call Sitandwait 10 call subroutine sitandwait txt and pass one argument If Statement An IF statement takes the form it vali comp op valz code block 1 else code block 2 endif where val1 and val2 are string or numeric values variables or expressions and comp op IS a comparison operator one of The two values are compared using the given operator if the result is TRUE then code block 1 is executed if FALSE code block 1 is skipped and control passes to the optional code block 2 or if none to the statement after the endif Let nCars Strain trainl length create a variable and assign value from a system function if ncars lt 10 echo short train compare value to literal if true output this text else echo long train if comparison is false output alternate text instead endif While statement A while statement defines a loop Ittakes a form similar to IF while vall comp op valz code block endwhile where the code block executes once every time the comparison expression evaluates to TRUE if itis FALSE the code block is skipped and control passes to the statement after the endwhile let i l create variable and initialize while 1i lt 10 compare variable to literal if true go to next statement echo Line i letis i
190. ed 20 throw J36 1 at J37 stop except yours will of course have appropriate junction numbers for your layout 4 Click Apply to save the code 5 In the Script Editor click Rewind This highlights the first line of the script and moves the train to its starting position if necessary 6 Click Play Off goes your train until it gets to the destination then It stops A couple of shortcuts 1 When the Script Editor is up on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the next line in the text box right click a junction on the layout and you geta little menu of commands Insert Throw Here In The first adds a Throw statement which causes the switch to go to Its current position 2 You can copy code to the Windows Clipboard and paste it into the Script Editor In case you prefer to do your editing in Notepad or elsewhere 5 J oin the Scripters Forum You will surely come up with questions The best place to go for answers is our panel of experts 6 Become an expert Script your layout or do one of ours send us the result and we ll post it for others to enjoy To inquire send e mail TrainPlayer Programming Language v 6 1 The vocabulary and grammar you use to write scripts is called TrainP layer Programming Language or TPL It recognizes a given list of commands and keywords some related to trains such as setting speed and direction and some standard programming constructs like loops ifs and branches It allows you to cre
191. ed below Text window Text is not editable It wraps to fit the box Context menu Refresh Rebuilds list and updates variable entries to latest values Script Editor The Script Editor is a dialog for developing train scripts and watching them in action It provides an editable text box with special features for script development along with player buttons for playing stopping recording and rewinding the script As the script executes the active line is highlighted in the text box so you can follow along with the action To bring up a Script Editor a select a train and choose Train gt Script gt Edit from the menu b click the Edit Script button on the Scripts toolbar c double click a train script entry in the Scripts tab of Script Central Each train script has its own Script Editor window If you have multiple scripts on your layout you can have multiple windows showing the different actions in each The dialog is modeless so it remains up as you run the layout If there are multiple train scripts on the layout then the buttons in each Script Editor work differently from the corresponding ones on the Script Toolbar In the latter Play Stop and Rewind apply to all scripts at once in the Script Editor buttons apply only to the script in the window restart torward Arlington Yard to Clarendon throw 154 throw 11 1 throw 118 0 throw 31 1 peed 2U For all use toolbar Dialog controls
192. ed on its own page General Background Line Text scenery Properties General Background Line Text Rectangle 1D 2 M Foreground Rotation 10 degrees Hide track amp trains The Scenery Properties dialog is modeless it does not have to be taken down while you work on the layout If you change properties in the dialog and click OK changes are immediately applied to the selected scenery on the layout If you modify the selected scenery on the layout changes are reflected in the dialog Scenery Styles The Scenery Styles dialog is used for setting default styles those which are applied automatically to newly created objects or applied manually by using the Painter tool This dialog has three tabs so similar to the tabs in Properties that they are documented on the same pages see Background Line Text Background line Text m Fill C No Fill f Stretch C Tile Transparency Lock proportions The Scenery Styles dialog is modal you must click OK or Cancel before you can go back to working on the layout The Defaults button resets the current tab back to factory default values Changes you make in Scenery Styles do not cause any visible change on the layout or to selected scenery objects To bring up Scenery Styles click on one of the little down pointing arrows on the toolbar There is one next to the Line P olygon tool one next to Text and one next to Pa
193. ed when you bring up the Layout Chooser e Carclass names translated to British terms This choice is available in Train Preferences and in the AAR Car Types dialog Whether you are British or not you will benefit from other features of 5 1 e Folder download Now you can click a folder in any web chooser tree and download the entire thing at once including subfolders Or you can choose to download only those items you do not yet have on your local machine e Improved car descriptions Tooltips and dialogs are now more consistent in displaying car type and car class names See the updated definitions under About Cars e Improved handling of car and scenery errors f you open a layout requiring external cars or scenery the alert dialog is now more sensible and more useful and now includes a page of help e Plenty of bug fixes and small improvements e Internal work related to Mac development and change of web host For a complete list of what has changed see the Readme What Was New in 5 0 Modular Railroading Version 5 brings you the ability to create exposition size layouts the same way they do at the train shows by hooking together pre built modular units Choose from our large collection of modules and module templates or build your own then snap them together on a virtual show floor in your choice of arrangements One click turns the assembly into a fully connected modular layout ready to run There is a whole new chapt
194. ee Kinds of snap e To angle applies when you are creating a new switch Restricts the switch angle to one of up to four choices Refer to the diagram above After you have drawn section AC and want to create a switch at B angle snap takes effect when you press atB and drag toward D but not if you drag from D toward B As you drag when the angle DBC gets close to one of the predefined values it Snaps to that angle Switch angles are given not in degrees or radians but as integers The integer indicates the slope or ratio of rise over run between diverging tracks For example at a 4 switch the tracks are one unit apart at a distance of four units from the frog e TO parallel applies when you are creating a new switch in the vicinity of another Restricts the distance between parallel tracks to a Specific value Parallel snap is designed for creating ladder tracks such as those shown in the diagram above Once you have drawn the base section and the branch you create each ladder track by pressing on the branch and dragging away from it When parallel snap is in effect the starting endpoint of a new track is not exactly where you press but snapped to a nearby point such that the distance between the new track and its neighbor is a fixed value default is 2 in HO e TO radius applies when you are creating a circle Restricts the radius to one of up to four choices When you are using the Circle tool and dragging without the shift
195. eed and you have some artistic ability you can create your own or you can ask one of the friendly guys on the forum to make a custom set of cars for you With the introduction of Ops freight cars have become more capable They can carry loads Each car is assigned a detailed classification which determines what sorts of load it can carry which in turn determines what sorts of industry itcan serve The loads themselves are objects much like cars organized in downloadable collections About Cars Car Collections Default Car Sets Car Loads Car Properties Car Collection Editors The Car Inventory Bar About Cars There are some terms you need to know when working with cars To understand them consider this scenario You need some cars to carry grain on your prairie railroad You go to your big box hobby shop wander the aisles until you find one called Steam Era Freight Cars and locate a shelf called Grain Cars and Hoppers You pick out a nice model of a 2 bay open side covered hopper in Great Northern colors In TrainPlayer terms a car built from this kit would be described as Car collection Steam Era Freight Car class covered hopper Generic class hopper Car type GN 70 ton 2 bay open side covered hopper The car type is the name on the box a particular model from a manufacturer The car class is a code from an industry wide list indicating what the car is used for or can carry The car collection is a group o
196. eee Se Filename MyModularLayout rrw Save as type Layout Files rrw A Demo li Featured Lay d Layouts10l dJi Modules d Premium di Standard Building a Modular Layout This section describes the basic steps for building a layout from modules and gives information about how the process works How to Create a Modular Layout Creating a modular layout involves three basic steps 1 Prepare modules f you are a member of a club and you have your own module spend a pleasant evening working up a TrainP layer version of itto add to your collection of modules If not you can skip this Step and choose modules from our large and growing collections of templates and samples 2 Assemble Bring up the Module Manager introduce modules one ata time and arrange them in chains loops or more complex patterns It s fun and easy Arrangement is done by drag and drop and the program takes care of aligning and snapping the modules together so they will hook up correctly 3 Fuse This is the easiest step for you just click OK The Module Manager does the work loads in each module positions it and fuses it to its neighbors by adding short sections of track The result is a finished layout ready to add trains and run If you re interested in the details of this process see the next section Once you have created a modular layout you can save It to a file as with any other layout However It is not fully self contained so you need
197. elect A Chie Properties To stop or start animation select the Scenery Edit tool right click the image and choose Stop Animation or Start Animation as shown gt Once you start an object moving it keeps going until you stop it or until a trigger event causes it to stop If you save the layout while the object is animating it will come back that way the next time you open the layout To set object properties select right click and choose Properties Most properties of standard scenery objects apply to animated ones To trigger animation on train moves see the following section Animated Image Properties To view or adjust properties of an animated image right click on it using the Scenery Edit tool and choose Properties The Scenery Properties dialog appears showing the new Animation tab E i SP 9 Type Animated gif file Frames 7 Playing Play once Rewind after play This dialog is modeless it remains up while you work on the layout You can select different objects on the layout and adjust their properties one ata time or shift click to select multiple objects and set all their common properties at once Controls on the Animation tab Type Animated gif file vs Image series anm file This is read only you can t change the type in this dialog Frames number of frames in the animation Read only Frames button click to bring up the Frames dialog showing filenames and durations in a little
198. elow regarding text sizes Note in the current version not all features in the Font dialog are working For example choosing Strikeout or Underline has no effect Color colored J button to bring up the Colors dialog Choose or adjust the color using either tab of the dialog Align Choose Left Center or Right to position the text horizontally within the box Rotate text with image Wrap Text Specifies how to handle text in a rotated object If this box is checked text is rotated to the same orientation as the object as if it were painted on the rooftop this is shown in the picture above If the box is unchecked text is displayed horizontally regardless of whether the object is rotated like a label on a map This option applies only to single line text Wrapped text cannot be rotated Check this box if you want the text to be displayed on multiple lines wrapped to fit within the box This option is incompatible with text rotation If you choose to wrap text the text will be displayed horizontally When Wrap Text is on you can manually enter a carriage return into a text block by entering the characters n backslash n This will cause a break between lines at the indicated point For example this would give a two line note Line one nline two Scenery Preferences Settings for scenery options Called from menu command File gt Preferences In Scenery Preferences
199. emium folders unless you purchased the full package If you are bothered by this try Helo gt Purchase Upgrade We are constantly updating and enhancing the web collections so check back once in a while to see what s new Search f you are looking for a particular file use Find and Find Next on the tree context menu Right click a folder to search through It and its subfolders to search all select the topmost tree item choose Find and enter all or part of an item name or path Ifa match is found itis selected in the list window If there is more than one match Find Next goes to the next one Sort Items in the list window can be sorted on any column when the window Is in list not icon view To sort click the header of a column To sortin the reverse direction click the header again What s New Each web chooser includes a folder called What s New This shows items which have been posted on the web since a certain date or within a certain period before today You can adjust the cutoff criteria right click the What s New Folder and choose Settings The dialog is self explanatory 1 9 TrainPlayer Web Collections B Layouts Richmond 0 Demo PhiipRandolphStation Ee 49 Standard fe 37 bee if 9 101 Track Plans fe jo H Premium mi ees J Featured Layouts What s New folder shows items ae fee What s New W Less than 130 days old Ej a C Newsince 9 10 09 The settings in this dialog
200. en 1 and 9 selected from the drop down Note The designation N means an angle which deviates from linear by one partinN Ona calculator the angle is the arctangent of 1 N For example a 4 angle is 14 04 degrees 1 is 45 degrees Angle snap choices are disregarded unless To Angle is checked This allows you to turn the feature on and off without losing your preferred set of snap angles An alternative to the To Angle check box is the toggle Snap On Off on the Track context menu To parallel To radius Units Applies in similar situation as angle snap with one additional condition the switch you are creating must be within a certain distance of an adjacent switch This distance is setin the edit box to the right Refer to the right diagram below When parallel snap Is in effect and you start to draw anywhere near B the starting point snaps to exactly B where the distance to the neighboring track is as specified default is 2 in HO After the starting point snaps into place then angle snap will Kick in as you drag so that the track at B remains parallel to its neighbor Sometimes parallel snap can prevent you from creating a switch at a desired place When this happens hold down the Shift key as you begin to draw so you can place the endpoint where you want then release Shift as you continue to drag so angle snap will take effect Applies when you are modifying the radius of a circle drawing a new circle with the
201. en the layout from the Layouts101 folder in the Layout Chooser 2 Use View gt Windows gt Schedule Window to bring up the window which shows script text output Right click and make sure Show Script Output is checked 3 View gt Windows gt Script Central This tabbed dialog shows all the scripts connected to the layout Take a minute to browse through and look at them If you have plenty of screen space you should leave Script Central up while you watch the action if not take it down after the next step 4 Double click Script 1 in the Scripts tab This opens the train script in the Script Editor This dialog has the feature that it shows highlights as script lines execute to give you a dynamic picture of what the script is doing 5 Use View gt Toolbars gt Script Toolbar if necessary 6 Position all these windows so they don t obscure the layout too much good luck then 7 Click the Play button on the toolbar The train starts to move and so does the script Script comments and messages are echoed to the schedule window to keep you informed as the scripts run With luck the train will run all the way around the layout making three stops then wait a bit and start over And you will have gotten a reasonable idea of what a script can do 2 Record a script You can create a script without doing any programming or having any knowledge of the script language just press Record and let the program generate a script as you operate
202. enced track layer draws these items first 4 Draw straight track and switches Drawing straight track is easy you just trace over the lines on the image with a series of connected line segments Switches are created automatically whenever three or more segments come together Add special features Most layouts have sections of track hidden in tunnels or underneath the layout You can mark these sections in TrackLayer so that when trains pass over them they appear hidden Or you can mark a section of track as tunnel so that a train entering at one end immediately emerges at the other Debug TrackLayer provides tools for checking your work Diagnostics can spot overlapping junctions zero length tracks and other problems so that you can fix them before anyone derails Annotate and save Give the layout a name add descriptive or historical comments and credit to the designer then save the file and you re ready to run Add trains and enjoy Actually you can add trains at any point during the building process and drive them over whatever track is available TrackLayer Tutorial The Rockport amp Oyster Bay This tutorial takes you through the steps of preparing a layout for TrainP layer use starting with a background image file We ve chosen a simple one the Rockport amp Oyster Bay layout 21 in the 107 Track Plans collection If you have the complete collection you can start with the tpg file you already h
203. entral and lots more See the fully rewritten chapter on Scripting Doubly detailed car images New collections of cars with crisp images twice the size of the old ones See 50 P ixel Cars Dynamic resizing of car and train images on car and train bars now with snap to fit features See Control Bar Settings Improved choosing of car collections with enhancements to the car bar See Car Inventory Menu Improved handling of freight load images See the new Load tab in the car collection editor Car panels dynamic resizing of car images of all size categories See Car Panels Car notes attach a string of data to a car for use as you require See Car Notes Many fixes and enhancements Revert to Saved improved car and track id s fixes in coupling and uncoupling read only flag for layouts the Note Window small fixes and crash preventions too numerous to list What Was New in 5 3 Control Bars Two old toolbars for building and running trains are gone replaced by a pair of stylish new bars with advanced capabilities the Train Control Bar a combination control panel and train window for running and viewing the selected train and the Car Inventory Bar a gallery of cars you can choose from when building trains Both are docking windows you can move customize or resize in any direction to display large Chris Pedersen car images Built in Ties amp Roadbed In 5 3 ties and roadbed are no longer objects on the layout but t
204. equired to finish the job The overall process of building a modular layout is a matter of marching down the list of modules fusing each to the next closing loops when necessary Building a Module The general procedure for constructing your own virtual module is the same as for building any layout in TrackLayer You can start from scratch draw your track plan and carefully make sure it conforms to specs Or you can take an easier and more reliable approach start from a preconfigured plan or template and modify to suit This is the method our artists used to create the scenic layouts already available Module Starting Points e From an existing physical module Ifyou already have a real module you take to shows to work with it in Module Manager you will need to construct a virtual replica of it using TrackLayer First you will need to convey the track plan to electronic media for example by taking a scan of an overhead photo then trace over it applying track This process is described in the Getting Started chapter of the TrackLayer manual The procedure is the same whether you are creating a module or a regular stand alone layout e From a sample plan We provide a generous collection of NTrak and HO sample modules some just track plans others with structures and scenery The set you get installed with the product is small the rest are found in the Web tab of your Layout Chooser under the Modules folder You can add or remove track
205. er Use Tools gt Ops gt Rewind or the toolbar button This moves trains back to their Starting positions where they were when the switchlist was generated and resets the Done column so you are ready to work the same switchlist again e Toss the switchlist and try a different one Use Tools gt Ops gt Generate Ops to create a new switchlist This destroys the previous one The challenge of Ops is to learn how to work a switchlist efficiently with a minimum of couplings and uncouplings and loco fuel At present the program does not have a move counter or scoring function so you can rate your work but this is planned for future Waypbills A waybill is an order issued by an industry telling the railroad it has goods to ship or receive Each waybill represents one delivery specified by a type of load a Shipper and a receiver In the real world it might also have a quantity or frequency 5 carloads per day but in TrainPlayer each waybill refers to single car load For example here is a typical TrainP layer waybill TrainPlayer Ops heal WAYBILL CAR TYPES Interchange RECVR Offline FROM GSW Inc SHPR Tool and Die Maker CONTENTS tools Both shipper and receiver are given by industry name and location The load is given along with the car type s Suitable for carrying It determined from the program s database and listed by AAR code Each waybill is assigned a unique number for identification purposes In this ex
206. er of the manual on the subject see Modular Railroading See also What s New Since 4 0 What s New Since 3 0 Choosers A chooser is dialog used to select layouts cars scenery or sounds Ml uE Ap C ee The San Jose Central Shady Grove amp Shenill The St Paul Central A chooser has three panels a tree control left a list box center and a preview window right In general what you do is click a folder in the tree to see its contents in the list click an Item in the list to see its preview then double click to open tt Each chooser has two tabs one for local content on your disk the other for content available by download from the web As long as you have an internet connection when you Select an item from the web tab it downloads and becomes part of your local content How choosers work has evolved over time Many changes to the content and operation were made in Version 3 3 1 The description below describes the current system with notes indicating how it differs from earlier versions Instructions in this section are for all choosers For details specific to each type see the individual help pages Layout Chooser Layout Web Chooser Car Chooser Car Web Chooser Sound Chooser Sound Web Chooser Scenery Chooser Scenery Web Chooser Contents of a Chooser In general the files you see in the local tab of a chooser are those in the corresponding folder and subfolders in your TrainPlayer application data direc
207. er time Interchanges An interchange is a length of track where cars are exchanged with another railroad If a model railroad covers some region then the interchange Is the place where that region connects by rail with the outside world Itis usually a length of track sufficient to hold several cars ending in a stub often near the outer edge of the layout The interchange is an important component in ops When an industry on the layout ships out goods they are usually destined for some market out beyond the layout area otherwise they would be shipped by truck Your job as the operator of the local railroad is to set them out on the interchange where someone else s long distance hauler will pick them up and get them to market On a model railroad there is probably no other railroad it s likely nobody is actually going to come by and pick up the cars you set out and the interchange is basically symbolic Put cars there and your job is done Come back the next day and find returned empties or incoming loads to be delivered locally What happens in between Is up to your imagination Yard Style Stations Both yards and interchanges are examples of a new type of station called yard style Yard style stations differ from normal stations in both the method of creation and the behavior of arrivals and departures A normal station is created by dragging a rectangle over one or more sections of track The resulting rectangle defines the st
208. erchange and at some of the industry spots Then what We have industries to ship and receive goods and cars to carry them and we re ready for Some work orders The next step is to Generate Ops as explained in How To Use Ops How To Use Ops Before you can operate a layout it needs to be equipped with stations industries and freight cars The fastest way to get started is to use one of the hundreds of layouts already equipped as described in Quick Start The next fastest is to let the program create you a random setup using the Ops Setup Wizard as described in Slightly Less Quick Start Or in the likely event you are a do it yourselfer there is Manual Setup Once the layout is ready for ops then each time you are ready for a new session just click Generate Ops on the Ops Toolbar This generates a new switchlist displays it in the ops windows and turns on color coding and car labels for the stations and cars involved Your job is then to carry out the moves as described in How to Work a Switchlist Ops Quick Start 1 Open a layout ready for ops You can find one in your web chooser by looking for Y in the Ops column at the right Cf 44 Rockport amp South Fork L 5X7 03 i Cf 46 Jordan Valley RR 12x 03 08 2011 09 51 42 AZ Layouts 10 E 47 Cero Azul AR 5X12 Layout 03 08 2011 09 51 42 EEL Premium O 47 Cero Azul RR with script 5X12 03 08 2011 09 51 42 H Featured Layouts C 49 Wirginia amp
209. ere text switchlist instructions are displayed after an ops generation During an ops session you may want to turn off arrival and departure and script messages so the switchlist data doesn t scroll away Like the clock window the schedule window is dockable and resizable Our preference is to put the two side by side at the bottom of the screen then adjust the divider between them until the clock window becomes square like this e a Sratran Sireer y i Ez mk Tr South Newark To show or hide the Schedule Window choose View Schedule To clear the window right click in the window choose Clear All To copy the window contents to other programs press and drag within the window to select the text you want to copy then right click and choose Copy The selected text is copied to the Windows Clipboard It can be pasted into Notepad Microsoft Word or any other program which accepts text To control the output the context menu includes two checkmark items to specify what you want to see in the window Show Stations and Show Script Output Check or uncheck the type s of data you want sS Customizing r There are many ways to adjust the look and feel of TrainP layer Some have been covered in other chapters this one describes the rest Operation Preferences Switch Preferences General Preferences Track Preferences Train Preferences Style Preferences Road Preferences Customizing Toolbars The
210. es Rectangle 1D 2 W Foreground Size jea x i220 Location fasi x jess Units RRU Rotation 0 degrees Hide track amp trains This dialog sets general properties of a scenery object If multiple objects are selected the dialog displays for values which differ among the objects any change you make applies to all Most of the values in this dialog are normally adjusted by moving the object on the layout rather than entering numeric values but both are possible Dialog controls Name of the object This is a program generated name consisting of the object s type and its ID It cannot be changed Name Foreground Check this box to move the scenery object into the foreground layer Uncheck to move to the background Size Location Units Rotation Hide track amp trains Height and width of the unrotated object s rectangular bounds in units chosen from the drop down menu You can enter a new value in either box to change the dimensions of the object Coordinates of the upper left corner of the unrotated object relative to the upper left corner of the layout You can enter new values to change the object s position on the layout Units are as chosen from the drop down Specifies units of length for display and entry of size and location values Any choice you make here will apply in similar Units menus throughout the program Angle in degrees by which the object is rotated clockwise from normal E
211. esize multiple objects if you want to change the size or shape of several objects at once you must first group them as described below Rotating D If an object is selected lt gt O e To rotate the selected object point to the upper right b corner of the object cursor changes to a circle and drag The object will rotate around its center Once the object has been rotated these instructions may not be strictly correct because the draggable corner may no longer be in the upper right e To rotate several objects the way to rotate more than one object at a time is to group them as described below A grouped object can be rotated the same way as any other single object The picture above shows rotating a grouped object An alternative way of rotating an object is to type an angle into the properties dialog see Editing Properties below Flipping If you find a right handed widget in the scenery catalog but you need a left handed one you can flip it 1 Use the Scenery Edit tool 2 Right click an object and choose Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical Load Bitmap Cut Ctrl x Es Copy Ctrl C Delete Delete Select All Ctrl A Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Properties The object is inverted across the appropriate axis If multiple objects are selected each flips on its own individual axis but if they are grouped the flip is on the group s axis Flipping an object with a non zero angle of rotation wi
212. etween the center of the Switch and the open closed light Size of highlight square in arbitrary units Check to allow a train to pass through a closed Switch If this box is unchecked then when a train attempts to enter a switch from a closed track i e pass through a red light it collides bounces or crashes depending on the collision mode see Operation Auto throw Random throw Switch Window Background Show Next Switch A stronger version of Barrel Through allows a train to pass through a closed switch then changes the Switch to match the route taken This is the default and allows for easy if non realistic operation the train meanders the layout setting switches to follow the route as It goes Check to have a random switch thrown every so often where the time between throws Is set in the number box to the right This is a way to vary the route if you just want to let the trains run Click to set the background color of the Switch Window Check to have the window redrawn every time the train moves across a Switch so itis always showing the next switch coming up along the route Uncheck if you prefer to operate the window manually In either case click a switch on the layout to reposition the window around that area General Preferences Various program settings Called from menu command File gt Preferences Preferences Options IY Layout sounds Running sounds Mouse wheel zoom I
213. f car types related by era class manufacturer etc The generic class is a program assigned category as described below When you add a car to your layout you start by choosing a car type from a collection and the program adds a car of that type on your track You can then modify this car repaint it change its size but you can t change its type You can however modify the collection and change the car type definition so next time you add a car of this type it will have the style you want Generic Car Classes Every car you add to a layout is assigned one of twelve generic classes Diesel Steam Tender Pullman Baggage Reefer Hopper Gondola Boxcar Tankcar Flatcar Caboose This is partly for historical reasons and partly because we have only these twelve icons on the car toolbar A car s generic class determines certain aspects of its behavior e Diesel and Steam are the only classes which have motive power If you want a car to move when you hit the throttle make sure it is classified as one of these even if it is an electric trolley mule drawn wagon handcar etc e Freight types are the six from Reefer through F latcar Passenger types are Pullman and Baggage e Only freight types are loadable You cannot attach load types to engines cabooses or currently passenger cars When you add a car using the car toolbar you are choosing a generic class The actual car type you get is whichever member of the current Default Car
214. f multiple sections are selected the ID field displays a list of id s the type field a mixture of types if applicable Length of track section with radius if curve For multiple selections no value is shown unless it is the same for all selected sections Units of length and radius Changes to this combo affect Units combos in other dialogs Type On Hidden Track Overrides Track section type normal hidden or tunnel You can see and change the type of the selected section S here in this dialog alternatively use Hidden or Tunnel commands on the Track context menu If Hidden is chosen as the track type then this radio Specifies how cars are to be displayed as they go over the hidden track a outlined thin black lines outline the car tops b invisible cars are completely hidden c visible cars are drawn normally The choices in this box override the default values set in Track Preferences Here you can specify display style and color for just the selected section s regardless of what preferences are set as default Untouchable marks the selected section as inert so it cannot be modified by any track tools This can also be set using the Untouchable command on the Track context menu To restore an untouchable track to normal use the checkbox In this dialog to restore the selected track or choose All Retouchable from the context menu to restore a untouchable track Customize Commands For arrangi
215. g bring up the editor as above or edit using Script Central ie a E Deleting use Script Central or see note Playing back the script starts running when the triggering event occurs when the center of a specified car passes across the junction in a specified direction The action script attaches itself to the crossing train runs to completion then detaches Notes regarding triggering of junction actions e To prevent an action from triggering mark it as disabled using either Script Central or the J unction Action Editor e By default a junction action does not trigger when you drag a train across by hand you must drive using the throttle This behavior can be changed in the Settings tab of Script Central e An action will not trigger if it is already running from a previous triggering If one train starts an action other trains crossing the junction are ignored until the action completes Working with the Master Script The master script is a special script attached to a layout designed to run automatically when the Scripts Junction Actives Sae F layout is opened There is only one master script per layout It can serve to initialize variables 3 provide information to the user or start trains or scripts into action ta Edit in Script Editor Creating use Add Master Script on the context menu in Script Central as shown at Delete right Brings up the Script Editor creating a new empty master script
216. g and drop To build a modular layout you introduce modules by dragging them in from other windows Layout Chooser or Windows Explorer then you rearrange or delete them by dragging or change the sequence by moving rows up and down in a list Once you have an assembly you like click OK and the program automatically creates the full modular layout It reads in the track and scenery of each module positions them according to your assembly automatically adds little track sections between modules and presents you with a complete layout ready to add trains and run Tour of the Module Manager The Module Manager is a resizable dialog with several components as shown in this annotated screen shot amp Module Manager corner module Straight modules front track m selected module i N No Name Size N _ Branch Filename ____ p Module NTrak 6 foot 2 2X6 NT6 2 rrw a i ionii NTrak 4 foot 1 2x4 NT Lirrw Nirak 4 foot corner 4X4 4ft Corner rrw Nirak 4 foot 2 2x4 NT 4 2 rrw remove selected module list move selected zoom controls advanced settings The upper half of the dialog is the workspace where modules are schematically displayed and manipulated The workspace starts out empty this example shows an assembly in progress with three straight modules and one corner module
217. g scale and take a Scale HG Sharp Curves minute to enter a name and a few comments describing the layout 9 Save the file Size 3 9 a 59 7 Layout inches a The file you started with was an image jpg bmp gif etc but once you ve set up the grid you have a layout and must save itas a TrainP layer rrw file Once the grid is adjusted you can use View Grid HE to turn it off and forget about it What if there is no grid on the diagram If your image does not have grid lines you will need to set up the program grid by some other criterion e If you know the overall size of the layout set the origin at the upper left and drag until the number of grid lines matches the dimensions you want For example if your image represents a 10 x 6 layout adjust until the first grid line is at the left the tenth at the right and there are nine in between for a total width of ten feet If your image is drawn to scale and based on a square grid then the height should take care of itself and come out to six feet e If you know the horizontal or vertical distance between two points on the layout adjust the grid spacing so it matches that distance For example if your picture shows a doorway you know to be 3 wide adjust the grid so that three squares just fit the doorway or six in N scale etc The placement of the grid doesn t matter the separation between grid lines is the important thing And even that Is not terribly c
218. ge to see information about it right click to view and edit properties If you do not see a tooltip check that Tools gt Show Tooltips is on and click the window to make sure it has focus Selection TCB click a car to select it Its image becomes underlined the uncoupling pin moves to the clicked point The car becomes selected on the layout and highlighted with a pink X CIB click a car type to select it in the Car Types listbox Double click to add a car of that type to the selected train Scrolling a standard scrollbar appears beneath the train or collection when it is too long to fit in the window Scrolling to the right moves toward the front of the train Menu a down arrow button at the right end of the scrollbar brings up a menu In the TCB this is the Train Menu a pictorial list of trains on the layout used to select a train described below In the CIB the down arrow brings up the Car Inventory Menu described on the Car Inventory Bar page Train Menu The Train Menu shows a list of all trains on the layout and allows you to select one by clicking it just like any other menu except that it shows pictures and the display can be customized Train Menu Settings Train Bar Settings At the top of the menu above the list of trains are two text commands Train Menu Settings Settings for displaying trains in the menu see Train Menu Train Bar Settings Settings for car image sizing see below T
219. goods you can add to your layout A subset of these is delivered to your disk when you install the program Many more are available on the web easily downloaded with a few clicks About the Scenery Chooser Like the other Chooser dialogs the Scenery Chooser is a resizable three panel dialog with a tree on the left a list in the middle and a preview panel on the right There are two tabs one for local scenery Stored on your disk the other for scenery on the web See also Scenery Chooser The Scenery Chooser is modeless so you can work on the layout without taking it down It offers an easy drag and drop mechanism for adding scenery objects to the layout Navigate through the collections using the tree find what you want drag it onto the layout and adjust its size and location to sult oo Oo To call up the Scenery Chooser click the last tool in the Scenery Toolbar EJ or use the menu command Tools gt Scenery gt View Scenery Chooser Using the Chooser To add scenery to your layout 1 Selectthe layer you want to work in using Edit Foreground 9 or Edit Background smal Added objects will go in this layer 2 Click the Scenery Chooser tool E3 or select Tools gt Scenery gt View Scenery Chooser from the menu This brings up the Scenery Chooser 3 Click a folder in the tree to see its contents in the middle pane 4 Point to the object you want press the mouse button drag to a location on the layout
220. gram Switches in the track provide a choice of travel directions for a train going through a junction it can go straight across on the main line or make a 90 degree turn into a branch another chain of modules This picture shows a Junction module with all its connection points hooked up J unction modules allow a variety of show floor arrangements Without them you can set up only chains and loops Using junctions you can create spidery patterns with multiple loops and chains all connected Scenic Modules Each module is a TrainP layer layout so it can be decorated in the usual ways by adding a bitmap background or by adding scenery with the Scenery Toolkit When a module is fused into a layout any scenery objects it has are carried along with it If ithas a bitmap background on fusing this is converted to a rectangular scenery object the same size as the module Here are some examples of scenic modules our layout artists have designed You can find these and many more in the web layout collections About Modular Layouts Modular Layouts the term for a layout built from a series of modules fully assembled electrically connected and ready to run In TrainPlayer a modular layout is any layout built using the Module Manager Modular Layout Features In most ways a modular layout is like any other TrainP layer layout It consists of a single set of track scenery objects stations and so on However it also has some
221. h side and top view in the collection See instructions under Editing Images below 2 Name the files appropriately The name you give the side view image is the name you will see in the chooser for the car type so make it something friendly A top file is associated with a side and must have the same name with T before the extension The top and side need not be in the same format Example side Pacific Fruit R eefer gif top Pacific Fruit R eefer_T bmp Collect all side and tops into a single folder named what you want to call the collection This folder can go anywhere on your disk Bring up the Car Chooser Right click the folder under which you want the new collection to appear and choose Import From Folder Navigate to the folder of images and click OK Ory U1 A UW The program will create a new xml file and subfolder in your TrainP layer Cartypes directory copy the side and top image files into it then add the new collection to your chooser tree Editing Images in Microsoft Paint Click Paint in the Car Collection Editor Images tab and it will open the selected image in Paint The preferred format for top and side images is 24 bit BMP but other formats will work too jpg png gif To edit in Paint 1 Use View gt Zoom gt Large Size or Ctrl PgDn to enlarge the image so you can see what you re doing 2 Use paint tools to color or modify the image to suit Read the technical details below regarding sizes and
222. have a Single piece of track down you can puta train on it and operate with all the features of TrainP layer The best way to get started with TrackLayer is to go through the next chapter Getting Started and then work your way through the tutorial in the following chapter The tutorial leads you through the complete process of preparing a Small layout The remaining chapters go into more detail on track laying operations About This Manual About the Layouts Where to Go for Help Getting Started Where you start with TrackLayer depends on what you have to start with If you have a picture of a track plan from a book or magazine web site CAD program or a sketch on a piece of paper then you re the user TrackLayer was designed to accommodate Most of the features of the program are aimed at tracing over a diagram applying track where lines are already laid out If you don t have a diagram you can draw a plan by hand ona blank tabletop If a rectangular space will do choose the size and scale you want and you re ready to lay track If you are designing for an L or odd shaped Space you might consider using a drawing program to make a scale drawing of the space outline as background for sketching track Starting TrackLayer Layout and Image Files The Overall Process What s Next Try your hand at creating a small layout the Rockport amp Oyster Bay in the tutorial Starting TrackLayer There is only one progr
223. he current set of modules and their arrangement basically the same information you see in the Module Manager listbox If you have an arrangement you might want to reuse save itto an MDEF file Later you can load it and get back the same arrangement MDEF files are not designed to be portable or exportable They contain pathnames pointing to the individual module files If you move or rename any of these the mdef may not load correctly For convenience you can load an mdef file by dragging it from Windows Explorer directly into the manager workspace The incoming file replaces the current contents of the window Module Display Items Features of the display which have user settable properties are indicated in the following screen shots Those with in Assembly in the name refer to features of the assembled layout others to the assembly as it appears in the Module Manager module background floor module label module frame track line module highlight label in assembly frame in assembly Background in Assembly is not shown in these shots this turns on or off any background images or solid color backgrounds in the individual modules G p i f gt E h fe i m Advanced Topics After you ve got the hang of drawing layouts you should check them for errors and take some final steps if you want your layout to be used by others This chapter explains how Debugging and Repairing Publishing Your
224. he entire grid some to the selected row some to the selected cell Below is the full list of commands available on all these menus Add New Add new empty row at bottom of grid 1 4 Duplicate Add duplicate of selected row 1 4 Delete Delete selected row 1 4 Copy Copy selected row s to clipboard 2 Select All Select all rows Print Grid Print entire grid 2 Expand All Items Show contents under each group 2 Collapse All Items Hide contents under each group 3 Field Chooser Group By Box Column Auto Resize Grid Editable Show Waybill Zoom to Properties Notes Show dialog for choosing grid columns to display Show header to allow grouping If checked columns always adjust to fill window If checked grid rows can be edited Display waybill for selected row Zoom layout in to location of selected object Show properties dialog for selected object 1 Applies to editable grids only i e Grid Editable must be checked on the context menu 2 Applies to text data only no images 3 Applies to grids which have grouping in effect 4 Applies to Switchlist Window only 5 Applies to the object represented by the clicked row and column a car Station industry load or train Ops Setup Wizard To start the wizard choose Tools gt Ops gt Ops Setup Wizard from the menu or click the Wizard button t on the toolbar Then follow along Welcome page Shows some information about your layout If the layout is not suitable fo
225. he first command applies to the Train Menu For details of how this menu is used to display and select trains and how to work the Train Menu Settings see Train Menu in the Building Trains chapter The other command applies to train or car bars described here Control Bar Settings The train and car bars offer some adjustability regarding how car images are to be sized and displayed Click the down arrow in the lower right of train or car bar choose Train Car Bar Settings and get one of the dialogs shown below These bars are designed to let you adjust the height up to see more detail or down to see more cars then with one click snap back to a standard size designed for optimum viewing Standard size depends on the cars and their size classes see 50 Pixel Cars if you have a train with nothing but small cars it can be drawn native size in a window about 30 pixels high if the train has medium size cars it needs 50 pixels Pedersen cars still bigger Mixed trains are sized according to the largest car You may have to experiment to find the right settings for you If you have trains of all sizes you might want to see each in its best size on the other hand you might find it annoying to have the bar size keep changing as you click trains _Train Car Bar Settimgs Image Size _Train Car Bar Settings Train Bar Car Bar m Image Size W Snapon Select reset bar size on change train lf Snapon Select reset bar size on change t
226. he table and will not move or delete along with the table To manipulate both the bridge and the table as a single object group them using the scenery Group tool Scenery Toolkit The Scenery Toolkit in TrainP layer is the armchair railroader s equivalent of that big box in the basement full of miniature trees buildings bridges earth powders paints and other decorative whatnot In TrainP layer the box has an unlimited quantity the objects are thin they re just top views and if you don t see what you like there are tools for making your own It s quick and easy With Scenery Toolkit you can scenic an entire layout in an evening and not spill a drop of Sculptamold on the floor This chapter describes how to create scenery on your layout Fora quick lesson try the tutorial on the website About Scenery Scenery Ul Devices Choosing Scenery Drawing Scenery Editing Scenery Animated Scenery About Scenery The Scenery Toolkit is not really a box of objects itis a full featured object based drawing system This page gives an overview of the objects you can create The controls for doing the drawing and styling are described in the next section Scenery UI Devices Scenery Objects Shapes Scenery objects come in a few basic shapes in two categories linear line polyline and fillable rectangle ellipse polygon Shapes may be rotated to any angle Any shape may have a String or block of text displayed on top of it
227. hile end WHILE block Break break out of WHILE loop Continue continue to next iteration of WHILE loop Exit terminate running script Throw xn gt lt pos gt throw switch to given position or next available Rotate lt tbl gt lt xn gt CCW rotate given turntable to junction clockwise unless CCW added Tablestop stop turntable rotation Sound loop stop lt spath gt play or stop sound in named wav file If LOOP omitted play once Set lt var gt lt expr gt set variable to value equivalent to LET lt var gt lt expr gt Reset lt var gt reset registry variable to stored value Let lt var gt lt expr gt set given variable to value of expression create variable if needed Call lt routine gt lt arglist gt call given subroutine or proc and pass any required arguments Proc lt routine gt begin definition of procedure of given name Endproc end procedure definition Local lt var var gt declare local variables Return Train Commands Forward Reverse Speed lt mph gt Stop Uncouple lt slot gt OR lt car gt OR lt car gt lt car gt Horn lt msec gt Train Control Commands Train lt train gt Load Toggle Car Train Cut lt ds gt lt doadname gt Unload Toggle Car Train Cut lt ds gt Drive lt train gt Enddrive Start lt train gt lt mph gt User Interface Commands Echo lt string gt Input lt var gt lt prompt gt Note lt string gt Car Functions CAR label ID CAR label Loa
228. hip out limestone the kiln will take in limestone and ship out cement the plant will take in raw cement and ship out bags We will also need coal or fuel and chemical agents for the factory but let s keep it simple To input this information we go to each Station right click and bring up Station Properties and fill in the Industry section of the dialog There are few restrictions here we can pretty much just make up stuff and type itin and choosers are available to help The error checking routines built into the program will help in correcting any mistakes or omissions Some of the loads we need are already available in the Loads collection but most are not For example there is no load called bags of cement To handle this while defining the industry the program calls up the Load Definition dialog to prompt for the one piece of information it needs about this load the car type required to carry it We give It an X for boxcar and a new load is added to the list We can now load any boxcar with it and it shows up as bags of cement on top of the car icon The last step is to populate the layout with appropriate cars There is no automatic way to do this If necessary you can consult the properties of each load to find out what car types it requires In our case we already know we need hoppers gondolas and boxcars because we just finished setting it up this way Once you select the car types place the cars in the yard at the int
229. his particular jump off point is called A When the train jumps from this point onto the target layout if it finds a linked track called A it will land there If it does not find a matching label it will jump to an arbitrary place Thus in order to set up a precise jump you will need to follow this same procedure on both layouts 5 Click OK and the link is set up 6 Drive a train onto the linked track and keep going as if you were driving right past the stub When the train reaches the end it will begin a jump The other layout will be automatically opened if not already on the screen will come to the front and you will see the train emerging onto it 7 While the train is jumping you may change its speed or direction and both parts will act together To unlink 1 Right click a linked track section choose Link to Layout then click the Unlink button Double Track If you ve ever tried to create a length of parallel double track say for a passing track or a double track section of main line you Know it s not easy especially if curves are involved Now a feature introduced inTrackLayer 5 3 does the engineering for you Here s how to use tt 1 Use the Track Edit tool Click or shift click to select one or more track segments defining the stretch you want to double 2 Right click any selected track and choose Make Double Track The entire selection splits in two joined at the ends by Y switches gt N While doub
230. hlighted oa completes one curve and removes one circle 4 Draw an outer tangent This 5 Draw the other outer tangent This completes the other curve and removes the other circle 6 The completed S Helices A helix is a device for moving a train between levels of a multi level layout The train enters at one level changes altitude gradually as it proceeds up or down a series of loops and emerges at another level None of Linn Westcott s 101 Track Plans has a helix but many modern track plans and club layouts do For an elegant example see ohn Armstrong s Southern Pacific Lines Shasta Division featured in Model Railroader April 2005 It takes some effort to draw a helix in TrackLayer but it s worth it When a train enters the helix and climbs it in a series of slow loops it comes to life and makes sense out of that bundle of looped wires on the track plan Drawing a Helix Draw a helix by starting at the bottom with the lower approach track and the lowest loop Proceed upwards adding and connecting new loops right on top of the lower ones To do this requires a special device because normally if you put circles on top of each other then when you try to add tangents they won t snap to the right places The secret is to mark track as untouchable Once a loop is in place you can mark it so it will not be affected when you add the next loop As you draw each loop you leave a little handle sticking out
231. ialog controls Start Stop Reset Start Time Speed Factor Click to start the clock running Button is dimmed if clock IS already running Note the clock starts automatically whenever it is visible and you Start any train running Click to stop the clock Click to reset clock back to the indicated start time Time the clock will show on program startup and on reset Default is 5AM Clock speed as a multiple of wall clock speed Default is 6 meaning the TP clock runs 6 times faster than a wall Clock one TP hour goes by in ten actual minutes For more information see Clock Track Properties Properties of the selected or right clicked track section s Called from Properties on the Track context menu Track Properties ID 6 Straight track Type f Normal f Hidden f Tunnel Length Layout inches bd Radius On Hidden Track Overrides Cars as outlines Ties off Track line off C Cars invisible Roadbed off Untouchable Cars Fully visible Rails off Color e e The Track Properties dialog sets and displays properties of one or more sections of straight or curved track It allows you to override general track style preferences and apply different styles to particular sections This dialog does not apply to circles or turntables Dialog controls ID type Length Radius Units Track section integer ID and track type Straight or Curve Read only I
232. iay June Of J01 peed 7 alter 90 07 stan Pa irk a bam mr pis For detente clack the Gerapt Central S0 l ution Hain script for Tesserger locs beliagiuan Tard to Clarento E opt Clarena J31 junction ection teker over a jji action sizete stop ai Clarendon Statics Throw Switch Insert junction number Insert throw here Insert throw alternate For editing and setting parameters of junction actions See unction Action Editor Five tab dialog provides access to all scripts plus reference material See Script Central Displays output from running scripts See Schedule Window When a Script editor window is up right click a junction and get commands to insert Special text into the script See Insert Here Menu below Comes up when a Note command is executed in ss ascript Can be f manipulated by user or by script See Note gt Hi Window below Note Window Rknettreneneumeiene You ci os die ala wr gh click tear main DPA input vl Enter a numeric value jecho yi vi1 BY Script Input Comes up when Input command Is executed Prompts for value and 133 returns in named variable Input Box Enter a numeric value Train Script Menu Commands on the Script context menu apply to the script attached to the right Script clicked train If the train has no script only Edit is enabled Ifthe train has no engine none of the commands is available you cann
233. icular size and scale that becomes the default for all new layouts Layout and Image Files About Layout Files A layout for use in TrainP layer consists of two files The layout file extension rrw The layout file contains the definitions of all tracks trains stations and every other object and bit of data about the layout You can see for yourself an rrw file is plain text in xml format so you can open it with Notepad or any text editor Better yet change Its extension to xml and double click it will open in your browser in collapsible outline form The image file extension jpg omp png gif tpg The image file contains the background graphics scenery text and track lines in a picture of the track plan Image files can come from a variety of sources An image file suitable for TrackLayer use has these characteristics High resolution The resolution should be 300 DPI pixels per inch so that it will look good in close up views A typical high resolution image file is around 1MB in size Cropped The image should be cropped tightly around the edges of the layout with a minimum of white Space surrounding This makes better use of your screen space and allows the program to calculate the layout size accurately Standard format TrackLayer accepts standard PG GIF BMP and PNG formats as well as our own called TPG the TrainP layer Protected Graphics format an encrypted form of a PG file The
234. id label AAR aar code car with aar code matching or starting with specified code Train train id first car of train with specified id id name or train no train of type Freight Passenger Mixed or Switcher as assigned by the program Any Last Car last car of any train Last Car Of train id last car of train with specified id Any Car any car of any train Train Type train type A trigger has both a type and a trigger direction Consider a track going horizontally across the screen with a junction in the middle a train can cross it from left to right W gt E or the other way E gt W You can specify whether an action Is to be triggered by one or the other or both The orientation of the layout is taken into account at the time you assign a direction to a trigger If travel across the junction is more or less horizontal then the choices you have are W E or E W if closer to vertical they become N S or S N If you assign a direction and later rotate the layout results are unpredictable If it triggers the wrong way change It to the other For additional notes regarding triggers see Working With unction Actions Dialog controls The J unction Action Editor is always working on a Single action If you bring it up on a junction having no action it creates an empty one with a default trigger Label Upper left of dialog indicates the junction number if it is a switch its position is also given Choose one trigger
235. idual track sections or choose a color for new track so that you can draw a whole yard or mainline in the shade of your choice Some of the satellite layouts use different track colors to clarify complex multi line yards Zoom The Zoom menu now includes choices for quick zoom to percent sizes Or to zoom to a specific area choose zoom on drag and drag a rectangle around the area Export image Generate a J PG or your choice of graphic format which shows track grid background and or trains Output size and quality is adjustable Publish New dialogs prepare layouts and car collections for publication gather the components unify links and filenames check for errors copy to a destination folder We developed these tools for our own use but they are handy for anyone who shares layouts and cars Help buttons have been added to all dialogs showing context specific pages from the local help file Show hide delete trains Now you can toggle display of trains along with track grid background A new button in preferences allows you to delete all trains from the layout Rail display Now you can see two Steel rails instead of just a single brown line In 3 0 Scripting Program your operations to run automatically New Graphics Smoother scrolling infinite zoom reduced memory Sounds New sounds for trains and layout background sounds Tunnels Precise hiding for underpasses tunnels multi layer tracks Downloads Browse an
236. iew Color Codes Not available on toolbar Shows or hides color blocks on car tops and stations See Color Codes Note Most ops commands will make modifications to your layout You might want to use File gt Save As to make a copy before you start using these commands Switchlists A switchlist s a set of instructions for moving cars Each instruction refers to a single car tells where it is to go and what load to carry if any The full set of instructions might be called your day s work once you ve delivered all the cars as instructed you can toss the switchlist and go home You ll get a new one tomorrow The core function of TrainPlayer Ops is to generate random switchlists for you to execute This brings together all the various ops components industries car loads yards interchanges waybills and stirs them together to come up with a purposeful day s work Switchlist Windows A switchlist is presented to you in two ways as a grid of data in the Switchlist Window and as a paragraph of text in the Schedule Window This example shows both Color Action Car Class TowAt Load Shipper F63 Hatcar Ingersoll Machine npty Manufacturing Plant Foundry Send 961 Gondola Ingersoll Machine Empty Manufacturing Plant Foundry Send G67 Gondola Ingersoll Machine mipt Manufacturing Plant Foundry Retum AD Boxcar Hamilton Yard Empot CiHfline Tool and Die Cars Switchlist Schedule Engine none Y
237. iew of the layout with current zoom and view settings Train tree tree control showing cars and trains on the layout Clock scale railroad clock Schedule text window displaying ops instructions script output stations entered and departed Switch window shows interactive close up of upcoming or selected switch Car inventory bar source of cars for adding to the layout by drag and drop or click Zoom slider for adjusting zoom of layout view Not shown are e Floating control panel another method of operating a train more like a real model control panel e Ops windows a tabbed set of windows displaying switchlists and car inventories To show or hide these windows use toggles on the View gt Windows submenu gt ee he BS Clock Most of these windows are dockable which means they can be dragged to become free floating or docked to any pists side or combined in tabbed sets Some can be set to auto hide when not in use isiatt Schedule Status Bar Control Panel 42 Switch Window Train Tree Ops Train Control Bar Car Inventory Bar Layout Properties Properties of the current layout Called from Properties on the Layout context menu See also About the Properties Dialog This dialog shows general properties of the layout and lets you edit some of them Additional layout properties are on the Advanced tab Dialog controls Name of the railroad This name appears at the top of the layout N
238. ifferently closed car loads These are loads without pictures for loading on boxcars refrigerated cars covered hoppers and other closed cars When you select this folder the center panel changes to list view and shows you a lengthy collection of load names alloys alloys load for class X XMR Drag load onto a highlighted car on the layout In this case the preview window shows the load as text which will be displayed above side views of the car and as a pattern which will be overlaid onto the car top image By default all closed car loads are shown as a pair of double red bars but you can change this right click the load choose Properties go to the Images tab click Browse Load Definition Dialog When you click OK to leave the Station Properties or Industry Browser dialogs the program checks Incoming and Outgoing boxes to see if all names are Known among the load collections If any are not the Load Definition dialog appears where you can add new loads or correct mis entered names In order to add a new load to the system you need to provide a load name and one or more AAR codes indicating the types of car Suitable to carry it Given this data the program creates a new image free load in the closed car collection If the load you need is for an open car flatcar hopper gondola consider using one of the existing loads with images or create one in the Load Collection Editor where you can supply images for It If you hav
239. ilable from the main menu under Tools gt Scenery All the same commands are on the Scenery Toolbar and are described below Scenery Toolbar icon Q Tm moO BW The toolbar is brought up by View gt Toolbars gt Scenery Tools Below is a quick reference to the tools For detailed instructions on how to use them see chapters Drawing Scenery and Editing Scenery tool name Scenery Selector Line Polygon Rectangle Oval Text Painter Edit Foreground Layer Edit Background Layer View Scenery Grid Group Ungroup Straight Circle a Tumate Patons i Edi Burm k 3 ae lechod Enabhe Yard Mode 7 Line Pobpgeon 1 Rectangle Ellipse aha Numbers i i Tew 1 2 Painter Ops CE Emil Foreground E Resre Rercale z 3 Edit Background A Show Tooltops 3 yie Sctenecy Grd Customize Group Ungroup Ering Poraared 1 Send Backward E Ering to Front Send to Back description to select and edit objects Click shift click or press and drag to select unselect move resize or reshape objects for details see Selecting Objects to create a line polyline or polygon To create a line segment press and drag Fora polyline start or end at an existing endpoint where cursor changes to Fora polygon draw a polyline with a segment which closes the figure Arrow button brings up Line Scenery Styles to create a rectangle object Press to locate one corner drag to adjust the opposite corner Pre
240. ile dialog file open layout bring up Layout Chooser note quotes required around two word command Crain add car Doxcar add car to selected train at insert position note menu command applies to selected train not script owner Wait Conditions A wait condition tells the script to wait for a certain event or until a certain time before proceeding There are only a few wait condition keywords serving multiple purposes AT a certain time on the clock or when the first car of the train reaches a certain junction or station AFTER an elapsed time or when the last car passes the given location or ON specified events al Joo SCOP when first car of train crosses junction 35 stop train continue with script after 0 0 02 speed 20 wait 2 seconds then set speed to 20 Flow Control Script statements are normally executed one after another Commands in the flow control category change this behavior by jumping to other parts of the code based on some criterion The following types of flow control are available e Conditionals Use f Endif to evaluate a criterion and take different courses of action depending on the result A criterion is two expressions connected by a comparison operator enclosed in parentheses Loops Use While Endwhile to execute the same block of statements as long as a given criterion is met Branches Use Goto to jump to a specified location elsewhere in the code Calls Use Call to jump to an external body of code ex
241. in the Track Properties dialog Customizing Toolbars Toolbars are handy for keeping your favorite commands easily clickable The installed program has our choice of commands on the toolbars and has them in default locations You can change these to suit yourself Toolbars start out docked on the top of the main window To reposition a toolbar e Press the grabber bar at the left end of the toolbar and drag If you drag it away from the window frame it will float as with the Train and Scenery toolbar in this picture e Drag a toolbar to any edge of the window frame and it will dock there e Ifa toolbar is floating you can change its size and shape by dragging the lower right corner of the floating window a File Edit View Tools Train Window Help oe Fe ah i Eg da 2 er a o p a B f Alon 3 3 GE Train Tools To remove a toolbar e Drag It away from the frame so it floats then click the close x box Or e Uncheck itin the View Toolbars menu Modifications made to toolbar arrangements are saved between program sessions To set all toolbars back to factory defaults use the Reset buttons in the Tools Customize dialog The Customize dialog To modify the commands on toolbars choose View Toolbars Customize or Tools Customize to bring up the Customize dialog shown below You can then use drag and drop to set up your toolbars As long as the Customize dialog is on the screen you can e Remove a button from a
242. in 107 Track Plans It s a simple roomy layout with nice Westcott artwork suggesting an operational theme similar to the following at ae i ach anes ae Te i Original copyright SKalmbach Publishing Co Licensed to TP Developer The LRHGP is a branch line which services the Hercules Cement Co located in the countryside near a limestone quarry Hoppers deliver stone from the quarry to the kiln where cement is produced and dumped into gondolas for the short trip to the main plant There itis bagged and set out on the loading dock to be transported in boxcars to an interchange with the main line to Portland We modified the original design by adding a branch along the south edge to representthis interchange The first step in setting up for operation is to define the load unload locations This is done with the Station tool In the above screen shot we added the four stations where goods will be exchanged at the quarry next to the kiln by the main plant and at the interchange Now we establish the industries One way to do this is to use the Industry Browser to see if a suitable one is already available In this case we are in luck there is a Cement industry in the Mining section showing typical in and out loads for this type of industry It doesn t quite work for our purposes but we can use it for reference To define an industry we need to specify the incoming and outgoing loads at each station The quarry will s
243. individual car For example two forty foot wood boxcars are of the same car type have the same shape and appearance but differ in the numbers painted on their sides In this dialog you set properties of the individual car You cannot change the car type if you have a boxcar and want a flatcar instead you have to delete the car and create a new one Dialog data Top and side images of the car type The top image resizes with the dialog side does images not These images belong to the car collection and cannot be changed here Images are displayed in a car panel The block of text at the upper right includes car type name collection name AAR code class class description load information and car notes if any The identifier of the car This appears on the car top when the Show Car IDs command is used See Illustration below and is also used in scripts to refer to this car The initial Car ID ID assigned to a car is a one letter initial of the car class followed by a number which makes the label unique You can change this to any short string as long as it remains unique text checkbox appears only if car is an engine Check to flip the engine so it points in the Reverse Engine opposite direction See discussion below An optional string of information attached to the car A car note may be used to keep track of a car s home location destination reporting marks etc Size of the car length x width as viewed from
244. ing stations is a barrier to getting started with ops so we looked into creating them automatically The results turned out to be fun Here s what the station generator does 1 Uses the Yard Finder to find all the yards it can recognize and adds most of them to the layout as stations named Yard1 Yard2 etc It doesn t usually find many because the rules are fairly restrictive 2 Uses the Interchange Generator to find a spur suitable for use as an interchange If it finds one it adds it to the layout and names it Interchange 3 Generates a random set of standard stations distributed around the layout The number you get depends on layout size figure about two or three per square yard Station names are chosen randomly from a list names taken from 101 Track Plans over 500 of them this list is in your TrainP layer data folder named stn_names ttt Preferential locations are near the ends of spurs or in the middle of long straight or curved sections There is no dialog for the station generator you just click Generate Stations and it replaces all existing Stations with a new random set If you don t like the results you can a revert using Edit gt Undo b click again to get a different random set or c take what it gives you and modify to suit using the Station tool to move resize rename etc The other way to generate stations is from the Ops Wizard This gives you a bit more flexibility you can create St
245. inter Each brings up the appropriate tab of the dialog Scenery Grid HH The Scenery Grid is an aid in drawing and constructing precise scenery shapes Itis a grid of dots When the grid is on visible most mouse movements snap to the dots If you are dragging an object or a multiple selection itis the top left corner which snaps to the nearest dot To show or hide the grid use View Scenery Grid on the menu or toolbar The grid is visible only when you are using one of the scenery tools When you change to a track or run tool the scenery grid goes down but its visibility is remembered the next time you activate a scenery tool on this layout the grid becomes visible if you left it that way The size spacing and color of grid dots can be modified see Scenery Preferences Scenery Dropper f and Painter New convenience tools in 6 2 are aids in the final step of scenery building applying a coat of paint The Dropper as in eye dropper is used to pick a color off the screen and the Painter or paint bucket is used to apply a color or pattern to one or more objects The same results can be achieved in other ways but it takes more clicks Like the other drawing tools the Painter is modal click it and it becomes the active tool When the painter is active e Click inside a fillable scenery object and it will fill with the current default background style To view or edit the default background style click the arro
246. ir of images for each load Closed car loads are for closed cars boxcars reefers tankcars and are represented by generic symbols in top views text in side views The above picture shows both types Loads are similar in many ways to car types They come in Sets like car collections each defined by a file of data and for open car loads a folder of images Like car types they are selected from a chooser and edited in a collection editor The installer delivers a sample set of loads more can be downloaded from the collections on the web There are a lot of moving parts associated with loads and they appear in various places in the program Here is a compact guide to relevant reading matter Load Menu popup menu for choosing a load for a car Load Chooser dialog for choosing pictorial loads for one or more cars Load Collection Editor dialog for editing load collections or modifying individual load definitions Load Definition Dialog dialog for creating new closed car loads for an industry Car Properties where the load for a car can be viewed or changed Car Collection Editor where a default load can be assigned to a car type Industry Browser where incoming and outgoing loads are defined for a standard industry Station Properties where loads are defined for a specific industry Loading Cars Every freight car has a load type assigned to it whether by default or by you There are two steps to loading a car selecting a load for the car
247. is a modeless dialog it remains on the screen so you can keep adding cars When you are finished click Done If you change your mind use Edit gt Undo to remove added cars You can choose whether you want the list view to show side views as shown above or top views or a list Showing type name class AAR code filename and date Tree Contents Defaults F older of collections which can be selected as default car sets see Default Cars British Folder of British car collections Standard F older of standard car collections Premium Folder of premium collections available with Premium license only lt other collections gt Collections from previous versions 1 1 Previously all collections were stored directly in the Cartypes folder Now collections are stored under Standard or Premium folders Older collections which have not been moved will show up at the top level of the car chooser tree For instructions about reorganizing your collections see the Readme Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Reload contents from disk Zo Find Search for name or filename See Search Te Find Next Go to next hit after Find Properties Display folder or car collection properties Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Export Filenames maion Ealick Under the selected folder create new car collection from a folder of image files Dimmed if Import from Folder pone a tae sel
248. is gets a beige background 2 Select the Scenery Edit tool green arrow right click the new rectangle and choose Load Bitmap You geta standard file dialog This is the same dialog you use for static background images Itis still used for that but now supports three more types of input a Browse to an anm file the program will create an animated image b Browse to a gif file the program will examine it and decide whether to create an animated or static image c Browse to the first of a series of images the program will create an animation and anm file automatically This process is described in detail below Once you successfully load an animated image you get an alert confirming the import and reporting the number of frames An animated image created using Load Bitmap does not automatically start playing upon creation To start it use the Scenery Edit tool right click the image and choose Start Animation Working with Animated Images Animated images work basically like other scenery objects t yt To manipulate Use the Scenery Edit tool green arrow on the scenery toolbar click to select an image then you can move resize rotate and restyle itas usual It Keeps animating as you move it 1 E Sima around im Cat irl a Pe Copy Cirie By default an animated image has its proportions locked so resizing the image will not distort it To rotate Delete Delete an image drag the handle at its upper right S
249. isable Yard mode see above You can also disable yard mode by clicking the Y icon The TrainP layer control panel was custom designed by Rick Fernandez of creativeblox Check for Updates Check web for program and car updates Called from menu command Help gt Check for Updates This dialog appears automatically at program startup if you have Check for program updates checked in General Preferences and a program update Is available cmrm P pa t s pma ni e ie alte a ia E a f a me i E Es i B Check for Updates i s J r J a 5 Pee a Baal Taur er L install the latest released version Use this dialog to see if an update to the program is available or if you are a user of Chris Pedersen Cars to see if there are new CP collections you may obtain Program Update The top part of the dialog indicates whether a new version of the program is available If so the Download button is enabled Click itto download and install the update Once the download starts exit TrainP layer so that it is not running when the installer begins Cars Update The bottom part of the dialog is for updating or purchasing Chris Pedersen Cars If you have already purchased this set then the dialog checks whether new cars have been posted which you don t have Ifso these sets are listed as shown above Click Download to download and install them all at once If you are nota CP Cars
250. isplay the bridge track Normally you turn this off when you have a bridge scenery object Width of the bridge Units are those in use throughout the program object to be used as the bridge See below for details e Adda bridge scenery object Here s how 1 2 Choose or draw the object to be used for the bridge In this example we are using bridge2 from the miscellaneous collection Size and rotate the bridge so italigns with the bridge track and is the same size as shown below Then position it right on top of the bridge track Display properties of the bridge object and note its name in this case Rectanglel2 Name Rectangle 12 FG Sze S x his Location 3 54 x 19 3 Units Layout inches Rotation 90 deqrees Hide track 4 trains ere 4 Select the transfer table and bring up its Properties dialog Transfer Table tab 5 In the Bridge Scenery drop down select the name of the bridge object Note this will not change the display in the properties dialog 6 Click OK and you are ready to go Double click to start up the table movement and the new fancy bridge will move along with the bridge track To edit a transfer table To move resize rotate or delete a transfer table use the Scenery Edit tool a You manipulate the transfer table by working with the pit as you would work with any other scenery object If you have a bridge scenery object it is not connected to t
251. it becomes like the background it cannot be selected or moved or highlighted This is an advanced feature Untouchable track is used for building helices or other constructions requiring curves right on top of each other for a step by step procedure see Helices Linked track You can mark a stub section of track as linked and connect it to another layout When the train reaches that stub it jumps to the other layout and continues on its way Details below No Ties or Roadbed Track with this mark are excluded when displaying ties or roadbed Double Track Choose a Set of tracks and clone them to get parallel double track See Double Track below Split Track Here For various reasons the you sometimes need to introduce a junction into a straight or curved section of track In the past this was done as described under Isolating Track below as of v 5 3 itcan be done directly like this 1 Use the Track Edit tool 2 Right click a point along a track where you want to create a junction and choose Split Track Here Add Car Here Paste Here Split Track Here The track is split and a junction created at the indicated point There is no immediate visible evidence of this but you ll see the new junction if you hover over it The operation is undoable Works on both straights and curves Isolating Track Most of these properties can be applied only to one or more complete segments of track To apply a property to a portion of
252. ith free demo version British Layouts for UK users Standard Large collection of user submitted layouts Layouts101 All plans from Linn Westcott s book 107 Track Plans for Model Railroaders Premium Large collection of professionally designed layouts requires Premium license Featured Layouts Contents of special folder on web updated frequently What s New Recent additions to the web collection see What s New Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Always dimmed in this web chooser Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Find Next Download All Download and install all layouts within the selected folder and subfolders Look at web layouts within the selected folder and subfolders if some on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those I What s New Settings on What s New folder only Set cutoff date see What s New Download All Download Missing Items Download Missing Items List Menu Download selected layout s then switch to Local tab Works over multiple Open selection Refresh Thumbnail Refresh Thumbnail Redownload thumbnail image Web Sound Chooser The web sound chooser Is for downloading sounds from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser E Heavy freight Sound K5la wav Sound E LN wav Sound Michigan freight wav Sound El Sherys durango waw Sou
253. itmap images A SCN object has this advantage when you add one to a layout It is added to the layout scenery and does not require an external file If you save the layout and send it to a friend the cement plant shows up even if no such object resides on the recipient s machine The same is not true of bitmap images like the tree HQ Scenery Collection Delivered with the program is a new set of folders containing high quality scenery a mixture of bitmaps and SCN files The hq background folder has tileable textures useful for background areas Hq_vegetation has bitmaps of trees and bushes copy and paste to make forests Hq_roof kit has a collection of parts you can use to assemble custom roof designs Hq_track roadbed has tileable textures designed for roadbed used not only in scenery but also for track roadbed as described in Road Preferences Other folders have objects as named details accessories industrial buildings etc browse around in the Scenery Chooser and see what you have For a lot more scenery images from older collections visit the Web tab in the Scenery Chooser and browse our online collections You can download and install any of the online folders into your local set Or you may already have them if you have been running an older version of TrainP layer Scenery UI Devices The Scenery Toolkit involves a lot of moving parts Here is an illustrated guide Scenery Menu The full set of scenery tools is ava
254. ived Yards locations where cars are stored and assembled into trains Interchanges locations where cars are exchanged with other railroads Waybills orders to ship or receive goods at an industry S witchlists sets of instructions for picking up and delivering cars Generators internal devices for creating random ops sessions Ops Windows tables of data about cars and switchlists Ops Setup Wizard Step by step procedure to prepare a layout for ops Ops Toolbar buttons for quick access to ops commands S witchlist Window docking grid window showing current switchlist Cars Window docking grid window showing layout car inventory Schedule Window window showing textual switchlist instructions Route Finder dialog for identifying track routes between given points Color Codes colored cues for visualizing car moves Ops Limitations In the current version Ops supports only freight traffic not passenger the two types of activity are just too different to be handled by a single scheme We plan to support passenger ops in a future version Another limitation at present is that Ops will not extend beyond a single layout if you work with linked layouts watch for them to be supported in a future release Ops Setup Case Study To make all this a little more real let s take a look at what it would take to set up a small layout for some operation For this example we ll use a slightly modified version of the Lime Ridge Hercules amp Portland RR 30
255. k highlight click any empty space on the layout as if removing a selection Publishing Your Layout Ifyou have an interesting layout and you ve gone to the trouble of laying track on it consider Sharing it with other TrainPlayer users If you take the following few steps to make it ready and are the artist or have rights to distribute the artwork we will be glad to post it on the User Layouts page at trainplayer com 1 Check for errors Run Tools gt Check Track For details see Track Check Dialog 2 Test switches and turntables 3 Add some trains Put suitable rolling stock at reasonable locations for starting an operating session 4 Add comments In Layout Properties add as much commentary as you like but please include your name the author or designer of the layout and any operating instructions 5 Use File gt Publish to bring up the Layout Publisher dialog to finish the job External Files A TrainP layer layout is stored in a text file with extension rrw This file contains information about track stations and other layout objects but does not have all the data you need to run the layout Additional data is stored in external files referenced by the rrw If you want to send a layout to someone else you need to Know about these files and make sure the recipient has access to them One external file is the background image Ifa layout has a background image it is often stored in a file in the same folder as the r
256. k to set the color for display of rails Default is silver Enter the distance between rails in current selected units Default is 0 9 HO or about 6 1 2 feet on the prototype Check Track Check to have the track checker run every time you add or modify tracks so if an error occurs you will be notified of it immediately If this box is checked and an error is detected while drawing an alert appears describing the error Snap options These options affect drawing certain track sections and circles in TrackLayer This set of options is dimmed if you are running TrainP layer Snap options aid in creating precise layouts quickly Angle snap is for creating switches at one of a set of standard turnout angles Parallel snap is for drawing yards and ladders placing switch points in such a way that parallel tracks are evenly spaced Radius snap is for drawing and editing circles with standard radii To angle Applies when the Track tool is active and you are drawing a Straight section with its stationary point lying on another straight section i e you are creating the branch of a switch see left diagram below As you drag the moving end of one track if the angle between it and the stationary track is close to one of the checkmarked choices the moving line snaps to that angle When Snap occurs the cursor changes to show the snapped angle You may choose up to four different snap angles 4 6 90 degrees and or one other angle betwe
257. key pressed then you are adjusting the radius of a circle as you drag When radius snap is in effect if the radius is near one of the predefined values it snaps to that value More details about snap features are given in Track Preferences Track Coloring Not all the track on your layout has to be the same color You can give individual sections or entire regions of track their own colors You might use this feature for example to distinguish standard from narrow gauge lines in a mixed gauge layout Hidden Tunnel Display Untouchable Default color Link to Layout Track Color d For new track II Fail color Thickness BE Select All Ctr A To color a single track section 1 Use the Track or Edit tool 2 Right click a track section and choose from the Track Color menu e Normal track will be colored the default color as specified in Track Preferences e Change brings up a color chooser so you can choose a different color for the selected track To change a track from one non default color to another you must first go back to Normal then Change To color multiple track sections The above instructions apply to all selected track so you can color many tracks at once select them drag a selection rectangle or shift click individual sections then right click any one and choose color as above An alternative is to choose a color to be applied to new track only using the For new track bu
258. king resizable scrollable window where you choose rolling stock to populate your layout The window is a source of cars it shows a complete car collection from which you can drag any car type onto the track or into the train window Initially the collection shown in the CIB is the default set associated with the layout but you can choose any other set The CIB is one of two new control bars introduced in Version 5 2 The other is the Train Control Bar TCB Both use the same train display window see Train Window Default Steam To view the Car Inventory Bar a toggle using View gt Windows gt Car Inventory Bar from the main menu OR b in a track or train context menu choose Add Car gt By Name or Add Car Here gt By Name This brings up the CIB at the bottom of the screen along with a floating window called Car Types showing the same collection as a list of names The header of the CIB window shows the name of the collection on display The order in which cars are displayed in the CIB is by car type Engines are shown first at the left then passenger cars then freight You can hover over an image to see information about it in a tooltip if those are enabled otherwise on the status bar or right click and choose Properties to get the full details Clicking a car type selects it gives it a pink underline and highlights it in the Car Types window if visible Like the TCB
259. l operations using the train controls are recorded most hand drag operations are recorded also except for speed changes 5 When finished click Stop on the toolbar This terminates recording and saves the script 6 To play back click Rewind then Play Or bring up the Script Editor so you can follow along Disclaimers recording isn ta perfect science and may not capture all the action exactly as you expect It is intended to capture simple action sequences and to provide starting points for developing your own scripts Debugging Once you have developed or recorded a script and you are playing it back something is likely to go wrong Figuring out what s wrong and fixing it is not usually easy and the program doesn t provide much in the way of tools to help you but here are some Suggestions 1 Watch the script run Bring up the Script Editor before starting the script so you can gy bE Q see what line is being executed when the trains go awry This applies to train scripts For a junction action wait until a car or train crosses the 3t J9 5I soo junction to trigger the action then bring up the Script Editor Warning do not use rewind spes E ane i l Pica Cut Ctrl or replay when watching a junction action a af ae Copy Ctrl C 2 Use Go To Statement In the Script Editor right click a line of the script and rever Delete Del choose Go To Statement from the context menu shown at right The script will position speed Select All
260. layout Load car type overrides This is an expert feature which allows more flexibility in waybill and switchlist generations Here s how it works Associated with each industry is a list of incoming and outgoing loads Each load is associated with one or more car types which can carry that load The feature allows you to override this default list of car types for a load and instead specify a particular car type to carry that load to or from that industry For example at the industry Feed Mill one of the incoming loads is Corn This load is listed as being transportable by car types LO XM H covered hopper general purpose boxcar or hopper Say your feed mill is only equipped with a loader which handles open hoppers and not closed cars In this case you could override the load Corn in the list for Feed Mill to say H only meaning that the ops generator will not assign a waybill to carry corn in open hoppers only and not any other type of car To specify the override you must edit the item in the industry load list and add one or more car types AAR codes in square brackets In the above example the line saying corn in the incoming load list must be changed to say corn H The string within the brackets may be a single AAR code or several of them separated by commas This override code is displayed in the industry load list and also in any generated waybill which refers to It Override codes may be specified for industries on the l
261. layout to add or subtract track space 1 Zoom out so the entire layout is smaller than the window on the screen This is not required but it s a good idea until you get the hang of resizing 2 Choose the new command Tools gt Resize Rescale or click the Resize Rescale button L amp I on the toolbar The first time you choose this command you get an alert with brief instructions This appears only the first time you activate the tool after starting the program so read it the first time it comes up If you want to get rid of it permanently check do not show again TrackLayer Using the Resize fRescale tool Drag the outer pink border to change the overall dimensions of the layout Drag the inner blue box to move or scale the track relative bo the background To dismiss the tool press ESC or click outside the blue box To correct mistakes use Edit Undo This alert is shown only once per session Check the box below to remove it permanently Don t show me this again Two rectangular frames appear a pink one around the outer border of the layout and a blue one surrounding the track 4 Elizabeth amp Rahway River Ry layout border a 4 Original copia Kalmbach P ORI mS OPEC I ta TP Ss tw 3 Press and drag the pink outer rectangle by any side or corner The overall layout space changes while the bitmap remains in position or becomes cropped Keep your eye on the status bar which displays the size as you
262. le Rail Display You can get a more realistic view of your track by displaying it as two rails instead of a single brown wire For example here is the Pittsburgh Midvale amp Ironton shown with rails instead of track lines Rails can be turned on or off independently of track So you can show one or the other or both Use View gt Track and View gt Rails commands on the main menu Rail display gives an interesting variation to the graphics It was designed to become a feature to analyze electrical flow around the layout but that hasn t happened There are limitations e Rails are not usually updated as you draw or edit When you are moving or removing track the rails may not change When tracks and rails get out of synch the solution is to toggle View gt Rails twice Turning rails off and then on again generates a new set e Some layouts have spurious circles in the rail display or other glitches e Rail Spacing is not yet adjustable It is hard coded to be 3 4 in HO or equivalent Rails don t show up very well against a background Image although you can change color and thickness to suit But they provide a nicer image when you are running a track only layout Exporting an Image TrainP layer provides the ability to save the image you see on the screen to a jpg or other graphics file This topic is now covered on its own page Exporting Images Dragging by Hand As an alternative to using the scrollbars you can pan aroun
263. lect here will be Collection created from tools on the Car Toolbar Choose a language to be used when naming car classes This is the Same choice you can make in the AAR Car Types dialog The language chosen here affects car class names throughout the program wherever car descriptions appear dialogs tooltips Class Names Car ID Label Style Settings in this area are for adjusting the appearance of car top labels as described in Car ID Display Click to bring up the system Font Selector dialog to select font style and Font size to be displayed on car top labels Choose a font which is not so On large that it exceeds the size of the car image Click to bring up a system Color Chooser to specify the background color Background you want behind car labels This color is overridden when color coding is in effect Turn Off Labels Check this box if you want car labels to be hidden while cars are moving then automatically displayed again on stop Style Preferences Settings for application style Called from menu command File gt Preferences Layout background Window background Cancel Defaults Il Help Application Style The application style refers to the overall color and design scheme used for windows menus toolbars and dialogs Several choices are available not all of them work or look good on all operating systems The thing to do is choose one from the drop down the change takes effect immediately So you
264. lected objects to a scn file they become a Single unit you can later drag onto a layout You are prompted for output filename If you save the file in any folder under TP Scenery then the new object will show up in that folder in the Scenery Chooser For more see SCN Objects 7 Convert to Transfer Table is the way to create a turntable like device in a rectangular space See Transfer Tables 8 Convert to Polygon creates a closed polygon in place of a rectangle You might do this is to create a trapezoid or other four sided figure start with a rectangular polygon and adjust corners 9 Delete Polygon Segment removes a single segment from a polyline or polygon In the latter case the polygon becomes unclosed and unfilled Scenery Chooser The Scenery Chooser presents a gallery of scenery objects you can use on your layout Browse through the new High Quality set on your local drive or through the much larger collection on the web find the one you want and just drag It into your layout For details see Choosing Scenery 2 hg_background if 9 ho_details accesso E hq_industral buildinc ay hg stations servic 0 hq_track roadbed i hg_urban Scenery Properties When you right click an object and choose Properties it brings up the Scenery Properties dialog where you can view and edit the attributes of the object If there are multiple objects selected you edit their common attributes all at once The dialog has four tabs each describ
265. left corner of the layout is at the top left of the Paint window 6 Crop Use the Select tool to draw a rectangle just around the border of the layout then Edit Copy File New Edit Paste You should now have a picture of just the layout without desktop or other Surroundings 7 Save as PG or BMP Loading an Image To load an image file e Choose File Open e Open a file of type J PG J PEG BMP GIF PNG or TPG The image appears on the screen overlaid with a default grid Creating a New Blank Layout If you don t have an image and just want to sketch track on a blank screen start by creating a space with the dimensions you have in mind 1 Choose File New The New Layout dialog appears SIZE Scale HG Dimensions Height 4 0 Layout inches width o 2 Ifyou wanta layout of standard size and dimensions try the Size drop down and see if your choice Is there The program offers a collection of standard layout arrangements including various NTrak modules If you choose one of the standard sizes you can skip the rest of this section and just click OK OR 3 Choose the scale you want in the Scale drop down and enter the dimensions you want in the Height and Width boxes Click OK to dismiss the dialog and create the new drawing space You can select the units you want to use for display and data entry using the drop down at the right Units you select in this drop down will become the defaults throughout the
266. lete Operational possibilities you can run around the loop or divert to Gills Landing or Swampscott Chop at tunnel entrances To have the train to hide as it goes through the tunnel under Telegraph Hill you need to isolate that portion of track and mark ithidden You can isolate a portion of track by chopping it where you want the ends using temporary straight segments Drag a segment from an arbitrary point and release at the upper tunnel entrance When you release a Switch is formed as shown at right Repeat with another segment at the lower entrance as shown in progress at right 1 T Pikki i 3 Chyrter Ary hi Wi f Haad IR ee Ebay Sa Delete the chop tracks You now have two unwanted straights and two switches at the tunnel entrances The next step is to get rid of them Point to the lower segment so it highlights as shown at right then press the Del key The segment and switch disappear Repeat with the upper segment You have now created two junctions such that the portion of the curve between tunnel entrances is an Isolated section of track al ae i Chyrier flay a AAH y bath Hide the tunnel Position the cursor on the tunnel track so it highlights and press the right mouse button You see the track context menu as shown Choose Hidden This marks the selected track section and displays itas
267. line in RRU 1 RRU 0 1 in HO Default is 10 a fairly thin line Scenery Properties Styles Text Properties Text properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See Editing Scenery Properties Styles Default text style Called from arrow button on Text tool AL See Scenery Styles Align Center W Rotate text with image Wrap tes Cancel Apply Help ve i This dialog is used to add text to an object and specify its style You may enter a single line or multi line block of text to be displayed in the box aligned left right or center If multiple objects are selected the text is applied to each individually If a grouped object is selected the text is displayed on top of the group Dialog controls The text string to be displayed on the object Enter whatever Text you want It to say Check this box to have text displayed on the object In order to see text on the object you must both check this box and enter Show text a text string o If this box is unchecked the rest of the dialog is inactive Click to bring up the Font dialog to change the text font and style Change the settings so the sample looks the way you want then click OK The fonts shown in the dialog are those available on your machine They may not display the same way on another machine Font The size you choose is not meaningful in an absolute sense see note b
268. ling works over an arbitrary selection for best results you should be careful to select a contiguous set of tracks between two well chosen endpoints with no switches in the selection If you try itand don t like the results use Edit gt Undo The distance between parallel tracks is taken from the global roadbed width set in File gt Preferences gt Road tab gt Roadbed gt Width Note Make Double Track is dimmed unless you have already selected some track i e turned it blue It won t work just to point at a track and press the right mouse button Curved Track Like the curves in Linn Westcott s book all curves in TrackLayer are circular if you want splines or spiral easements you will have to draw them by hand using short straight segments A curve is created by three objects a circle and two legs like a horseshoe The circle establishes the radius and position of the curve while the legs establish the end points and the approach tracks TrackLayer goes to some trouble to help you make nice curves The program keeps the leg segments exactly tangent to the circles both when drawing and editing This chapter describes how to draw and edit curves and circles Drawing a Curve Editing a Curve Loops and S Curves Helices Drawing Curves To draw a curve first you place the circle then attach the legs If you do this right the circle disappears and a curved track is generated between the leg segments To dr
269. ll change its rotation angle The operation is reversible with Edit gt Undo Redo If the object has a bitmap image the image is flipped in memory without modifying the image file Grouping and Ungrouping Some operations such as moving or setting properties work on several selected objects at once Other operations such as resizing or rotating work only on a single object Grouping is a way of turning several objects into a single one so the latter type of operation can be performed on the group e TO group two or more objects select at least two objects by shift clicking or using the Scenery Edit tool then click Group fl The selected objects become a single grouped object with a Single set of drag handles which can be manipulated the same way as any other single object Note that the Group tool is dimmed unless you have at least two objects selected e To ungroup a grouped object select at least one grouped object then click Ungroup it The grouped object reverts to a set of individual objects Grouping can go more than one level deep that is a grouped object may contain other grouped objects In this case you have to ungroup more than once to go all the way back to the initial separate objects Changing Display Order If multiple objects overlap on the layout two factors determine which one appears in front a all objects in the background layer are behind all objects in the foreground and b within a layer objects are dra
270. llapse folders groups click the sign at the left end of the folder group row Add New Grid context menu grid control and list management commands Right click a row to see the menu Duplicate Delete Commands are Sonera Add New create a new empty row in the same folder as the selection Choosing this command creates a new industry with a generic name and empty load lists then activates it for editing When Field Chooser you are finished editing the new entry validate and commit the changes by clicking OK or selecting a different record in the list Collapse All Items Group By Box BA Column Auto Resize Duplicate create a new industry with the same properties as the selection except for the name which is modified to become unique Duplicate works like Add New except that it copies data into the new record Of course the new row can be edited as required Delete delete the selected industry from the list You are prompted to confirm before deleting Note The above commands are dimmed if the selected row Is an industry in the current layout folder These can only be edited in Station Properties on the corresponding stations Expand All Items show all rows within each folder All rows are expanded by default when the dialog comes up Note that within each folder may not be the right wording if you have grouped the grid on some other field Collapse All Items collapse all folder contents and show only fol
271. load Missing Items Download Missing Items Clear Download Cache on Scenery folder only Remove local cached files force re download What s New Settings on What s New folder only Set cutoff date see What s New List Menu Open Download selected scenery folder then switch to local tab Icon View Show scenery objects as icons Icon View eee List View Show scenery objects in list form with status icons see Status Icons Track Checker For testing track and reporting layout condition Called trom menu commmand Tools gt Check Track Track error 3 Endpoint on track but no jun Track error Superimposed junctions i Track error 3 Superimposed junctions 3 ENRRWIL4s2 rrw Linked track E Double dick to zoom to a numbered item Refresh Repair ID Help The Track Layout Check dialog checks your layout for track and train errors Use this dialog to check for mistakes while you are drawing a layout or after the drawing is finished Four columns are shown in the list box e Condition what the line is reporting error external link required car collection e No the track or junction number where the error occurred This item is blank for conditions other than track errors Double clicking on a row has no effect unless there is a track or junction number associated e Details nature of the error name of the linked file or other information e Extra when applicable an additional
272. look 4 Click Apply to apply the changes to the selected object s without taking down the dialog or OK to apply the changes and dismiss the dialog or Cancel to dismiss the dialog without applying the changes Any changes made in the Scenery Properties dialog can be undone using Edit Undo Animated Scenery Animated images in TrainP layer are little movies you can place around your layout These can be made to play continuously or on demand or automatically whenever a train passes a given spot You can choose from a supplied collection of animations small but growing or find many more by searching the web or create them in your favorite paint program They can be connected with sounds so that say a crossing signal will both move and clang as the train passes by To see animations in action check out this video animation demo About Animated Images An animated image is a new type of scenery object It can be moved resized rotated and styled just like any other but it has a special type of background consisting of a series of frames each with its own image and duration These are in one of two formats Animated gif the well known animation files you see all over the web These can be loaded directly into scenery objects in TrainP layer Image sequence ANM file a Series of separate files for each image plus a text file with extension anm listing the frames and durations The image files may be in any popular
273. lowing scales are supported in TrainP layer Scale Name Scale Ratio Grid Spacing inches Z 220 o ee N 160 a 6 When you choose one of these scales in Layout Properties it does not change the appearance or proportions of the layout but dictates its overall size and the sizes of the car models Scale Ratio gives the relationship between a given scale and actual size a real locomotive is 87 times the size of an HO model of it Adjusting the View Commands on the View menu allow you to modify the appearance of the layout and the screen e Fit To Window resizes the layout to fit within the current window frame This is a toggle when the command Is checked then any time you resize the window the layout resizes with it if you uncheck it or zoom or unzoom the layout does not resize Fit To Window Rotate Layout oom Refresh e Rotate Layout turns the layout 90 degrees in either direction See details below 4uto Follow e Zoom moves you closer to the layout for a more detailed view or further away for a wider view See below for methods of zooming Loco Sounds e Refresh L redraws the screen and straightens up any crooked trains e Auto Follow is a toggle switch when on the view automatically scrolls to keep the selected train in sight as it moves This command is also available on the context menu you see when you right click anywhere on the layout Auto follow becomes automatically disabled if you scroll th
274. ls h Instructions Full text move instruction same as displayed in Schedule Window h CariD Internal numeric ID of car h Train Name of train containing car if train is named h TrainiD Internal numeric ID of train containing car h Notes General car class Edit y in this column means the item can be edited This applies only if Grid Editable is checked in the context menu Hidden h in this column means the item is hidden by default at install time To see it drag it onto the grid from the Field Chooser 1 Action verbs are Set out take car to interchange Return take car to yard Deliver take car to industry loaded Send take car to industry empty Pick up move to car s location 2 Location is a station name or a track location Car in station means the car is within the bounds of the station at means any car of the train Is in the station near means Car Is on a neighboring track to the station If none of these apply then the track location is given 3 In order to complete a move and see an X in the Done column the car must reach the destination station and then its train must come to a stop Once a move is completed the X remains in the column until a you clear it by hand set grid editable then erase the X or b a new switchlist is generated 4 If you show Instructions then you will need a wide column but you will no longer need the Schedule Window You might want to close that and dock this in its place wide a
275. me definition used elsewhere in TrainP layer Two or more cars coupled together and not coupled to a train is a cut To name a train or cut You can name a train in either of two ways e Right click any car in a train or cut either on the layout or in a train window and choose Name Entera name in the prompt dialog and click OK The title of the dialog indicates whether you are naming a train or a Cut Entername jEngine Coal Cancel e Or Right click a car choose Properties go to the Train tab and enter a name r Layout Properties Train ID 48 Cme box freight Default car collection for this layout i ES Et The name you supply may get passed around as cars are coupled or uncoupled In general for a train the name stays with the engine for a cut it applies to that specific set of cars whenever they are coupled together in any order and not coupled to any other cars But there are other details to consider as spelled out in the Naming Rules below To see train naming in action 1 Name some trains and cuts on your layout 2 Use View gt Ops to bring up the Cars window 3 If the window does not include the column Train right click the grid bring up the Field Chooser and drag the Train column onto the grid header The train column shows the train name if any for every car 4 Do some couplings and uncouplings Note how train names change in the grid as you perform the moves Train Nami
276. ment in the call Here is a Simple example of a subroutine which takes a single argument It doesn t do anything particularly useful but the point of making it into a subroutine is that it could be made fancier if needed Subroutine Sitlandwailt lt secs gt comment at first line of subroutine tells how to call echo sitting for 1 secs using passed arg in a string after 0 0 1 wait number of seconds given by arg 1 then return These lines become a subroutine if stored as a text file sitandwait txt inthe TP Scripts folder A proc is a type of subroutine which is not defined in an external file but in a section of another script Using proc and endproc statements within a script you define a callable block of code and give ita name proc sitandwait defines proc and gives it aname echo content as above after 0 0 41 endproc ends definition This becomes callable once the script containing itis run Including it within the master script guarantees this lf either of the above is available a script can then say call sitandwait 5 to cause 5 seconds of idleness Display Strings The term display string DS means a lengthy string for conveying information to the user or to a file Each of the following commands takes a ds as argument and all process it in exactly the same way ECHO ds NOTE ds SMSGBOX type ds SWRITE fname ds Display strings may contain references to variables User variables are prefixed by
277. mmand works for one drag only it automatically reverts to unchecked after each use If you change your mind choose Zoom On Drag again from the menu to toggle it off N Fe Oy Ul BR UW Auto View Restore New in version 5 2 when you save a layout it saves the window size and position along with the current zoom and view settings The next time you open the layout it comes up looking the same way you left it Rotating a Layout Any layout can be rotated a quarter turn in either direction Both the track and the background image are rotated and both can be saved in the new orientation To rotate a layout choose View gt Rotate Layout gt direction The layout rotates 90 degrees in the indicated direction Repeat for 180 270 etc To save the layout in the new orientation choose File Save or File Save As Both the rotated layout and the rotated image file are saved The default action in both cases is to overwrite the original background image You are warned about this and given an Opportunity to save the image to a different file Fit To Window zoom In zoom Qut Notes 1 If you are running Windows 98 rotation is done a pixel at a time and is very slow The status bar gives an indication of the progress If you tire of waiting press ESC to abort the rotation This does not apply to NT XP 2000 Vista or later systems 2 Rotation is not undoable To undo rotate back in the opposite direction Doub
278. modify the layout Merge Background Saves the background and scenery to a graphics file swaps it in as a new background optionally deletes the scenery and offers to save the modified layout Specify an output path for the new image file E L21_image jpa L 1_image jpg Tile exists you will be prompted to overwnte Image Features Select the display features to be drawn in the exported image Selections made here will not affect the layout on the screen The initial choices depend on the mode For Export Image choices match the features on display in the current view For Export Background choices are Background and Scenery only Image Size Specify the size of the exported image The default choice middle of the slider is the current size of the background image if any if there is no background the choice is based on the size of the layout Move to the right to generate a larger file with higher resolution left for a smaller file You may need to experiment for best results If you are not merging scenery there is no reason to export a file larger than the current background if you export ties and roadbed you will want a larger file for a sharper image However choose too large and you may exceed memory capacity so you will be alerted and required to choose a smaller size Choose features to be displayed in the image file Settings for Export Image mode Tracks M Background Trains lv
279. n 1 Choose a car collection in the tree and click to open it A car collection is shown as a folder with a locomotive icon When you open a collection it is downloaded to a temporary directory called the cache then shown in the list window Once a collection is downloaded to the cache it remains there for future access until you a use the Clear Download Cache command or b choose Refresh on the collection 2 Click one of the cars in the list window You See its side and top view in the preview window 3 To add this collection to your local set click Install This copies the files from the cache directory to their permanent location in your Cartypes directory then switches to the Local Car Chooser so you can add them to your layout In the web car chooser unlike others status icons are shown on the folders in the tree instead of on individual items in the list Decorations on the folder icons indicate whether you have a local copy of a car collection or whether there is a recent or newer version available on the web For more see Status Icons Tree Contents Cartypes British Folder of British car collections Cartypes Defaults Folder of car collections which can be used as default cars see Default Cars Cartypes European Folder of European car collections German French Cartypes Premium Folder of premium collections Available only with Premium license Cartypes Standard Folder of standard car collections available to all users
280. n It crosses a junction Trigger id drop down choose the station name or junction id where animation is to start and stop The drop down shows either Station names or junction numbers depending on the trigger type choice Preview window shows a thumbnail of the selected image For the moment the preview is static and does not move but this may change in a future version Normally in the Background tab of Scenery Properties you can choose a different image for a scenery object However what you cannot do Is change the background from static to animated or vice versa If you try this an alert tells you it is not allowed Creating Your Own Animations If you want to create your own animations one method is to obtain a program capable of making animated gifs Many such programs are available Adobe ImageReady CyD GIF Studio Microsoft GIF Animator several shareware titles but TrainPlayer offers an easier way create a series of images give them suitable filenames and import them with one Click into a single object A series of images is a set of files in the same folder with names ending in underscore then sequential numbers starting with 1 e g flagman_1 png flagman_2 png flagman_3 png Using Load Bitmap if you browse to a file whose name ends with 1 and there are other files with the same name but different numbers the program will prompt and ask if you wish to create an animated image from the Series like this i a4 G
281. n area on the layout Shown when chooser is called from Sound browse button in Station Properties below right Hom ime Tree Menu Open Open Open folder to show list of sounds Refresh Refresh Reload folder contents from disk Dimmed on root folder of tree Find Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Find Next Go to next hit after Find fee Properties Display folder properties Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Export Filenames List Menu Open Choose selected sound take down dialog For more information about sounds see Horns and Sounds also Stations Local Car Chooser The local car chooser is for selecting cars and adding them to the layout This chooser is also used to create new car collections E _ se Or For general information about choosers see Choosers To Add a Car to the Layout 1 Choose a car collection in the tree and click to open it A car collection is shown as a folder with a locomotive icon When you open a collection you see its cars in the list window 2 Click one of the cars in the list window You see its side and top view in the preview window 3 To add this car to the layout click Add Car or double click the icon The car is added to the currently selected train at the current position of the insert pin If there is no train selected the car is added to a random track The car chooser
282. n only change by moving the car e Selecta row and choose Delete from the context menu This deletes the row from the switchlist e Choose Add New from the context menu This creates a new empty row at the bottom of the list To fill in the new row choose a car and a destination using drop downs in the Car and To At columns e Selecta row and choose Duplicate This creates a copy of the row You can and should then change the car or destination in the row itis not a good idea to have two Switchlist rows which duplicate of each other After modifying the switchlist use File gt Save or Save As to save the layout and retain the modifications Color Codes When you are presented with a new switchlist it helps to visualize the final location of what you are being asked to deliver Color coding helps you do this In a generated switchlist each destination is assigned a color All cars bound for that destination are then assigned the same color You can then look at the layout and see your job at a glance move the purple cars to the purple station orange cars to the orange etc switchlist Action Car Tov At Load Retum X10 Hamilton Y tools E sent cer Deliver G61 Ingersoll M coiled Deliver F63 Ingersoll M coiled vend X60 GSW Inc Empty Por i J p 4 m r Fi F Fas Hamilton Y Empty After an ops generation color codes are automaticall
283. n the example below we are creating the new collection at the top level right under Cartypes 4 Right click and choose Import from F older below left ERE Carype ee Open ial ats Fj Refresh m Prewitt ae H Ste Find Next a Properties Export Filenames Import from Folder 5 Inthe Browse for Folder dialog navigate to the folder where the images are stored in this case My Cars H 0 Standard A new collection is created in your tree and under the TrainPlayer Cartypes folder The image files are copied from the original folder into the new You see the new collection in your chooser tree above right ready to use Large Car Images If the selected collection has large car images they are displayed underneath the side and top images as shown here Mea FMC Plug Door Box Grand Tark Wester ee Sree j fm F Green Bay and Westem F ma a SOO p New Oreans Public Belt Stockton Terminal an ore E iit Done Browse Help For optimum viewing enlarge the right panel the large image looks best when drawn full size FF FF a PIES 2 AZ 2ta What s New in Version 5 2 Drag Trains by Hand Hands on operation Point to a train press and drag it along the track just like a railroader s fingertip on the garage layout Move the train in either direction any speed Throw switches as you go using the space bar Bump into a
284. n the layout can be serviced by the available cars If your layout has a coal mine you should have some hoppers somewhere Ops Toolbar Access to Ops is through the Tools gt Ops menu at right or the Ops Toolbar T Bis Generate Ops 1E 2 elt Resize Rescale E Clear Ops EFA Show Tooltips B View Ops Rewind Ops Customize What these commands do Route Finder Options Ops Setup Wizard Generate Ops Creates a random switchlist If the layout is not equipped with stations and industries calls up the Ops Setup Wizard l Rewind Ops Allows you to start the same operating session over Rewinds the position of all trains and cars to the beginning of the session This is useful if you want to better your time or try new methods or if you made a mistake Clear Ops Erases the current Ops session and clears all windows Route Finder Finds all track paths between any given pair of junctions or stations Brings up a dialog where you choose locations and view results See Route Finder ops Setup Wizard Leads you through a step by step procedure for setting up your layout and generating a switchlist The wizard covers all the major steps one by one with explanations and choices along the way See Ops Setup Wizard El View Operations Shows or hides the Ops Windows a set of docking windows which come up automatically when you generate a session This command is a toggle to show or hide them all at once V
285. n the screen the same as the model in the Walthers box Maximum magnification Is 2 1 Other ways to zoom e use the zoom buttons on the main toolbar AA Each click enlarges or reduces by a fixed ratio e use Zoom commands on the layout context menu gt Right click a spot on the layout and choose a command generally the Zoom From resulting view will center on the point you clicked Zoom d 50 zoom On Drag 100 e To percent zooms to a specific magnification 100 Is al 150 defined somewhat arbitrarily as that zoom which causes grid Auto Follow ea lines to be one inch apart on the screen At 50 they are a Running Sounds ii half inch apart at 200 two inches In other words these 400 commands move your vantage point to one ofasetoffixed ue a Sg eet distances above the layout e Fit to Window scales so the entire layout fits into the frame window same as the command on the View menu does e Zoom On Drag zooms in to an area defined by a user drawn rectangle This command is available only in TrackLayer To use Activate the Edit or the Track tool The command is dimmed if any other tool is in use Right click anywhere on the layout and choose Zoom On Drag This checkmarks the item on the menu and puts you In a special mode temporarily Press and drag to define a selection rectangle around the area you want to zoom in on When you release the drag the indicated area will zoom to fill the window The co
286. n the switchlist is likely to send them both to the same place 6 Selects one of the destinations as the end point of the trip and creates a scheduled train to go there 7 Creates a switchlist from the car destination choices and attaches it to the scheduled train 8 Assigns a load and a loaded empty status to each car in the list Destination industries are taken into account when assigning loads you can take a loaded car to an industry which receives that load or an empty car to one which ships it but not vice versa 9 Displays the results One new row goes in the scheduled train window cars and destinations become rows in the Switchlist window and a set of text instructions is created and displayed in the schedule window Color codes are enabled and displayed Car labels are shown on the cars involved in the switchlist All ops windows are brought up if not already on display The ops generator replaces any existing scheduled train and switchlist with the generated one If you undo an ops generation it goes back to the previous version Ops Windows There is a lot of data associated with ops and thus a new type of window for viewing and interacting with it an Ops Window a dockable window containing an Car Class interactive grid The grids come from BCGSoft and are quite full featured like miniature spreadsheets In the current version there are two ops windows one showing the current switchlist the other the inventor
287. nP layer site has thousands of files including layouts layout backgrounds car collections scenery objects and sounds Typically the installer brings you only a small set of files Most of the content you use comes by download from the web and accumulates over time To help you manage this content both local and web the program has special dialogs called choosers which organize the data into trees and allow you to browse preview images For details see Choosers Where do you find the TrainP layer files on your computer The answer to this question has changed over the history of the program as Windows conventions have evolved In the latest version most of your data files are found in your application data folder a system defined location on disk which depends on your operating system As of Version 3 3 1 you can find this location easily by choosing the new command Open Data Folder from the File menu This opens Windows Explorer to your TrainP layer directory which looks more or less like this this one from Windows 7 F i CiUsers lt user App Data Roaming rainPlayer oF Include in library Share with New p TrainPlayer E Name Cartypes nyp uid sounds d0 Layouts ra gt Layouts hi Scenery a di SCENEry dO Sounds n di Cartypes Application Data carcodesd tet Contacts ss _excludes tst Cookies choosers33 xml DQ Neskton E If you are Windows savvy you can rearrange many of the files in this di
288. nced layout data Path Background Image Full pathname of the layout rrw file This item is not editable to change the path save the layout to a different location Pathname of the background image file blank if none To remove the background Image from a layout erase the contents of this box To change to a different image enter a filename or use the browse button to browse for a different image file Caution it is not recommended to change the background image file If you change from one background to another it Is likely that the track will no longer match the background the size and shape of the background will be wrong and other problems will arise You are warned about this when you dismiss the dialog Background Color Module Open for read only Background color of the layout A color button appears on the dialog if the layout is new or has no background image Click to bring up the color chooser to select a new background color for the layout The default color is set in Preferences Style tab this applies to all new layouts The color you choose here in Layout Properties applies only to the current layout Trick choose black as the background color and it will reset the layout to the default color If you really want a black background choose a nearly black shade instead Indicates whether the layout is designed to be used in a modular layout and if so what kind of module See Module Tags
289. nd E Whistle echo wav Sound Cloudy day whistle wav For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Sound A web sound chooser shows a subfolder of sounds available on the web which folder depends on whether you are choosing an engine horn sound or a layout sound 1 Click the folder in the tree to show the list of sounds it contains 2 Click a sound in the list to select it 3 Click the icon on the right to hear the sound 4 Ifyou like it click Download to download the sound and add it to your local collection After the download the chooser switches to the Local Sound Chooser and highlights the downloaded sound Engine running sounds steam chuffs diesel grinds are available on the web but not through a chooser These are Toe Freight downloaded when you choose Download from the Running menu in Train Properties shown at right You only see this choice BE Running Download on the menu if there are running sounds on the web you do not already have in your local collection Running Download Tree Contents Sounds Loco Engine horn bell whistle sounds Shown when chooser is called from Other on Horn menu in Train Properties Sounds to play when the train passes an area on the layout Shown when chooser Is called from Sound browse button in Station Sounds Layout Properties Tree Menu Open Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Always dimme
290. nd Point Set rewind point from curent situation M Trigger on Drag Clear rewind point reset to initial situation dragging train by hand can start junction action Save current train switch situation to file Load situation from saved file Text font size 16 This tab is a standard dialog not the list text style of the others Ithas a set of buttons dealing with the Rewind Point and these other items Trigger on Drag if checked means a junction action can be triggered by dragging an appropriate train across the junction by hand If unchecked the train must be driven using the throttle in order for the action to trigger Default is OFF unchecked to prevent accidental triggerings as you drag trains around the layout For related info see Working with unction Actions and unction Action Editor Text font size size in points of the Courier font used in Script Central text windows Script Editor unction Action Editor and Schedule Window Default is 16 The Rewind Point A rewind point is a snapshot of train and switch positions If a rewind point has been saved then after a session of moving trains around you can click Rewind on the script toolbar or menu to put the trains and switches back where they started This is useful when you are developing or running scripts since a script relies on trains being in certain locations when it starts up There is only a single rewind point associated with a layout even if there ar
291. ne will be created automatically Fo cuana a modda lac chek Add then deze modules ma this eoace 2 Choose Module Manager from the File menu This brings up the Module Manager with a blank workspace lid Featured Layouts a Layouts ii 3 Click Add This brings up the Layout Chooser By default it opens to the NTrak Components folder 4 Position the two windows Side by side so you can work with both together 5 Click in the Layout Chooser to select NT 6 foot a plain N scale module template six feet long 6 Press the selected row and drag it into the Module Manager workspace It appears as a framed rectangle filling most of the workspace with a label showing it as module 1 In the assembly a No Mame s NT 1400 NT Hoo NTrak Hog comer Trak 4400 comer k Layouts 101 NT 12 foot i Modules NT 14oot Fla HO q NT 24foot 7 Inthe Layout Chooser click Iti NTrak ia oe sai ar to select NT 4 foot Fis Components aa a Eain Advanced NT Hoot n d Scenic Plans NT Hoot iz NT Hoot s 8 Press and drag the selected row into the Module Manager Keep the mouse button down for the next step 9 Position to the right hand edge of the 6 foot module until you see a narrow highlight box 10 Release the mouse button You now have two modules joined end to end 11 Drag in the NTrak 4 foot corner and drop it at the right 12 Drag in anothe
292. ne has properties for the overall collection others refer to a specific car type within it The Load tab appears only when a loadable car is active Car Type Tab This tab is for viewing and editing a single car type It has VCR style back forward buttons to let you move to other types in the collection The current type is the one on display in this tab The instructions in this section apply if you are building a car collection or adding a new type for most collections all the data is already filled in Berries A E LEST mAN Car Type images Collection Load images Resizable car panel showing side and top views Drag the divider to enlarge one side Name Name of the car type Enter a short descriptive name suitable for display on the icon in the car chooser Class AAR Size Units Show load Arrows lt gt Index Add Delete Images Tab General category of car Choose one unless you are assigning an AAR code in which case the class will be automatically set to match the code For more see Car Classes below To choose an AAR code from the dialog select AAR Codes the last item on the drop down menu Note if you want a car of this type to have power choose Diesel or Steam as Its class A one to three letter code specifying the car type in detail You can either type a code into this box or choose from a list See A
293. new wizard leads you through the steps of the process To export or merge choose File gt Export Image This brings up the Image Export Wizard Image Export Wizard Welcome to the TrainPlayer Image Export Wizard This wizard saves a picture of the layout to a E F i graphics file either for etemal use or to replace the Welcome screen i ey current layout background Introduces the wizard Shows the current layout background image if any with its nan 7 we a E r E size in pixels Reports whether the layout has scenery and if so how much This layout has no scenery objects Click Next to proceed Export Mode Choose Export Image if you wish to create a graphics file containing an image of the layout This mode does not modify the layout Choose Merge Background if you want to replace the current background image with a new one containing both background and scenery In this mode you will be offered to have the scenery deleted after export Output File Specify the output path for the graphics file Use the Browse button to bring up a file dialog for choosing a path The text box shows the full path Below that for convenience is the filename and extension plus an indication of whether the file is new or already exists The initial path offered is unique it does not match an existing file Indicate how the new image file will be used Export Image Saves a picture of the layout to a graphics file Does not
294. next switch automatically Cancel Defaults Help Switch display Check if you want to see highlight squares on the two tracks forming the open route through a switch The default color is green but you can change it using the color button Open lights Check if you want highlights showing the other track Closed lights s not on the open route Default color is red change with color button Highlighting Distance to frog Light size Switch operation Open lights Closed lights Highlighting Distance to frog Light size Barrel through Color of the highlight indicating when the mouse Cursor is pointing to the frog center of a switch and can be thrown Note if you are in TrackLayer this color applies only when the Run tool is active Distance in arbitrary units between the center of the Switch and the open closed light Size of highlight square in arbitrary units Check if you want to see highlight squares on the two tracks forming the open route through a switch The default color is green but you can change It using the color button Check if you want highlights showing the other track S not on the open route Default color is red change with color button Color of the highlight indicating when the mouse Cursor is pointing to the frog center of a switch and can be thrown Note if you are in TrackLayer this color applies only when the Run tool is active Distance in arbitrary units b
295. ng Rules It is not really necessary for you to know the details of how names move around Our goal is to retain any name you provide and make sure it shows up where you would expect The particulars are as follows 1 When you first open a layout any old style names from previous versions are erased 2 When you name a train you are actually naming the engine 3 The name of a train does not change when cars are coupled to it or uncoupled from it 4 Ifallthe cars are uncoupled from an engine the engine retains the name of the train 5 Cuts of cars may be named in the same manner as trains The name is specific to the cut of cars 6 Ifa named cut of cars is coupled to a named train the train name Is preserved 7 Ifa named cut is uncoupled from a train Its original name returns This rule allows a train to move a cut of Cars around a yard without erasing the name of the cut 8 lfanamed cutis coupled to unnamed cars the cut name is lost It will come back if the named cut becomes again isolated 9 Iftwo named trains are coupled the new train takes the name of the onger train For example if Helper 2345 with one car is coupled to The Denver Flyer with ten cars the resulting train is called The Denver Flyer 10 When two named trains uncouple each retains its original name Thus when Helper 2345 uncouples from The Denver Flyer its name returns 11 Copying and pasting a named train or named cut
296. ng a parsable character where the meaning of that depends on the context In a function call an unquoted string must not contain the character because that would terminate the call In a comma delimited list a string must be quoted if it contains comma Examples call Swrite c myfile txt a string with paren lt WRONG call Swrite c myfile txt a string with paren lt OK 4 Around a multi line text block This is the only way to define such a block by enclosing it in double quotes and including carriage returns echo this is a string with multiple lines and a blank Lina Note that if you want the string itself to include a quote you must double it echo string with embedded quote Table 1 TPL Command Reference This table shows the command vocabulary as it stood at some point prior to release For a more up to date listing consult the Reference tab in Script Central Contents of that tab can be exported for printing if desired Goto lt abel gt jump to statement after given label Autopause lt Secs gt turn on pauses of given duration during train movements If lt expr gt lt comp op gt lt expr gt compare two expressions branch based on result Else begin alternate block after IF Elseif lt expr gt lt comp op gt lt expr gt evaluate alternate after IF Endif end IF block While lt expr gt lt comp op gt lt expr gt compare two expressions execute or skip next block based on result Endw
297. ng commands on toolbars Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Lategones Commands Cy New oy Lar Upern ub Upen Layout Close el Save Track fave S I D mrik Ci iba Description This tab allows you to add or remove buttons on toolbars To add a button to a toolbar locate the command in this dialog and drag it onto the toolbar where you want It to go To remove a button from a toolbar drag it off the toolbar and drop it anywhere this only works when the Customize dialog is visible Dialog controls Select a menu to see its commands on the right Or choose All Categories Commands to see the complete list of commands from all menus Note the New Menu item in the list is not useful Locate a command in this list point to it press the left mouse button and drag the command onto any toolbar If the command does not have an icon the toolbar button will show the command name Commands Customize Toolbars For choosing toolbars to be displayed Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbars Reset All Train Tools Help Close Dialog controls Choose which toolbars are to be visible Most can also be made Toolbars visible from View gt Toolbars on the menu Reset the selected toolbar to factory settings This synchronizes Reset the toolbar wi
298. ng movements of other trains or turning control over to them Flow commands for looping branching choosing different courses of action based on conditions Set Let commands for creating variables and assigning values UI commands for taking input from or providing feedback to the user Subroutine commands for calling and defining subroutines plus special commands for use within them User interface commands for communicating with the user both input and output Most commands consist of a single verb followed by one or more arguments telling what to act on or what to do In the table below arguments are indicated by angle brackets you Supply the value not the brackets Optional arguments are enclosed in braces if omitted these take on default values speed 20 set speed of script owner to 20 start moving if stationary echo nove to user display message in output window throw J33 1 throw switch at junction 35 to position 1 drive Broadway Limited begin block of statements to be directed to another train A complete list of commands is given below A better one is found in the Reference tab of Script Central Menu Commands When you select any command from a menu you see a cascading series of names starting with a top level menu Write these names down one after another and you have a command you can use In a script Menu names must be separated by spaces multi word names must be quoted Examples file open bring up Open F
299. nges to a double headed arrow press and drag to move that side or corner Hold down Shift as you drag to resize the object without changing its proportions Flip Horizontal e Rotate point to the upper right handle cursor changes to a circle press and drag to rotate the object Select All Ctrl A Flip Vertical Save to Scn File 6 Set properties To change the attributes of the object color style fill eee text etc point to it press the right mouse button and select z Properties from the context menu as shown above This brings up n e the Scenery Properties dialog described in detail under Editing Scenery Convert to Polygon The style you see before editing properties is the default style for the line fill and text If you want the object to come up with a different Style edit the defaults in the Scenery Styles dialog Drawing Polygons For most objects a single press and drag operation creates the object For polylines and polygons a further steps are required as follows 1 Choose the Line Polygon tool Press and drag to create a line segment 3 With the cursor still positioned at the end of the first segment cursor changes to press and drag to create another segment Since the two segments share an endpoint they are automatically fused to create a single two segment polyline object 4 Repeat step 3 to extend the polyline 5 Finally for a closed polygon draw a segment connecting the t
300. nother train and it couples click between cars to uncouple The view auto scrolls as you drag so you don t lose sight of your car You can carry out a whole switching session without ever touching the control panel More Chris Pedersen Cars Nearly a thousand great new cars from railroad artist Chris Pedersen with detailed full size images and prototype paint schemes based on actual HO models Locomotives freight and passenger cars from Athearn Walthers and others decorated for ATSF BN Chessie and dozens of others For information and screen shots see the Chris Pedersen page on our website nF ry i Fe easy or Ce ee To provide the full benefit of Chris artwork 5 2 introduces features for displaying large car images along with easy ways to browse through them For details see Large Car Images The Chris Pedersen Car collection is available for a nominal price To buy use Purchase Upgrade or Check For Updates on the Help menu New Properties Scheme The Properties dialog in 5 2 is modeless meaning it stays on the screen and updates as you Click around the layout This is handy for say browsing through your inventory of cars especially if you have the Pedersen collection and can see large images Properties changes are now undoable Combo boxes and controls have been reworked for better operation More Handy Improvements Auto Save your layout is quietly backed up every so often so you don t lose w
301. ns About the Grid Adjusting the Grid Resizing and Rescaling Straight Track and Switches Drawing Straight Track and Switches Editing Track Special Track Curved Track Drawing Curves Editing a Curve Loops and S Curves Helices Turntables and Transfer Tables Creating a Turntable Creating a Transfer Table Scenery Toolkit About Scenery railroading dules About Modules About Module dular Layouts yout Tutorial The Module Manager Module Manager Settings Welcome to TrainPlayer TrainPlayer simulates operating a model railroad layout on the computer It is designed for all types of model railroad fan from the one who has built a railroad empire in the basement to the one who dreams of doing so to the one who never will but just likes to run trains Opening a layout file in TrainPlayer is like walking into a room and finding a fully built model railroad with clean tracks attractive scenery a couple of trains and a control panel sitting in the corner You nudge the speed dial and one of the trains starts to move You form a smile and crank up the speed Welcome to TrainP layer TrainP layer works with pictures of track plans which have been specially prepared by the addition of electronic tracks The pictures might be renderings by Kalmbach artists or digital outout from your favorite CAD program or scanned in drawings made with pencil and paper A set of features known as Tr
302. ns can be performed other ways It also allows enabling Yard Mode a way to set of eo Forward Reverse both speed and direction with a single gesture In Yard Mode the speed range is divided in Enable Yard Mode ca Uncouple half with zero in the middle as shown above moving the slider away from zero increases Te speed crossing zero changes direction Horn i a Load Unload Default controls in the panel are Forward reverse rocker switch click to change the direction of train movement Speed display shows current train speed green if forward yellow if reverse in current units MPH or kp h To set the speed double click the display so it converts to an edit box enter a value then press Enter To change units use the Metric checkbox in Preferences gt General Speed controls on resizable plate Red light glows yellow when train is moving in reverse glows red briefly while pressed Click to stop train Green light glows green when train is moving forward If train is not moving click to start Slower button click or press and hold to reduce speed Faster button click or press and hold to increase speed Slider drag right for faster left for slower Click a point on the scale to go to that setting Applies to panel in normal mode or in yard mode when speed slider is right of center In yard mode with slider left of center moving it further left or clicking increases speed in reverse
303. nter a new value to change the orientation or enter 0 to return the object to normal Specifies whether the object sits above or below track and trains Check this box if you want the object to appear on top so that track Is obscured and trains disappear as they travel beneath as shown here Uncheck the box to have the scenery at ground level with track and trains passing above It Note if the object has a non zero transparency setting see Background Properties and this box is checked then the trains will disappear but the track will be partially visible sy a D7 Toy i F i RSRSRS What s New in Version 6 1 Track To Scenery create scenery objects by drawing track convenient method of creating benchwork shapes see Track To Scenery Advances in Scripting greatly expanded access to car train and track properties new families of functions for managing objects strings files local variables new subroutine library See the Scripting Page on the web and the TPL page in this manual Scripted Layouts many new scripted layouts both educational and challenging see the Scripts and Puzzles folder in the Layout Chooser Many fixes and enhancements Improved Input box cars no longer go beyond end of track improved handling of Car Notes fixes and improvements in all scripting dialogs What Was New in 6 0 Advanced Scripting Now with a full fledged programming language layout based scripts Script C
304. nter problems with turntables in published layouts see Repairing a broken turntable below To create a turntable 1 Choose the Turntable Tool amp or Tools gt Turntable from the menu 2 Draw the circle Pointto the center press and drag to the desired radius Press the shift Key to move the circle instead of resizing It pA When you release the mouse button the bridge track appears automatically oriented at a random angle The Turntable Tool is automatically deselected and the Track Tool selected instead A 4 Draw a connecting track Start where you want the far end of the track press and drag in toward the circle When the circle highlights release You can do this in the other direction if you prefer start by highlighting the circle then draw outwards 5 When you release the connecting track snaps to be perpendicular to the circle rim 6 Test Double click anywhere on the rim of the circle The table should rotate until the bridge track is aligned with the connector then stop If the table just keeps rotating double click the rim again to stop it then see Repairing below To make a cross over If you want the engine to be able to drive straight across the turntable you must take care to make sure the connecting tracks are aligned Here s the best way 1 Draw the first connector as in steps 4 5 above 2 Rotate the table until it stops in the aligned position as in step 6 3 Point to the free
305. nto both the Car Type and Images tabs NEW ENTRY fill fields here and on Images tab sa eae Provide a short descriptive name of the new car type Name Class AAR Choose a car class or an AAR code Size Units Specify the car size length x width in the selected units Default Load Choose a load to be the default for this car type The OK button remains dimmed until you have entered all the necessary information On Cancel the new type is discarded and no change is made to the collection AAR Car Types Dialog An AAR code is a symbol for a specific type of car as explained under AAR Codes Every car and car type has one whether assigned by the program or by you as described here To assign an AAR code to a Car type 1 In the Class drop down choose the last item AAR Types List This brings up the AAR types in a separate list window electric flatcar auto rack car 1966 auto rack car 1950 1965 barrel rack car truck trailer 605 containers trailer depressed center flatcar log car general service flatcar coil car well car heavy duty flat gondola drop bottom gondola Th Generic dass _ crate cars lumber t containe trailers t bulldoze logs crate steel ba containe transfor covered ballast Each row has the AAR Code as defined in TrainPlayer a description of the car type the corresponding generic class and the default load for the c
306. o with this tool Routes are not saved anywhere or used by the ops generators In a future version we may make further use of this tool NOTE The Route Finder does not find the shortest or most efficient or most logistically effective route for you It finds ALL possible routes Subject to filters that you set The selection of the BEST route is up to you and depends on a number of factors in each Session Operations The TrainPlayer Operations System Ops was developed to answer the question you might find yourself asking after you ve opened a layout and run the trains around a while Now what On a real railroad you would report to the yard first thing in the morning punch in get your work orders from the dispatcher climb into your cab and head out to make money for the railroad On a club layout it s the same idea except for the early morning and the money parts But if you re an old guy sitting in front of a computer all by yourself there s nobody to tell you what to do you have to just make it up as you go along Until now that is Meet your new dispatcher TrainP layer Ops There is a lot of reading matter on this subject If you re not into reading skip to the Quick Start Otherwise glance through the chapter and see what you re In for About Ops How To Use Ops Switchlists Waybills Ops Generators Ops Windows Ops Setup Wizard About Ops TrainP layer Ops is a set of features designed to give you a feel for re
307. of HO models Medium size is now the standard for all default cars and for most new collections being built The 50 pixel size allows for quite a bit of detail without taking up too much screen space Every collection belongs to one of the three size types as shown under Image Type in the Images tab of the Car Collection Editor All cars in a single collection are of the same type However this does not mean your trains are restricted to a single type A train can contain a mixture of sizes for example this train has four 50 px cars followed by two small then two Pedersen 1 6 F E J j ff al PH ERRE 3 o i E o M a Mk E YF In this case the program applies some rules and attempts to scale the cars more or less uniformly For more about train side view scaling and what control you have over it see Train Control Bar Settings Car Panels A single display device called a car panelis used to display cars of all size types This panel appears in Car Properties and in several tabs of the Car Collection Editor It consists of two images Side image on the left top image on the right separated by a moveable divider All dialogs containing car panels are resizable so you can make the panel as large as you like then move the divider to make one size large relative to the other Both side and top view rescale accordingly Most car panels have a checkbox nearby allowing you to turn on and off the display of the load for loadable cars Car
308. om leg A onto the curve then you must also go clockwise from the curve onto B In other words when you draw the second segment don t orient it backwards as in the picture at right e Avoid crowds f you are working in a crowded area and a track end happens to lie near the rim of a circle then as soon as l you draw the first leg to that circle it will automatically form a curve ae with that track end TSS In the picture at right when you draw the tangent segment at the top green the curve will automatically connect to the track end at A whether you meantit to or not oe If this happens Undo and try a different approach draw the other A leg first or temporarily move the offending track end away from the circle e Watch the highlights Ifthe curve doesn t form automatically after you release the second leg it probably means you didn t get one leg close enough to the circle Be sure the circle is highlighted when you start or end drawing the leg segment Editing a Curve Editing curved track is like editing straight except a little trickier When you move a curve or a Straight track tangent to a curve the program adjusts connections points as you drag so as to maintain tangency Ifa curve is tied into a network of straight sections this can cause quite a bit of movement and if you attempt to move a curve too far track can become tangled To move a curve 1 Choose the Edit tool be 2 Click
309. on choices are limited Settings Ops generabon preferences Cars to move hio H 36 of available Cancel e Cars to be moved Sets the approximate number of cars to be involved in the switchlist This is the number of rows you will end up with in the switchlist assuming there are enough industries and cars around to generate this many To the right of the text box Is an Indication of the percentage of available loadable cars you are requesting Finish page Summarizes the results Click Finish to perform the ops generation and present the results or Cancel to abort without generating Ops Setup Wizard Finished with the TrainPiayer Ops Setup Wizard Stations Using existing stations Industries Using wasting indusines Train Comainmng carES353 Cars to move 10 Note if you generated stations or industries during the wizard clicking Cancel will not undo those Use Edit gt Undo if you want to revert back to the pre Wizard state or else close the layout without saving Scripting You ve worked out a particularly elegant sequence of moves in a dense yard and you d like to remember it so you can show it to your fellow operators on club night TrainPlayer can help by letting you capture program and play back operations using scripts little programs written in a language designed for running trains Advanced Scripting in 6 1 Scripting was introduced in TrainPlayer version 2 3 back in 2006
310. onnection and if the requested collection is available on our website If someone sends you a layout file and it requires a car collection not available on our website you will need to ask that person to send you the collection Or zip it up and send it to TrainPlayer so we can post it for general use Convert modify the layout so that it uses standard cars instead of the specified ones The modifications are saved the next time you save the layout Warning once you make this change to a layout it cannot be changed back The layout permanently forgets what car collection it was originally designed to use Default Car Sets When you are adding cars to a layout you have a big catalog of types to choose from Flipping through it in the Car Chooser Is straightforward but a bit of a job AS a convenient alternative you can use the menu or car bar to choose from a special collection called the default car set What Is a Default Set A default set is a collection with a full complement of the basic passenger freight and locomotive types all related by theme or era TrainPlayer comes with several of these You can choose one to be associated with a layout then use itas your main car source as described in this section Here are some excerpts from the supplied default sets e Steam 1930 s era equipment with steam locomotives Ponai 0 E equipment To browse the whole collection open the Defaults folder in your Car Chooser and t
311. ork if there is a crash More e Auto View Restore zoom and position come up just the way you leftthem More e Drag and Drop Loading drag from the Load Chooser directly onto cars load an entire cutatonce More Fixes Version 5 2 includes fixes for many popular bugs in such areas as coupling and uncoupling freight loads opening large layouts train horn selection engine direction flipping changing layout background See the Readme for a complete list What Was New in 5 1 Version 5 1 introduces new layouts cars scenery and sounds for the British railway enthusiast along with new features to make the data easily accessible When you install Version 5 1 you are given a choice of US vs UK settings If you choose UK you will see e New welcome dialog offering you the possibility of downloading the entire set of UK data atonce See the Readme for details e British flag on splash screen and About box e British default cars when you create a new layout This can be changed by a new drop down in Train Preferences e British folder opened when you bring up the Layout Chooser e Carclass names translated to British terms This choice is available in Train Preferences and in the AAR Car Types dialog Whether you are British or not you will benefit from other features of 5 1 e Folder download Now you can click a folder in any web chooser tree and download the entire thing at once including subfolders Or you can choose to
312. ormat and lt name_T gt jpg a thumbnail image of the background To publish a layout 1 Inspect the Notes box If errors are reported cancel the dialog fix the errors and try again If the layout has links to external files or car collections you should publish those too 2 Inspect and edit Name and Comments These should be made presentable for other users If the comment box is empty you should add descriptive information and author name You might consider doing this to the original layout instead of here cancel this dialog edit in Layout Properties then publish 3 Choose an output folder You do not need a new folder for each layout typically you have one output folder where you put all published layouts If this layout has already been published to the output folder you are prompted to confirm overwrite 4 Inspect the output filename Keep this name simple but descriptive Warning if there are other layouts with links to this one changing the filename will break the connections 5 Click Publish The new published layout is created and the dialog is dismissed 6 lf you want to send the layout to another user zip the three files created in the output folder Dialog controls Name Comments Input file Output folder Output file Notes Publish Cancel Name of the layout This can be any name you like Changing the name here will affect only the published layout not the original Description and
313. os at j 0 or 1 standard 1 if j not a switch execute system command in command box current time of day h m s in 24 hour format today s date mm dd yyyy layout name name of selected train name of selected car speed of train in M PH KPH if metric settings in effect numeric code of last key hit on keyboard name of crossing train train owning calling script speed of crossing train X CAR DATADIR Wait Conditions AT lt xn gt AT lt tj d gt AT lt h m s gt AT lt station gt AFTER lt sxn gt AFTER lt t j d gt AFTER lt h m s gt AFTER lt station gt ON STOP ON COUPLE ON THROW lt jxn gt ON TABLESTOP ON KEY lt key gt label of crossing car TP application data directory path lead car of train crosses junction lead car of train crosses exact spot dist d from jxn j on track t specified time is shown on layout clock h m required secs optional lead car of train enters named station last car of train crosses junction last car of train crosses exact spot specified actual time has elapsed on wall clock last car of train leaves station train comes to a complete stop train couples with another car specified switch is thrown by any means turntable finishes rotating user presses any key or specified key Scheduling This chapter describes a couple of features helpful in making up a schedule or timetable for your railroad The idea is this Suppose you are making up a timetable for th
314. oser E allows you to drag in pre defined objects These are rectangle objects with image fill marked as stretch without distortion The object size is automatically adjusted to fit the image See Choosing Scenery Text Labelling When you have completed placing scenery around your layout you may want to go back and add place names track directions or even building names to your layout For individual objects you can add a text label via the Text tab of Scenery Properties For other situations you may want a text box separate from any specific object For example To create a label select the Text tool amp Press and drag a box in the area where you want to place your text When you release the button a prompt dialog appears Scenery Object Text X Enter test E Cancel Enter the text and click OK The label appears on the layout Click on the text to select the object so you can reposition rotate or adjust properties of the label Note that the font size rescales as you zoom the layout but not when you resize the text scenery box Scenery Properties General Background Line Text I Show text Text Madison WI Font ia drial 9 Bold Madison WI Color a TM Rotate text with image OK Cancel Apply eae Editing Scenery Drawing or choosing scenery is the equivalent of taking a pre built structure out of the box Editing is the rest of the job placing it where you want making
315. osition the cursor on one endpoint so it highlights with a little green square see picture above right 5 Press and drag Note TrackLayer lets you join tracks at any angle The trains can handle Cs any turn no matter how sharp You now have a continuous section of road with a bend in the middle 6 And so on You can draw segments in any order and any direction they ll join together as long as the highlight square is showing when you press or release the mouse button To draw a switch A switch is automatically created whenever three tracks join This happens when you begin or end drawing a segment at either an existing junction or a point along an existing track To draw the switch shown here 1 Draw the mainline in two segments A B and B C 2 Draw the branch in either direction B D or D B J unction B highlights when you begin or end drawing the branch OR 1 Draw the mainline in one segment A C 2 Draw the branch in either direction B D or D B The track segment AC highlights when you begin or end at B J unction B is created by this Operation chopping AC into two parts As soon as you release the mouse button using either method the switch is created and the stop go lights appear You can test the switch by clicking atB To draw a multi way switch Simply draw more than three segments to a switch Whenever more than three segments join a multi way switch is formed with more than two routes thr
316. ot create a script on a train unless ithas an engine Rewind Start Stop Edit Start start playing script at current line Stop stop train and script Remove Rewind rewind script to starting line reposition trains to rewind point Can be undone using Edit gt Undo from the main menu e Edit brings up Script Editor showing train s script If train has no script a new empty one is created with a header stamped with the current time e Remove remove and delete script from train This is not undoable but does not become permanent until layout file is Saved Script Toolbar Buttons from left to right e Record button Run light click to begin recording creating a script on the selected train Button lights red while recording green while any train script is playing e Rewind click to rewind all scripts to start and all trains to rewind point Can be undone using Edit gt Undo from the main menu For more see Rewind Point e Stop click to stop all scripts and trains e Play click to start all train scripts e Edit click to bring up Script Editor for the selected train creating script if train has none e Pause click to pause running scripts brings up a modal alert which requires a click to dismiss and continue playing the scripts e SC click to bring up Script Central Insert Here menu g seine E Scrat Edljtor A special context menu comes up when youright clicka 12 wee pos CBE
317. ota CAD program although it IS a great way to sketch ideas on an outline of your space and then run trains on them it doesn t do 3D perspective or show you the view looking out the cab or build fractal scenery or even print It has justa few simple but powerful tools for drawing track curves and turntables It doesn t take long to learn and like on your model in the basement you can take a break from building and run trains any time e Let us do it We accept user submitted track plans and prepare them for TrainPlayer and with your permission post the results on our website for public download There are some fine user submitted plans available now and more coming all the time For information about converting and posting your layout ask by e mail Where to Go for Help We re committed to delivering a quality product which runs on your machine and doesn t crash unless you want itto If you have trouble with the program the installation or the layouts here are some places to look for help e Help menu The Help menu in the program has links to built in online help to web pages and other sources Try the online help which includes index and full text search e Readme The Readme file installed in your TrainP layer directory has up to date details about known problems tips version history and other information You can view the file from the Start menu under TrainP layer e Web The Support page on our website has a lis
318. ottom of the Window menu choose one to activate and bring it forward Select window Activate det urtleCreek rw Uk Save Close Wiridouy s Minimize An effective way to view a running railroad is to set up one window showing the overall layout and another zoomed in and following the train as shown here L644 rrwe2 a z i To setup a dual view with a layout on the screen 1 Choose Window New Window to create a second view of the layout 2 In the original view use View Zoom In to geta close view of the train Right click the layout and make sure Auto Follow is checked 3 Choose Window Tile pick a direction based on the layout orientation to arrange both windows together 4 In the second window choose View Fit To Window So you can see the entire layout in it The train runs in both windows Welcome to TrackLayer TrainP layer lets you operate trains on prepared track plans TrackLayer is the program which prepares the track plans You can use It to edit plans provided by us or draw your own from a diagram or just sketch some track ona blank screen The two are actually the same program When the program is in TrainPlayer mode you get a collection of tools for building and running trains In TrackLayer mode you get one additional toolbar with a half dozen tools for drawing and editing track curves switches and turntables Building and operating features are fully integrated as soon as you
319. ough it Each throw opens a different route In this picture the current open route is A B D The first throw opens route A B C the F second E B D the third goes back to A B D i To draw a crossing Draw tracks which cross but do not join In this example AB and DC cross each other but there is no junction in common so trains cannot go from one track to the other Track Snap Snap features assist you in drawing precise switches and curves Snap MW Toangl iv 4 i 6 i 90 degrees E i To parallel 2 Toradius w 15 Ho iw ao 24 E 15 Units Layout inches h Disable Settings oom oom On Drag Loco Sounds Snap takes effect only when you are drawing new track not editing or moving existing sections By default itis disabled as it tends to get in the way when you are tracing over an existing plan But when you are drawing a new layout from scratch itis invaluable Enable it as follows 1 Setup your choices in Track Preferences Here you specify what sorts of snap you wish to enable and at what angles or radii as shown above left 2 Use the Track or Circle tool Snap does not apply when using other tools 3 Use the Snap Disable Enable command on the layout context menu above right to turn snap off and on as needed while drawing 4 When angle or parallel snap is in effect you can disable it temporarily by pressing the shift key as you draw There are thr
320. over margins or page layout For fancier printing copy the grid to a spreadsheet and print from there Select a row by clicking the row header at the left To select multiple rows select one then press shift and select another To select a block of cells press in one and drag to another You cannot select columns To select the entire grid right click and choose Select All Select rows or cells as above then choose Copy from the context menu This copies text to the Windows Clipboard no images The selection can then be pasted into Notepad Excel or other programs Right click and choose Column Auto Resize When checked this causes columns to automatically resize to fill the grid whenever its window is resized When unchecked columns remain at fixed sizes Right click a grid cell and choose Zoom To lt object gt This zooms the layout to be centered on the selected object car station train or industry Drag the Image column header off the grid This removes the pictures from the grid and causes all rows to shrink to Standard text height To bring the images back use the Field Chooser AAR Location GSW Inc Ingersoll Machine Ingersoll Machine Hamilton Yard Hamilton Yard Hamilton Yard Hamilton Yard Hamilton Yard Hamilton Yard Load Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty tractor Empty Empty Empty Docking Navigator Arrows Windows 7 Sorting can be done over more
321. p or receive goods for the industries on the layout It then randomly assigns cars to carry the goods and determines whether each car is to be loaded or empty based on its current location The results are presented as a set of lines in a text window and a set of rows In an ops window a new type of interactive grid window You can use either or both as your work orders The text presentation is more readable the grid more interactive A lot of data is required for this process Each industry ships and receives particular types of goods each car is capable of carrying specific types of load This information comes from databases provided by the program but modifiable and extendable by you In generating a switchlist the program has to make Sure the cars loads and industries match for example you will not be told to deliver a flatcar of logs to a dairy or an empty coal hopper to a lumber mill Ops Reading Matter There is a lot of gadgetry associated with Ops Practically everything mentioned above is new in Version 4 0 industries car loads switchlists waybills along with new ops related menus toolbars interactive display windows and internal computational devices You don t need to master all this but if you care to read about it here is a handy guide to the various parts If not skip it and go to the next section How To Use Ops Car Loads goods you can transport in cars Industries locations where goods are shipped or rece
322. pin is at front or end of train e Speed Display Displays current speed in miles per hour MPH or kilometers per hour KPH To change from MPH to KPH Tip select a metric setting in Layout Properties or various other dialogs The default maximum speed is 100 MPH You can change this in Operation Options e Stop Button Click to stop the train Button shows lit red when stopped flashing red when in yard mode Clicking stop exits yard mode and returns direction to forward e Close Button Click to remove control panel from the screen To bring It back use View gt Control Panel e Context menu Right click anywhere on the control panel except in train control window to access the context menu with these commands e Lock in position When checked causes the control panel to become unmoveable so it can t be dragged When unchecked panel can be dragged anywhere on screen Used to prevent accidentally dragging while operating controls e Enable yard mode When checked allows control panel to be operated in yard mode Uncheck for normal operation You can also enable yard mode by using the Yard Mode toolbar button or choosing Enable Y ard Mode from the Tools menu e Locked Icon appears when control panel is locked and unmoveable To lock choose Lock in position from the context menu To unlock use the same menu command or simply click on the lock icon e Yard mode enabled icon appears when Yard Mode Is enabled To enable or d
323. pre designed units for both N and HO For a quick start skip the reading matter and try the tutorial About Modules About Modular Layouts Modular Layout Tutorial Building a Modular Layout Building a Module The Module Manager Module Manager Settings About Modules In principle any layout can be used as a module in the sense that it can be brought into the Module Manager and strung together with others However this only makes sense if the a layout is constructed in such a way that it can hook to a neighbor for continuous running We use the term module to refer to a layout constructed in this way In the Layout Chooser all layouts under the Modules folder are in this category Module Standards Every module must have sections of straight track ending at certain positions near the layout edges These positions are called connection points The numbers and positions of connection points on a module depend on a scale specific body of standards of which there are several The most popular modules are N scale based on standards published by the NTrak Modular Railroading Society HO scale standards are less universal ours are based on HOTrak as published by the Ottawa Valley club In TrackLayer you can build modules in any scale based on standards of your own invention but all the layouts in the collections are either NTrak or HO A module is designed to be oriented a certain way The frontis the edge closest to the viewer in the
324. r 3 3 introduces the ability to create your own scenery In 3 2 e Import from CAD TrackLayer 3 2 introduces the ability to automatically convert plans from three track CAD programs AnyRail WinRail and Atlas Right Track Starting with a layout developed in one of these programs all it takes is a few clicks and you re ready to add trains and go e Layout sizing TrackLayer 3 2 has a simple new tool for resizing your layout and rescaling the track You can now easily make adjustments if the track doesn t fit the background or if you want to add roadbed or staging space outside the background boundaries e Choice of running sounds New in TrainPlayer a choice of train running sounds including speed dependent sounds for both steam and diesel engines You can assign different running sounds formerly called chuffs to different engines if you have sounds of your own copy the files into the right folder and they will show up on the menu In 3 1 e Choosers A single style of dialog now takes the place of three previous ones and adds many conveniences for selecting layouts car collections and sounds Files from all over your disk can be dragged in from Windows Explorer and organized in tree controls for easy navigation and browsing Each chooser has a Web tab where you can browse and download files directly from the website A preview window shows thumbnails of layouts and car types or plays sounds e Premium content Several g
325. r NT 4 foot and drop it on the top edge of the corner module In this case the right hand edge does not highlight instead the highlight is at the top as you might expect 13 Continue in this fashion adding in order 4 foot corner NT 10 foot 4 foot corner NT 4 foot and 4 foot corner The result is a closed loop 14 For educational purposes try a rearrangement Press on the middle of module 1 and begin to drag It becomes hatched 2 a a aS ae 15 Drag to the edge between 2 and the corner 3 and let go The result is a Swapping of the two straight modules 16 Now you re ready to turn the assembly into a layout Click OK The Module Manager is dismissed and the assembled modular layout displayed 17 Add a train and run it around to convince yourself that the track is continuous 18 Save the modular layout using File gt Save As Do not save it into the Modules folder itis a full layout nota module Save it where you keep other user built layouts For this tutorial just give ita name and it will go directly under Layouts 19 Close the layout Reopen it from either the Layout Chooser or the File menu at the top of the recently used list Choose File gt Module Manager to convince yourself that you can get back the modules and continue to work with the assembly di Layouts di Demo di Featured Layouts do Layouts101 di Modules d Premium de Standard di Scenery di Sounds M
326. r Road Preferences An alternative is to create a set of scenery objects to fit underneath the track To do this All Retouchable on om ho of o p k a O Link to Layout k r e Grow Roadbed Scenery ni 7 i oo Track To Scenery Selection To Station 1 Select the track section s where you want roadbed 2 Right click a selected track section and choose Grow Roadbed Scenery The program generates polygon scenery objects under all selected track sections overlapped to look like a continuous thick section of roadbed Style and width are taken from the Roadbed choices under File gt Preferences gt Road The generated objects are regular scenery so you can change the style of one or many parts by selecting and editing as described elsewhere in this chapter If you create roadbed as scenery instead of drawing It as a track style itis more flexible in that you can have more than one style on a layout and it need not appear under all the tracks The disadvantage Is that if you have a lot of roadbed the large number of scenery objects will be cumbersome and slow the program down Scenery Convenience Tools e The Text tool creates a rectangle object with a text string no fill and no border line On dragging to create a new object you are prompted to enter the text string Note that the overall size of the object is the rectangle you define by drawing it is not automatically adjusted to fit the text e The Scenery Cho
327. r example if you have two locos Sitting on a track back to back and you couple them together then one will become a reverse engine Some car collections provide engines which are already pointed toward the back nose to the left in the side image as shown by the two L examples above right You should NOT check the Reverse Engine box to use these They already behave like reverse engines even though they are not marked as such This sounds confusing but the behavior Is reasonable Car ID Display It is often useful to see car identifiers on the layout These can be turned on and off for all or selected cars Note this section has been updated for version 4 1 Think of car id s as lighted signs on top of the cars There are two mechanisms for controlling them 1 inside each car is a switch to turn its own sign on and off and 2 there is a master power switch to disable or enable all lighting The idea is that you can display id s on a set of cars of interest and with one click turn them on or off without losing the selection This model is in effect unless you are running an ops session and color codes are on In that case the program controls the id display and overrides your settings Another feature affecting car id display is the option Turn off labels while moving in rain Preferences This Causes id s to be Suppressed when cars are moving re displayed when they stop This applies both in and outside of ops The app
328. r ops for example has no trains this page will say so and give you the opportunity to cancel and make itso Click Next to continue Tine hearr OLLIE Phifer q ai a ala Posten a a gon meP at ee ee TE enor Welcome to the Train Player Ops Wizard This layout has 5 stations 1 yard 0 interchanges 18 loadable cars p industries Ibis ready to prepare for operations Click Mest to proceed Back Cancel Stations page Calls the Station Generator to create new stations if you want or need them Ops Wizard Stations Lreate random stations around layout This layout has 5 stations 1 yard O interchanges f Use existing stations 0 Keep existing stations add yards and interchange C Generate all new stations Fou with to create stations by hand cancel out of the wizard and use the Station tool Back Cancel Choose one e Use existing stations Leaves the stations as they are This is the default if your layout has Stations and yards Click Next to go to the next page e Add yards and interchange Leaves the stations but creates new yards and interchange replacing any existing ones This is the default for layouts with stations but no yards Click Next to create without going to the next page e Generate new stations Replaces all existing stations with new stations and yards This is the default for layouts with no stations Click Next to do the generation and remain on this page
329. r pattern which fills the object The default is a solid ivory color Shown above If multiple objects are selected including grouped objects the fill properties chosen in this dialog apply individually to each Dialog controls Select one of four choices using the radio buttons No Fill Choose this if you do not want the object to be filled An object with no fill is transparent Solid Hatched Bitmap Stretch Tile Choose this to have the object filled with a solid color To change the color click the colored button to bring up the Colors dialog Choose or adjust the color using either tab of the dialog Choose this to fill the object with one of the system defined hatch patterns Choose a pattern from the drop down choice list Set the foreground line color of the pattern using the color button next to Hatched The background color is set with the button next to Solid The hatch patterns are provided by system brushes They do not offer much flexibility you cannot change the line width and the patterns do not stretch or rotate Choose this to fill the object with an image Click the Browse button to bring up the Scenery Chooser where you can select an image from the scenery collection or import one from the file system The appearance of the image within the scenery object is affected by the Stretch Tile
330. r to itin a LET or SET statement If you want to embed a variable contents into a larger string use on both ends let s def echo The Alphabet abc s ghi A system variable or function is a value supplied by the system You call for a system value by giving a function name often followed by a list of arguments in parentheses An argument might be the id of an object a keyword requesting a specific action or value or an input value for a calculation or operation Sometimes you don t get a value back you just call the function to do some work using a CALL statement System function names begin with A list of them is given below and also in the Reference tab of Script Central Examples echo Today s date is DATE echo Name of active layout is SLAYOUT Name let r SRAND 1 100 echo A random percentage gt r let storedData SREAD C myfile txt let outputData storedData additional info call SWRITE C myfile_new txt outputData A function family is a set of related functions with the same name and a list of arguments which usually includes the identifier of an object and or a keyword representing a specific value Several function families provide access to objects on the layout cars trains tracks junctions the layout Itself while others work with general objects like strings and files Some functions are writable meaning their values can be changed in LET or SET statements Writable functions ar
331. rack the fix Is to delete it If you get other errors and can t figure them out drop us a note and send the rrw file Most problems can be fixed by editing the rrw file as a last resort Layout Publisher For copying layout components to an output folder Called from menu command File gt Publish E Layout Publisher Mame Comments Input File Output Folder Output File Mokes Farmersville Jct 2z 15 HO By Robert Hargrave 1 Produce Whse Loading Dock 2 Modular Construction Assembly Plant 3 Oil amp LPG storage tanks C Program Files TrainPlayeriLayouts Farm CihlyPublishFolder a Farmersville rr Publish Track check ok ance Requires car collection Colorado Help Publishing a layout means preparing it for delivery to other users checking for errors gathering the layout and image files in one place giving the files uniform names creating a thumbnail image and other steps The job is done in this dialog It does not modify the original layout but makes a new copy in a different location The new copy is activated and remains open after publishing If you edit properties in this dialog the changes will apply to the published copy only an alternative is to edit the properties of the original before publishing Three files are created when you publish a layout lt name gt rrw the layout file in xml format lt name gt jpg gif omp etc the background image file in a graphics f
332. rack drawing Styles like special paint brushes You just turn them on or off and they take effect when the layout is drawn printed or exported Details are under Road Preferences Double Track f you ve ever tried to create a length of parallel double track say for a passing track ora double track section of main line you Know it s not easy especially if curves are involved Now TrackLayer 5 3 does the engineering for you See Double Track Pedersen Additions Delivered with 5 3 is an excellent new Default Pedersen car set 18 cars especially designed by Chris to show a unified representative sampling of types with his own stylish green black CP color scheme Another enhancement for CP users is the addition of a set of realistic freight loads designed and rendered by Chris double stack containers for Husky Stack flatcars lumber and pipe for bulkhead flats and more For more about these cars see Chris Pedersen Cars below Zoom Control A Windows zoom control is now located on the status bar for easy zooming In and out See Zooming Split Track Here For various reasons the TrackLayer user sometimes needs to introduce a junction into a Straight or curved section of track In the past this was done by creating then deleting a temporary section of track In 5 3 itcan be done directly see Split Track Here Scenery Flip Scenery artists have pointed out that if you find a right handed widget in the scenery catalog but you nee
333. radio described below Note a shortcut to performing this operation is to use the Load Bitmap command on the Scenery context menu Choose Stretch to cause the image to stretch so that it fills the object If Lock Proportions is checked the image will fill as much of the object space as possible without distorting otherwise the image will fill the complete space distorting as necessary Choose Tile to show the image in its native size and proportions drawn repeatedly to fill the object Space Tiled images do not scale or rotate Transparency Lock Proportions Adjusts the degree of transparency of the background fill or pattern When set to zero slider at left the object is completely opaque and obscures objects underneath When set to 100 slider at right the object is fully transparent as if you had chosen No Fill Values in between cause the background to be semi transparent see through to an adjustable extent Note choosing a non zero value for transparency adds complexity and slows down the drawing process Itis not recommended that you use transparency for large background objects Specifies whether the image can be stretched independently in both directions unchecked or must retain its native proportions checked This setting is ignored unless Stretch is chosen as the display mode Scenery Properties Styles Line Properties Line properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the
334. rain M Uniform Size snap all to medium size M Uniform Size snap all to medium size IW Scale on Resize adjust image size on resize bar IW Scale on Resize adjust image size on resize bar Dialog controls are Snap on Select Uniform Size Scale on Resize Background Show default collections Show MRU list size Defaults r Menu I Show default collections M Show MRU list size gt fe cmos oseas He _ cmos _ dois veo _ Checked means whenever you select a train draw the train in standard size and adjust snap the height of the bar so it will just fit Uncheck to leave bar size alone when selecting trains Default is ON Applies only if Snap on Select is on Checked means on snap show all trains medium size Uncheck to allow size to change depending on train Default is ON Checked means when you drag to resize the height of the bar scale the train up or down to fit the window Uncheck to stop train from resizing Default is OFF Click to set bar background color Default is beige for train bar light blue for car bar Car bar only in the Car Inventory Menu include the names of all default car collections Car bar only in the Car Inventory Menu include recent picks as many as specified Click to reset current dialog to factory default settings Moving Trains By Hand In the real world the only way to move a train is to attach an engine and give it power For years this has also been true
335. rames which are saved in your Windows Temp directory You can capture these and use them to make your own animation sequence For details send e mail and request information Modular Railroading If you ve been to a train show and seen a miniature hundred car coal train winding along what appeared to be miles of track then no doubt you ve seen modular railroading in action It s a way of creating a huge layout in a short time often fora temporary display You get a bunch of railroaders to each bring a section then you arrange them on the show floor and hook them together with sections of track so trains can run from one end to the other or around a giant loop Modular Railroading in TrainPlayer provides tools for building virtual modules arranging them in patterns and automatically hooking them together so you can test drive the overall layout The arranging is done by drag and drop and the hookup is a one click operation so it s easy to experiment with different patterns TrainP layer provides a large library of pre built modules including all types of corner junction yard modules scenic run throughs and lots of interesting plans you can use as the basis for your own designs The majority of modular railroading is done in N scale according to standards from the NTRAK Modular Railroading Society but there are also a growing number of HO module clubs using similar standards TrainP layer supports modules in any scale and provides
336. raphics File Series auto_l png appears to be the first of a series of graphics files Do you want to import the series as an animated image Don t ask me this again k a Click Yes and the program will create a file with the name of the series and extension anm e g flagman anm then load it into the scenery object When you create an animated image from a series of files the Frames dialog Shown above comes up so you can Set the frame timings By default all are set to 100 ms After a successful load an alert informs you of the number of frames and the output anm filename if applicable Convert Animated _ am x A Loaded animated image with 4 frames Saved as C Users Jim AppData Roaming I rainPlayer Scenery animations aute anm Don t show me this again P If you create an anm file from a series of images and want it to appear in your Scenery Chooser copy the anm file and all the component image files to your Scenery animation folder Note that the chooser will display only the anm file not any of its components If you create an animation sequence and want to send it to us or to a friend zip the entire set of images along with the anm file and send the Zip If you have an animated gif and you want to modify it you will need to split it into separate frame files TrainP layer has the ability to do this in fact it does this job whenever you read in an animated gif the gif is split into f
337. re clipped Linked Layouts Special new track lets you drive from one layout right onto another Pick any stub or siding specify a target layout drive off the siding and poof the scene changes and you are running the same train in a different world Great for connections between multi level layouts N Trak modules or just cruising randomly through your layout collection To link layouts 1 Choose the jumping off point This must be a stub track one with no connections on one end like a siding or yard track When the train reaches the end of this track it will jump to the linked layout 5 rei w pz Layout Link Link to document C Program Filesi TrainPlayeriLayouts lL 1 rrm LinkID A Unilink Cancel Ok k Delete Track Hidden Tunnel z a unne A CS aa Untouchable AS P wo All Retouchabl f so Link to Layout ia oe iN rn ee i A Ro o k A Cut Ctrl 2 With the Edit or Track tool selected right click the track section and choose Link to Layout The Layout Link dialog appears 3 Choose the target layout In the Link to document box enter the path to a layout file or use the Browse button to navigate to one Or ifthe layout is already open in another window choose it from the drop down menu 4 Assign a Link ID The Link ID is a label used to connect this track to a specific track on the target layout In the example t
338. re described there 7 Tike R lustry Browse E na l Name Location Loads In Loads Out Folder Hercules loading do i Portland cement ib Layout e m Hercu pere Aea varus Interchange cee tate fe Pidi ce sos ib pare fens Ridge pany i limestone quarry Guary limestone Layout Lime Ridge Hercu E Fam Related Industries cattle poultry pork SEN Nadie Fal amp Grain M Agricultural co op dry chemicals feeds alfaifa com soybea Agriculture Feed amp Grain M Grain Mills Hevators wheat com baney c Agriculture Feed amp Grain M clay crude oil propa asphalt av qas fuel Ti Layout Lime Ridge Hercules amp Portland RR Loads Incoming Outgoine chemicals cement bulk a limestone Care __ Hep At the bottom of the control is a panel displaying the details of the current selection dimmed by default to prevent accidental editing Click Edit and this panel works pretty much the same as the corresponding set of boxes in Station Properties Controls in this dialog Grid control foldered grid display of the industry template list Most of the operation of the grid is done via the context menu below but other operations are possible e To change column width horizontally drag the divider between two column headers e To reorder columns press a column header button drag and drop to the left or right of another header button e To expand or co
339. reat new collections of layouts were custom built for TrainPlayer by a talented group of railroad artists scenic renderings of some of our best plans fully tracked satellite photos of yards from all over the continent a beautiful set of original plans developed in 3rd Plan It by Peter Lloyd Lee The package includes car collections detailed renderings of hundreds of cars and locomotives Access to the Premium collection requires a license e Snap Version 3 1 becomes more useful for track plan design with the addition of several types of snap while drawing Snap to angle creates exact or 6 or your choice turnouts snap to parallel keeps yard tracks at uniform separation snap to radius gives precise circles and curves Detailed on off choices are available in the preferences e Preferences The Preferences dialog has been redesigned for enhanced friendliness tossing some old clutter while adding new choices reducing the number of tabs while organizing more sensibly Each tab has its own help page e Track check The Track Checker now gives you more information in a more useful form Output is given in a list box and includes not just errors but data such as external links associated files and required car collections If you click on an error line the layout zooms to that location and highlights the offending track automatically The Track Highlight dialog also has this new auto zoom feature Track color Now you can color indiv
340. rectory to suit yourself but there are restrictions For one thing you must not change the names or locations of the four main folders Sounds Layouts Scenery and Cartypes For another you should not change any subfolders under Sounds In general you will avoid confusion if you keep your local setup aligned with that on the web Opening a Layout When you start TrainPlayer the Layout Chooser appears The San Jose Central Shady Grove amp Shenill The St Paul Central If the chooser doesn t appear at startup you can bring it up using File gt Open Layout To open a layout click to select it in the list then click Open Or double click in the list To sort the list by number name size date or filename click on the header at the top of the corresponding column Click again to sort in reverse order To resize the dialog drag by the lower right corner For more about this dialog see Layout Chooser and Choosers Other ways to open layout files e Use File Open Ga and choose a file from the Windows file system e Use File Open Layout UBF to bring up the Layout Chooser e Double click an rrw file on your desktop or in Windows Explorer e Select one or more rrw files in Windows Explorer and drag them into the TrainPlayer window Errors on Opening Layout When you open a layout the program checks to see if all the referenced components are available e Ifthe layout refers to a non existent background file an alert informs you of
341. ring up Module Manager it displays the assembly based on information stored in the rrw file If you then click OK each module is reloaded from its stored pathname and a new modular layout is created from them This is a one way operation modules are read only not dynamically linked So e If you make changes to a module the changes are not reflected in the modular layout Changes will be seen only if the layout is rebuilt from its assembly e Ifyou make changes to a modular layout they are not reflected in the associated modules There is no way to transfer changes made in the overall layout back into the source modules except by copying and pasting between layouts e Ifyou move or rename the modular layout or any of its module files the layout might lose them and be unable to rebuild e If you want to send the layout to a friend you should supply the module files along with the main layout rrw In short modules are external files like homemade scenery objects or linked layouts Techniques for dealing with external files are given in the Publishing chapter Tutorial A Loop of Modules This exercise demonstrates most of the features of the modular railroading system In it we will build a large loop layout from a set of basic component modules The result will not lead to very interesting operation but you can run trains around it 1 Start with a blank layout or no layout If you start with an existing layout a new blank o
342. ritical the only consequences of having the grid adjusted wrong are a the sizes of the cars will not be accurate relative to the layout and b the Layout Properties dialog will show the wrong overall size Resizing and Rescaling In a computer simulation of a scale model of the real world the term resize can have different meanings Until now the way to resize a layout was to adjust the grid changing the mapping of the virtual layout onto the real one For example if you have a 4x8 HO layout and you drag the grid to double the number of squares you end up with an 8x16 version of the same layout as if you somehow Stretched it to take up twice as much space in your garage TrackLayer offers a dual purpose tool which gives two new ways to resize your layout without modifying the background One rescales or moves the entire set of track the other changes the size and shape of the benchwork In your garage the first method Is like replacing the HO track with N it changes the overall size of the track relative to the scenery The second is like adding a shelf it increases space for track beyond existing scenery Technically this means the bitmap size is now independent of the layout size so the two no longer need to be the same size and Shape This fixes a few long standing problems adds flexibility in plan bashing and solves some import problems which arise when a CAD app doesn t generate an image of the right shape Resizing a
343. ro space Jxn has no tracks Invalid track number on junction Superimposed junctions Invalid radius Station 1S missing name Tracks superimposed Endpoint on track but no Junction Duplicate ID internal internal internal internal internal internal usually means there Is an invisible track of zero length track references a non existent station track or circle is defined at a point a junction exists but has no tracks connected to it junction references a non existent track two junctions are very close together internal a Station has been defined with a blank or empty name two sections of track share the same line one track almost meets another but does not connect two cars or trains have the same ID Most of these errors are rare The two most common are illustrated in the diagram above e Endpoint on track but no junction see right hand red circle in diagram one track endpoint lies near another track but doesn t quite touch it Normally this indicates you meant to create a switch but didn t quite The fix is to use the Edit tool pick up the stray end and drop it carefully on the other track e Superimposed junctions left hand circle means two junctions are very close together Normally this means you meant to have a single junction but accidentally created two instead The fix is to move one junction on top of the other so they fuse into one In the diagram the problem is that there Is a tiny piece of stray t
344. rogram has to download the folder into a temporary directory before it can display the images 2 When you find the object or set you want click Install This copies the downloaded files into your Scenery folder It then Switches back to the Local tab and selects the installed folder so you are ready to add objects as described previously Drawing Scenery r If you are building a layout on a plywood sheet you can use the Scenery Chooser to plop a few buildings and trees on itand you re set But the more serious layout will require ground cover water roads and other fanciness which can only be constructed by drawing This section describes how to draw your own scenery objects Drawing New Scenery Objects The general procedure for drawing a new scenery object is as follows 1 Selecta layer Choose one e 1 Edit Foreground Layer to create smaller objects in the foreground o Edit Bac kground Layer to create larger shapes behind the foreground objects The layer you choose becomes the active layer where new objects will go When the foreground layer is active background objects cannot be selected or modified when the background layer is active foreground objects are not displayed at all but can be made visible using View gt Features gt Foreground Scenery 2 Select a drawing tool Choose one e L Rectangle to create a rectangular or square object e Ellipse to create a circle or ellipse e Line Polygon to crea
345. rograms gt Accessories Navigate to a folder of module layouts 2 Choose a module layout and drag it into the MM window Highlighting and locations of attachment are the same as described above aon x G ja di NTrak Com y WW Search Components pl n File Edt View Tools Help Organize a Open E mail New folder zz M 7 d Modules 7 Name HO E i E ot ls erw Components p E nts tjpg di Track Plans nt 2s nrw A NTrak E nt 2s tpg j ea fm nt 3 comente ocenic Plans ie nt 3 comer tjpg i d Track Plans iie ree ed 3 19 2012 6 06 AM i nt 2s rrw Date modifed HE Wy Fil Le 435 KB oa Be sure to choose a file with extension rrw If you drag the wrong type of file nothing will happen when you drop it Rearranging Modules Once you have more than one module in the Module Manager window you can move them around or delete them by drag and drop or by rearranging rows in the list box After any such operation the overall assembly is reconfigured to reflect the change By drag and drop 1 Position the cursor over the middle of a module press the left button and begin to drag The module takes on a hatched pattern meaning itis on the move em Se A ee 1 Drag to any of the locations indicated above to the edge of a module on top of a module and let go The module is moved from its original location to the new one 2 To remove a module from the assembly
346. roperties j operen Export Filenames E xport text or xml file of folder contents See Export Rename Export Filenames 1 Refresh is available on locked folders and folders containing other folders is dimmed for folders created manually 2 Editing commands are dimmed on or inside a locked folder as these cannot be modified For more see Adding Your Own Layouts 3 Remove and Rename are dimmed on special folders Layouts Recent Downloads List Menu Open Open selected layout and take down dialog Refresh Thumbnail Recreate thumbnail image from layout Refresh Thumbnail Adding Your Own Layouts to the Tree The local layout chooser is more flexible than the others In addition to showing you layouts residing in your TP Layouts folder it can also show layouts stored in other locations You can add files or folders to the chooser and organize them so you can find them easily For example you might create a Favorites folder containing the layouts you like best say some from the 101 Track Plans some from the Bruno collection some from a folder you downloaded from a forum One way to do this would be to create a new folder on your disk and copy the files into it a process which requires time expertise and disk space An easier and more economical way is to leave the files where they are and create a folder in the chooser tree containing shortcuts pointing to them A very convenient way to do this is to drag files or fol
347. rted 2 Choose File gt Exportas TrainP layer If you do not see this command on the File menu see notes below Choose an output file name You are actually saving two files one a file with extension xml containing the data the other a jpg of the graphics 3 Start TrackLayer and choose File gt Import AnyRail Open the xml just created The import proceeds with a progress bar displaying status On completion the layout is ready to test and run 5 Save the converted layout as rrw file aN CAP MUM SCRL Notes 1 A common problem in a converted layout is gaps in the track where the train crashes or bounces instead of rolling on through Usually this means the track sections were not connected in the input file To fix it drag one of the disconnected junctions on top of the other so they fuse and become a Single junction 2 If turnouts or slipswitches do not work properly it is likely to be due to errors in the conversion Please report it 3 Graphics files exported from WinRail and Atlas Right Track sometimes do not come out the same size and shape as the layout If this happens try exporting a new graphics file at a different zoom level At the same time re save the ral file at the same zoom then try the import again Scenery Properties General General properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See also Editing Scenery Properties scenery Properti
348. rting with F is a type of flatcar G a gondola etc Conversely if you choose a class for a car type the program gives ita matching AAR code a one letter generic code Example choose class Flatcar and you get AAR code F Car loads have their own sort of AAR code a list of individual codes indicating cars able to carry a given load For details see Load AAR Strings Types of Cars The AAR code assigned to a car dictates its behavior TrainPlayer recognizes several types of cars based on their codes Some of these can be overridden by adding or changing a code in the carcodes csv file the following rules apply when not overridden e Passenger cars code starts with one of B C D P or is equal to EP MA MB MR e Locomotive power code starts with E except for ET tender all cars of this type move when power is applied e Freight cars all types which are not passenger or locomotive or tender or caboose e Loadable cars any car is loadable if ithas a default load assigned to it this applies to most passenger and freight cars e Closed cars cars with codes not starting with G or H or F or O Normally itis easy to tell whether a car is loadable most dialogs which display cars give you the option to show them with loads displayed but a the option is dimmed for unloadable cars and b for closed cars loads are shown as text labels above the car Default Cars There are two ways to add cars to a layout a using the Car Choo
349. rw with the same filename but a different extension jpg tog bmp gif or png But this does not have to be the case the background image can reside in a file anywhere on your disk with its pathname referenced in the rrw file Many external files are stored in system folders common to all TrainPlayer users These include car collections loads sounds and many scenery objects When you open a layout the program looks for these files in your local system data folder if it doesn t find them it looks in the TrainPlayer web collection and offers to download what it finds there Failing both the program proceeds using standard replacements for the missing objects In any case you do not have to provide these common files to a recipient Other types of external file may come from anywhere on your disk These include background images linked layouts components of window snapshots scenery object bitmaps and module layouts If you want the layout to work for the recipient the same way It does for you you will need to provide these files along with the rrw file How do you find out what these files are and what is the best way to transmit them To see a list of external files required by a layout run Track Check or Layout Publisher To include external files when you are transmitting a layout you have several choices This is because when the recipient opens the layout the program looks in several places to find them 1 Alongside the r
350. rw file If an external file is found in the same folder as the rrw it will be taken from there 2 Ina _files subfolder Ifthe layout is named abc rrw the program looks for a folder in the same location called abc_ files and if found looks there for external files 3 Atthe path stored in the rrw What is stored for an external object is its path relative to the rrw file as determined at the time the file was saved If itis not possible to derive a relative path then the absolute path is stored This means that if the layout and its external files are in different folders you can send them separately as long as you maintain their locations relative to each other 4 In the appropriate system folder Layouts Scenery Sounds etc If an external file resides in the system folder on the recipient s computer then It will be taken from there The simplest way to transmit a layout and Its external files is to take advantage of 1 and just put them all into a Single folder RZP Zip Files TrainP layer Version 5 introduces a new type of format for transferring layout data the railroad zip file with extension rzp This is a standard zip file you can change the extension to zip and work with it just like any other Zip file The rzp file contains a layout background bitmap if any and a_files subfolder containing external files The recipient can open it directly just as they would for a normal rrw file To save a layout to an rzp fil
351. s To restore all the color codes unselect all rows of the grid by clicking in the blank space below the last row Information on this page is specific to the Switchlist Window See also the general instructions under Ops Windows Color Action Class Car To At Load From E E doca 00434 iachane Epy Dega B hi ark a Cero yard rack 227 gp BN sett Hopper 1706 interchange o Telluride Cool OO B set out Tork TA Interchange Em Cero yard Field Chooser Ea BD send Hopper H707 OmhirMine Empty Telluride Coat nai B set out coni GBHA Interchange Conifer Lum Apulia B set out Tork interchange Empty Ceroyad Gp B set cut Boxcar pas Interchange Em Cero yard S MB set cut Hopper H598 Interchange lt o Carbondale Oe Cars Switchlist Switchlist Window Contents Color Color code for car and destination station Action Verb indicating type of move 1 Class Car Car identifier as displayed on car top To At Destination station for move move ends here Load Load carried by car during move or Empty From Current location of car Done Shows X when move is completed AAR Car class from AAR codes list h Shipper Name of shipping industry or offline h Receiver Name of receiving industry or offline h Waybill ID of waybill for this move to view waybill use context menu h ToggleOnArrival Checked if car is to be automatically loaded or unloaded on completion h Schematic Symbolic display of waybill cycle see Waybil
352. s of goods each containing an assortment of pictorial loads in that category When you click a load it Shows top and side views in the preview window and data in the lower left about what sorts of cars can carry the load G Loads 89 ft lumber bundles _ logs load for class F G Drag load onto a highlighted car on the layout Cti drag to load cut Note the behavior of the Load Chooser changed at version 5 2 The following instructions have been revised To operate Browse the collection click a folder in the tree to see its contents Select a load by clicking its image in the middle panel Note the indication on the status bar at lower left it shows the types of car by AAR code which are Suitable for carrying the selected load Press on the load image and drag the load onto the layout As you move over a Suitable car itis highlighted with a red outline meaning that the load can be deposited there Release the mouse button over the car you want to load Hold the Ctrl key down while you drag if you wish to load more than one car ata time When Ctrl is down an entire cut of cars is highlighted at once and can be loaded with the dragged load Cutmeans a connected group of cars of the same class To modify a load or see its properties right click the load icon in the middle window and choose Properties You get the Load Collection Editor Closed car loads One special load folder works d
353. s to be moved by shift clicking or dragging a selection rectangle 2 Point to any of the selected tracks or objects press and drag All selected tracks and objects move as a unit Attached tracks which are not selected are repositioned so as to remain attached In this example five Segments in a yard are all being moved at once One end of the yard lead track remains fixed the other end moves with the selection The resulting angles are not train friendly Copy Paste Selected objects tracks circles turntables may be copied to the TrainP layer clipboard and then pasted elsewhere on the layout or in another layout These objects cannot be pasted into other programs To copy a collection of objects 1 Select the objects as described previously 2 Right click any object and choose Copy or choose Edit Copy from the main menu or press Ctrl C The objects are copied to the clipboard To paste copied objects 1 Choose Edit Paste from the main menu or press Ctrl V Objects on the clipboard are added to the layout in the upper left corner and are selected so that you can drag them into position Pasted objects do not automatically connect to existing track even if you position them so it looks like they should To connect pasted track with existing track you can delete and redraw a segment or you can drag one junction on top of another and they will fuse Track Transform Rotate Flip A selection of track can be rotated b
354. s which normally occur for a moving train do not apply when the train is being dragged by hand These include e Crashes and bounces The train just stops when it can t go any further e Jumps to linked layouts If you run the train onto a linked spur it stops e Acceleration deceleration The train moves at the speed you drag e Speed display on control panel or toolbar e Running sounds e Correct behavior on tunnel track f you attempt to drag the train onto a tunnel track invisible link to another location itcan be made to work but feels strange The trick is to watch when the car you are dragging enters the tunnel it jumps to the other end and takes the cursor with it at which point you may have to continue the drag in another direction Yard Mode Yard sessions are easy in TrainPlayer When you re operating in yard mode rotating the speed dial controls both the speed and the direction Thanks to our users for suggesting this handy feature To enable yard mode right click the Control Panel and check Enable yard mode Or use the command Enable Yard Mode on the Tools menu or click the Y button on the toolbar Y When yard mode is enabled a brass Y appears in the upper right of the control panel as shown in the illustration at right To use Yard Mode with the speed dial l Rotate the speed knob counterclockwise so it goes past the zero point at around 7 00 The train stops and goes into reverse Speed remains
355. same for every row e Via a list of the stations the route passes through on its way e Length total length by rail of the route To change the units of measure select from a Units drop down in some dialog which has one e g Layout Properties e Switches number of switches the route passes through e Turns number of junctions where the train is going to have to reverse direction along the route e Overlap a measure of similarity between this route and some other route in percent For example a value of 50 means that exactly half the track on this route is the same as on some other route e Switches a list of junction numbers along the route where switches are located 3 If the resulting list is too long click the F ilter button to bring up the Route Finder Filters dialog Route Finder Filters j E x Exclude routes v have more than i200 switches have more than 3 turns v have greater than 75 overlap with another route lare longer thar 1 5 times shortest route Here you can trim down the number of results by eliminating those which are too long or have too many switches or turns or which overlap too much with another route Changing the settings does not require a new route calculation the list is filtered instantly Using the filters shown above we reduce the 29 routes in the first figure to a more manageable list B Route Finder To generate routes Select From and To
356. scenery context menu See Editing Scenery Properties Styles Default line style Called from arrow button on Line tool See Scenery Styles This dialog sets properties of the line bordering the scenery object If multiple objects are selected this dialog sets the same line properties for all If you do not want the object outlined set its line width to zero Dialog controls Line roose this if you do not want the line to be filled In fact this will make it invisible Choose this to have the line drawn in a Solid color Solid To change the color click the colored button to bring up the Colors dialog Choose or adjust the color using either tab of the dialog Choose this to fill the line with one of the system defined hatch patterns Choose a pattern from the drop down choice list Hatched Set the foreground line color of the pattern using the color button next to Hatched The background color is set with the button next to Solid The hatch patterns are provided by system brushes They do not offer much flexibility you cannot change the line width and the patterns do not stretch or rotate Choose this to fill the line with an image Click the Browse button to bring up the Scenery Chooser where you can Select an image from the scenery collection or import one from the file Bitmap system The bitmap used for a line style is always tiled not stretched Line Width Thickness of the
357. se By Name brings up the Car Types list so you can choose a car type by name c Car Chooser brings up the Car Chooser where you can select an individual car type in the usual way or you can select a different collection to be displayed in the CIB To select a collection select its folder in the tree then click OK to dismiss the chooser Car Inventory Menu Default Lionel Default Modern Default Pedersen Steam 19305 Default Steam maine ng welsh ng Athearn 40ft Steel Reefer Ee Building Trains In TrainPlayer you can t modify the tracks on a layout but you can equip it with the rolling stock of your choice This chapter tells how Selecting Cars and Trains Adding Cars and Trains Removing Cars and Trains Relocating a Train Naming Trains Train Properties Train Tree Selecting Cars and Trains If there are any trains on a layout then one of them is always designated the selected train This is the one e which appears in the train window on the Control Panel or Train Control Bar e which is being controlled by the the panel or bar e which appears outlined or checked in the Train menu e which is the one affected by most of the commands under Train on the main menu To select a train a click any car in the train b choose its name or picture from the Train menu or c Click its name in the Train Tree At any given time there may be at most one selected car on the layout Ifa car is selected
358. se Stop speed Slider Go Horn Train Scrollbar Selected Car Train Menu speed Display Slower Faster Uncouple Load Unload Uncoupling Pin To undock or dock elsewhere press and drag the header To auto hide click the push pin icon at upper right the bar will then collapse to a button when not in use hovering over the button will bring it back The bar is in two inseparable parts control panel on the left train window on the right You can change their relative sizes by dragging the divider in the middle You cannot reduce the control panel below its minimum size but you can reduce the minimum by removing buttons or enlarging the panel vertically Train side views are scrollable and resizable in both directions so if you have Chris Pedersen cars you can enlarge the bar to see them in full size or make it smaller and they will scale to fit The control panel wraps its buttons in multiple rows to improve fit The control bar has everything you need to run and interact with trains There is no longer any need to bring up the old rotary dial control panel though it is still available if you want it Control Panel of the TCB The control panel consists of a set of buttons and controls on a wood panel background They are arranged in one row unless the control bar is resized tall enough so they can wrap to two or three Right click on the wood to bring up the context menu This allows you to hide certain buttons whose functio
359. se are likely to change in the next version Generators We use the term generator to mean a device which comes up with a random set of something It produces a list of candidates according to some rules ranks them by desirability according to other rules then randomly picks some number of them starting at the top For example the interchange generator attempts to find a long spur which might serve as an Interchange point with another railroad It looks at the list of all sours on the layout ranks them according to length and location and picks a random one from the top few choices Ops uses several generators as listed here and described below You don t really need to Know how these work but if you re curious read on e Station generator creates stations at random locations around layout e Yard finder identifies all yard areas on layout e Interchange generator identifies one interchange track per layout e Industry generator selects one random industry per station e Waybill generator creates one random waybill per industry e Switchlist Ops generator creates switchlist from subset of waybills The first four of these are called up from the Ops Setup Wizard the last two from the Generate Ops command Station Generator We didn t originally plan to offer a station generator Stations are not that hard to create and if they are to match the layout scenery they need to be made by hand Still on a big layout spending an hour mak
360. se through the help or jump to keywords in the index TP Home Page Brings up TrainPlayer com home page in your browser Brings up the Upgrade License dialog where you enter Upgrade License name and license key provided by e mail from TrainP layer Brings up the Purchase Upgrade dialog where you see Purchase Upgrade what upgrades are available and can go directly to a checkout page to buy one Check for Updates Brings up the Check for Updates dialo to see if newer versions of program or car collections are available About This Layout Brings up the Layout Properties dialog showing author provided comments and instructions about the layout Brings up the TrainP layer About Box showing the user About lt license gt name and license type pT Upgrade License Dialog This dialog is part of the Armadillo protection system provided by a company formerly Known as Software Passport This is where you enter the username and license key sent to you by TrainPlayer The most convenient way to do this is to copy both the name and key from the e mail then paste into the Name box of the dialog this will fill both lines at once x Enter the registration name and key below exact as given to you NOTE the name below may not match the one provided with pour license g Hardware fingerprint CEB S 4479 Hame 7 uh ame Key QINOTH N 491 94 Hew FP aC SWwiwexOP Cancel Buy Morl on If the key is valid
361. selected object press Shift and click the object To unselect all objects click an empty spot on the layout To select all objects choose Edit Select All or press Ctrl A To select all objects in a given region 1 Choose the Edit tool be 2 Press and drag to form a selection rectangle see B Any track or object intersecting the rectangle is highlighted in green It is not necessary for the track or object to be completely enclosed by the rectangle 3 Release Highlighted track becomes selected see If you hold down the shift key while dragging the newly selected items will add to the previous selection Moving objects Once a network of track is laid and interconnected it s a little tricky to move it around without fouling something up One simple and safe operation is to move a track endpoint or junction To move a track endpoint shown in D 1 Choose the Edit tool Es 2 Position the cursor over the endpoint you want to move so you see the green highlight square 3 Press and drag The endpoint moves the other end remains anchored To move a junction or switch shown in E 1 Choose the Edit tool be 2 Position the cursor over the junction or switch you want to move so you see the green highlight square 3 Press and drag The Junction or switch moves the other ends of all attached tracks remain anchored To move a collection of track and or other objects Shown in F 1 Select the tracks and object
362. ser which lets you pick any car from any collection or b choosing from the Add Car menu or its toolbar See Adding Cars And Trains The second method is quicker but means you don t get to choose the collection in this case the car comes from the Default collection one of a few collections specially set up for this purpose The program comes with two basic default sets Default Steam and Default Modern Examples from Default Steam are shown at the top of this page Default Modern examples are on the Car Collections page The program activates one or the other of these when you open a layout depending on the ratio of steam to diesel engines on the layout You can override this choice and specify your choice of defaults for any layout whether Steam or Diesel or one of several others you can download or one you create yourself For details see Default Car Sets Car IDs Every car on the layout has two forms of identification e a numeric ID assigned and managed by the program and not editable by you This is used internally for keeping track of cars The program goes to some trouble to ensure that every car on the layout has a unique ID and warns you if this is not the case e a text label which you can optionally display on top of the car Initially the label is a combination of the car class and the ID where the class is represented by one or two letters a gondola might be labelled G64 a steam engine ES 99 However the label can
363. small set of sample animations in both gif and anm formats More will become available over time in the web scenery collections To add one of these to your layout 1 Bring up the Scenery Chooser using Tools gt Scenery gt View Scenery Chooser or the button on the scenery toolbar El Scenery a background G chem plant_refinery L coal_ore mines sand c 5 factories i 9 lumber saw paper mils a miscellaneous roads and streets station_m buildings 2 urban buildings engine GIF flagman GIF gi vegetation i warehouses 53 animations handecar GIF signal 1 GIF 4 I H i signal 1 GIF 2 Click to open the new animations folder If you don t see it try right clicking the Scenery folder and choosing Refresh 3 Press an image and drag onto the layout That s it it starts playing immediately To stop use the Scenery Edit tool right click and choose Stop Animation Confession most of the animations in our sample set came from the Microsoft Office Online clip art collection There do not appear to be restrictions on distributing these unless we missed some fine print Using Load Bitmap The alternative to loading an image from the chooser is to create the scenery object first and then attach the image The procedure is the same as when adding a non animated image as follows 1 Selectthe Rectangle tool on the scenery toolbar and drag to create a rectangle where you want the animated image By default th
364. so a 50 foot car is around 50 pixels wide Note that the size in pixels is shown on the status bar as you drag the dot e The transparent color is whatever color is in the top left pixel If the top left pixel is pink then all pink pixels in the image will become invisible when the image is displayed In the above example the transparent color is light grey Top view images may be any size or shape the program scales them as needed to fit the car tops on the layout e Top images must be oriented vertically with the nose of the car at the top e The transparent color of a top image is taken from the lower left pixel Car Collection Errors When you open a layout it may require cars not found among your installed collections When this happens you are presented with an alert showing several choices MS Car Collection Errors This layout requires car types not Found in your chooser Collection not Found PLsamples OK Proceed using standard cars Cancel Cancel opening the layout Download TF button is not dim click to get collections from web Convert Change to standard cars takes effect on next save OK ignore the errors for the current session substitute cars from the standard set for the ones specified in the layout Cancel do notopen the layout Download download and install the collection from the web then proceed to open the layout with its full set of cars This button is available only if you have an internet c
365. special features e A set of modules The information supplied in the Module Manager is attached to a modular layout and is saved with it This includes filenames of the modules and their positional arrangement One way you can tell if you are working with a modular layout is to bring up the Module Manager if the layout has module data you will see it e Special scenery objects The default display of a modular layout has a heavy grey lines outlining each module b large orange text labels showing module names and c rectangular objects with background images or colors for modules which have them All of these are scenery objects created during the assembly process They reside in the background scenery layer and can be edited when that layer is active You can change the styles and colors of these objects or get rid of them using the Module Manager Settings dialog e No background image A modular layout does not have a single bitmap background Image Instead if there is a background image behind any module it becomes a scenery object in the modular layout Modular Layout Files A modular layout is stored in an rrw file like any other layout but with an additional section containing module information This section contains sequence and position information about the modules It does not contain the modules themselves but filenames pointing to them When you open a modular layout file it displays the full layout If you b
366. ss Shift to restrict shape to square to create a circle or ellipse Press to locate the center drag to adjust the radius press Shift while dragging to move the center Foran ellipse create a circle then adjust the shape by selecting and dragging a corner to create a text only object Drag a rectangle to indicate the location then enter the text when prompted Arrow button brings up Text Scenery Styles to apply the default style to an object Fora fillable object rectangle ellipse polygon click to fill it with the current default background style for a line or polyline click to set it to the current line style Arrow button brings up Background Scenery Styles For more see Dropper and Painter below to select the foreground as the active layer for drawing and editing In this mode background objects cannot be selected or modified to select the background as the active layer In this mode foreground objects are hidden altogether to show or hide the scenery drawing grid Snap is in effect whenever the grid is on To adjust grid properties use File gt Preferences gt Scenery to group selected objects Dimmed unless multiple objects are selected to ungroup a grouped object reverting it back into its original components Dimmed unless at least one grouped object is selected 2 View Scenery Chooses notes 1 K Bring Forward to move the selected object s forward in the display order toward the front 7 M Send Backw
367. ssue an uncouple command or b click directly on the layout in the space between two cars To couple as in real life you simply move one car slowly into another and they automatically couple To uncouple by command 1 Specify the uncoupling point The easiest way to do this is to click in one of the train windows in the Train Toolbar or on the Control Panel to position the uncoupling pin You can click between cars or near the end of a car Once the pin is positioned between two cars not at the beginning or end of the train you can uncouple For example in this illustration uncoupling will occur between boxcar and tanker E Ss To ra ara ee j F Eee ee PE a a he a eee i M aP h we L ee l lt E hE G SE 2 ee ee ee es E coerce om mee ee eee Another way to specify the uncoupling point is to select a car by clicking on It The uncoupling pin goes behind the selected car unless itis the last car in which case the pin goes ahead of it 2 Choose the Uncouple command in one of these ways a by pressing Ctrl U b by clicking the Uncouple button JF on the Control Panel or Train Toolbar c by choosing Train gt Uncouple from the main menu or d by choosing Uncouple from the car context menu When the train uncouples you are left driving only part of it The uncoupled portion becomes a new train no longer connected to your engine The following illustration shows the result of the uncouple operation begun
368. t This will delete it and remove it from the script list Playing back selecta scripted train and a choose Train gt Script gt Play from the context menu or main menu b click the Play button on the Script Toolbar or c open the Script Editor and click Play lf there is more than one scripted train on the layout clicking Play on the Script Toolbar starts them all The other methods start only the script on the selected train If you have already been running a Script before you can start it again you will need to rewind it to the beginning This will move trains back to their starting points and will revert the layout to an earlier state and may cause unexpected surprises Read about the Rewind Point Recording Script recording is a way to create and develop a Script without doing any programming It creates a train script based on your actions operating that train It does not apply to junction actions or the master script though you can create script code by recording which can be pasted into any type of script To create a recording 1 Choose the train you want to record and move it into a suitable starting position 2 Itis a good idea to set the Rewind Point to the current situation so you can rewind back to here later You can do this using Script Central Settings tab 3 Click the Record button on the Script Toolbar The bulb lights in red indicating that recording is now active 4 Operate the train as usual Al
369. t and letting the program keep track of times and distances e Test your equipment Do you already have a collection of cars Customize the ones in the program so they match yours and see if your 86 foot flatcars look realistic going around the 16 inch curves on your target plan e Learn train moves t isn t obvious how to shuffle a dense yard of cars when you have a schedule to meet With TrainPlayer you can learn by practicing Figure out how to classify cars so they re on the right tracks at the right time Learn to minimize the number of moves it takes Try your hand at a switching puzzle e Teach train moves If you re already a skilled operator use TrainP layer to spread your Knowledge Use the recorder to capture a sequence of moves and play it back for the learners Demonstrate how to handle a meet on the main line or switch an industrial siding e Share your layout Ifyou have a layout that welcomes visiting operators TrainP layer is an excellent introduction and training tool for them Send them a copy of your layout before their visit and they ll feel far more comfortable operating with you Or posta copy of the file on your website and allow people to experience your railroad from a distance and of course e Play with trains About This Manual F This manual is in two parts The first covers TrainP layer and describes how to run trains on 4 prepared layouts The second covers TrackLayer and describes how to prepare
370. t location The new copy is not activated or added to your chooser tree although you can drag it into the tree if you d like to see it If you edit properties in this dialog the changes will apply to the published copy only an alternative is to edit the properties of the original before publishing To publish a car collection 1 Inspect the Notes box If errors are reported cancel the dialog fix the errors and try again 2 Inspect and edit Name and Comments These should be made presentable for other users If the comment box is empty you should add descriptive information and author name You might consider doing this to the original collection instead of here cancel this dialog edit in Car Collection Editor then publish 3 Choose an output folder You do not need a new folder for each collection typically you have one output folder where you put all published collections Note if you have already published this collection to that location the old version will be overwritten without warning 4 Inspect the output filename You should not normally change this This filename minus xml extension is used as the collection identifier and is written into layout files if you change it then layouts using the Original collection will not recognize the new and vice versa 5 Click Publish Files are copied the new published collection is created and the dialog is dismissed An alert informs you of successful publication 6 If yo
371. t of resource and Frequently Asked Questions which cover many common problems e User groups and forums There is a friendly open and well attended TrainP layer Forum on Yahoo Groups where you can contact us or our users If you have a problem try posting a question J oining the forum is simple and free e Send e mail Lines are open support trainplayer com e Send U S Mail The address is on the Contact page of the website e By phone Send e mail to arrange a phone call e If you find a bug in the program or the layouts send e mail with the details and we ll try to fix itin an upcoming version The e mail should include the program version and operating system you are using and a layout rrw file if necessary to reproduce the problem e Please do not contact Kalmbach with any TrainPlayer questions Getting Started By now you have installed the program and figured out how to start it It s time to open a layout and take a look around Trains will be covered in the following chapters About Files Opening a Layout Tour of the Screen Layout Properties About Sizes and Scales Adjusting the View Layout Printing Help Menu What s Next Touch the speed dial on the control panel and the train will start to move See the next chapter for instructions on how to drive it About Files TrainP layer has a lot of mechanism for dealing with files because it has a lot of files to deal with A fully equipped Trai
372. t the bottom of the dialog brings up the Module Manager Settings dialog This allows you to set display features applying to the Module Manager and to the resulting modular layouts Module Manager Settings Sets display properties in the Module Manager and in layouts created by it Called from the Settings button on the Module Manager dialog 4 Reset to Default In this dialog you can adjust most elements of the display in the Module Manager and some module related ones in the assembled layout The drop down menu at the top gives you a choice of display elements you choose one then specify whether you want it visible and set its color font and line width or whichever apply Choices you make In this dialog apply immediately in the Module Manager window so you can experiment with different options and see what they do This does not apply to items with in Assembly in the name these do not apply until you click OK to leave the Module Manager to create the assembled layout If you Cancel out of this dialog the Module Manager display reverts to its previous state Module Manager Settings dialog controls Select a feature of the display to be edited The full list of features is Shown in the screen shot above where these features appear in the display is shown in pictures below Settings in this section of the dialog apply only to the selected feature Show this
373. table If you spend any time with the 101 Track Plans you are likely to encounter some turntables which need repair The most common problem is that rotation doesn t stop where it should the bridge comes to a connector and just rolls right on by This usually means the connector is not positioned right The most common breakage is when the connector is not quite touching the circle To repair 1 Choose the Edit Tool be a NI green square 4 On release the connector snaps perpendicular to the rim Point to the end of the connecting track closest to the circle so it highlights with a Press and drag until the circle highlights then release 5 Test the turntable Should work now Other problems are harder to correct You may find a phantom junction along the rim of a turntable you see a green highlight square where there is no track or other problems In most cases the best course of action is to delete the turntable and all connecting tracks and start over Scenery Properties Styles Background Properties Background fill properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See Editing Scenery Properties Styles Default background fill style Called from arrow button on Paint tool See Scenery Styles General Background Line Text f Stretch Tile Lock proportions OK Cancel Apply Help ve This dialog sets properties of the color o
374. td from here jump back to start of loop endwhile when comparison is false jump to here Use a CONTINUE statement within a loop to go to the next iteration ora BREAK statement to jump out and terminate the loop Let Set statement Set Let statements take the form set Var expr let var expr where var Is the name of a new or existing variable and expr is an expression one or more components joined by operators comp Op Comp essi A component is one of a number an expression in parentheses a variable name with or without prefix a display string Op is an arithmetic operator Between two numeric components it can be one of these four Pos J s Between strings only the operator is used and means concatenation of strings Examples let v 2 6 12 let v2 v 99 set AllowYardMode 0 let s Speed is Sx_speed Variables and Functions A variable is a named value You can make up a name assign ita value then use the name in place of the value in a script statement This is the key to writing abstract code which can work on different input data To create a variable and or assign ita value you use a LET or SET statement To represent it in a script statement you normally precede it with a symbol you can read as contents of which identifies what follows as a variable name Example let CruisingSpeed 55 at 322 speed CruisingSpeed You don t need to precede a variable name with when you refe
375. te a line a polyline chain of line segments or a polygon e A Text to create a plain text label 3 Press and drag Press the left mouse button where you want one end or corner of the object drag and release where you want the Opposite end or corner e Ifyou are using the Ellipse tool you will be dragging a circle Press the Shift key as you drag if you want to move instead of resize the circle To create an ellipse you first draw a circle then adjust as described below e If you are using the Line Polygon tool you are dragging a line To create a polyline or polygon the point where you press to start or release to end must coincide with the endpoint of another line wait until the cursor changes to a before pressing e f you are using one of the other tools you are dragging a rectangle e If you are using the Rectangle tool press the Shift key while dragging to constrain the shape to a square 4 Enter data if prompted e Ifyou are using the Text tool you are prompted to enter a line of text 5 Adjust the object Click somewhere in the interior of the object to select it so Itshows drag handles on the sides and corners as shown at right then Load Bitmap e Move point to the interior of the object cursor changes to four Cut Ctrl x headed arrow press and drag to move the object B Copy Ctrl C Delete Delete Es Copy Ctrl C e Resize point to any drag handle except the upper right cursor Delete Delete cha
376. ted by this train whenever itis moving Sounds vary depending on speed Default is either Steam or Diesel depending on the train s engine type For more information see Running Sounds The car collection to be available on menus and toolbar when this layout is active For more information see Default Car Sets The Train Tree The Train Tree is a standard Windows tree control useful for surveying and navigating your rolling stock It displays car ID s and train names For example Jersey Valley Central RR E Boxcarl Freight lM Steam f T408 Tankcar 7411 Tankcar HE C414 Caboose a Freight Wi E54 Stearn wP H399 Hopper w H40 Hopper EI Boxcars1 ES p04 Boxcar ES B05 Boxcar A train having a script attached to it is shown with s in the tree This tree shows that the J ersey Valley Central has four trains two freights and two strings of boxcars To use the Train Tree e Click to select a train and or car Ifyou click a train name it selects the train and makes it active If you click a car name it selects both the train and the car e Right click a car or train and choose an action from the context menu The context menu is the Same as the one you get when you right click a car in a train window or on the layout Uniontown Southern RP dA Freight E90 Steam EF 6417 Boxcar A 9420 Gondola gop H H Reefersi d Cut Car Ctrl Hoppers Copy Car Chrl c HA Switcher Delete Car Delete SAE
377. tgoing box whichever most recently had the focus OK validates saves changes and dismisses the dialog When you click OK the data are checked for validity before the dialog is dismissed If the station name is blank or a duplicate of an existing station you are alerted and prevented from proceeding If any of the load names in either list box is not found in the loads collection you are presented with the Load Definition Dialog which offers to create new loads for you Changes made in the Station Properties dialog apply to the selected station They are not actually saved on disk until you save the layout Cancel discards changes and dismisses the dialog No warning is given if you made changes and are about to discard them Industry Browser Dialog The Industry Browser is a dialog for viewing and managing a list of templates you can use to create your own industries The initial list comes from the factory and includes over fifty types of railroad oriented industry with typical lists of incoming and outgoing loads grouped into a half dozen convenient folders A special additional folder shows the set of industries currently defined on the layout The list will expand if you choose to add templates of your own Structured display of the list is made possible by a new grid control In this grid you can choose organize and group columns as you see fit The same type of grid Is the basis of the Ops Windows and details of its operation a
378. th ones locally installed and others downloadable from the web e a Class name As a convenient shortcut the menu lists a dozen standard car classes Each retrieves a car of that class from the default car set if there is one If there is more than one the menu Item gets you the first one in order as you browse through the collection Other methods of adding cars and trains e Choose New Locomotive from the Train menu This creates a new train consisting of a single steam locomotive and deposits it in an arbitrary location on the layout actually it goes on the lowest numbered suitable straight track e Choose New Train from the Train menu This is the same as New Locomotive except that the loco is followed by a tender boxcar and caboose If you are going to create more than one train using these commands move each one away from its Starting position before adding another Otherwise they will land on the same track and obscure each other e Copy and paste If there is a selected car Edit Copy or just Copy on a context menu puts a copy of it on the TrainP layer clipboard You can then select a different car in any train and Edit Paste to deposit the copied car behind the currently selected one You can also copy and paste entire trains If no car is selected there is no pink underline in the train window then Edit Copy puts the complete train on the clipboard You can then paste this into a different layout or paste
379. th the menu and positions it in default docking position Reset all toolbars to factory settings This may be necessary after Reset All upgrading to a new version if toolbar buttons do not seem to be working as expected Customize Keyboard For assigning keys to menu commands Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commande Toolbars F eyboard Meru Options Category Set Accelerator for Default Commands Curent Keys Exit Export Image Hew Open Layout inven Press New Shortcut Kep Reset Al Description lr Ct Close the active document In this tab you select a command from the menu and choose a key on the keyboard to execute that command If the command already has a key assigned to it you can change it Dialog controls Select the menu containing the command you want to Category operate by keyboard Commands Select the command you want to attach to a key Set Accelerator for This is non functional always set to Default Current Keys Shows the keys s currently assigned to the selected command if any Press New Shortcut Assign Remove Reset All Click this box so it has the focus then press the key you want to assign to the command The key name will echo in this box Click to complete the assignment If you do not click Assign nothing will change This button is dimmed if no key has been entered Click if you want to remove the current key
380. than one column or using a custom sort order e To sort on multiple columns simply click on more than one column header The first click sorts by the column you choose and shows a triangular sort indicator at the top A second click on a different column does a secondary sort sorts the values in that column without overriding the sort of the first one A second click on a sorted column sorts it in reverse order a third click removes it from the sort e To set up your own sort order add a column of your own and enter values by hand then sort on them To do this right click the grid and select Field Chooser Drag the field called Sort Order onto the grid header In this column you can type whatever strings you like and then sort on them In the Sort Order column duplicate values and blanks are allowed If you are entering numbers they will be sorted alphabetically meaning 11 will come before 9 so use zeros to pad values enter 09 instead of just Q Values entered in the Sort Order column are attached to the cars in each row they are saved with the layout and they show up in both Switchlist and Cars grids Ops Window Context Menus Car Properties Zoom to Car Copy Select All Print Grid Field Chooser Group By Box Column Auto Resize Each ops window has a context menu which comes up when you right click anywhere in the grid What you see in this menu depends on what you clicked some commands apply to t
381. than one station can attach to the same industry Once you define an industry at one station it goes on the list so you can choose it at the others To continue the example from above all of the stations associated with Acme Powder will have the Same industry name although each has a unique station name Choose Industry Brings up the Industry Browser for browsing pre defined industries For convenience when defining industries we have assembled a collection of standard types with typical load lists You can browse these in the Industry Browser which shows the standard types along with all the industries defined on the current layout plus any types you might have added to the collection yourself When you make a selection from the Browser it fills the industry related fields of the current dialog You can then edit these to suit the industry you are defining Incoming Outgoing Loads Types of load arriving at shipping from this station The load list windows are simple text boxes You can type in load names delete existing ones copy and paste etc Load names may be entered on separate lines the Enter key works safely in these boxes or as comma delimited lines with multiple names per line coal oil fuel It will probably be easier to read if you list each load on a separate line If you enter a name not known in the master load list it will be brought to your attention when you click OK and you will be given a chance to
382. the TrainPlayer definition of the word train is different from that of the prototype where the definition is one or more engines with or without cars displaying markers In this definition a train need not have Cars coupled to the engine but cars without an engine are NOT a train In Ops we use the prototype definition In some older functions such as the Train Tree window display a train is defined as any contiguous set of cars whether moving or not with or without motive power a single car sitting on a siding is considered a train However such a train will not move unless ithas an engine You may have any number of trains on your layout all running simultaneously if you can manage it All of the layouts supplied with TrainP layer come equipped with one or more trains You don t have to settle for our selection you can delete or modify the provided ones and or add your own as described in Building Trains The Train Control Bar The Train Control Bar TCB is a combination control panel and train window for viewing and operating a single train The TCB comes up by default docked across the top of the application window It is meant to be displayed at all times so has no Close X box You can take it down or bring it back using View gt Windows gt Train Control Bar on the main menu Header Divider Train Window Auto hide H 6 mm oe mee i m Mell Miele ieee a ree OY Forward Rever
383. the bounds of the station at means any car of the train is in the station near means car is on a neighboring track to the station If none of these apply then the track location is given 2 Consist is one of Switcher no cars except engine s and tender s Freight freight cars only Passenger passenger cars only Mixed freight and passenger cars lt Class gt s cut of one or more cars of same type e g Boxcars with no engine Script Central Script Central is a single dialog for managing scripts of all types on your layout It is a tabbed dialog with tabs as listed below It is modeless so it stays on the screen while you work and provides handy reference material while you are developing or trying to understand a scripted layout Script 1 on train 4 Traind car oO a Created Wednesday June 04 201 peed 2 after 0 0 03 stop Click to view a script double click to edit Script Central Tabs Script Central has five tabs as follows Links go to detail pages 1 Scripts Train scripts master scripts and script notes Scripts tab 2 J unction Actions Junction action scripts unction Actions tab 3 Subroutines Subroutines and procs available in Scripts folder Subroutines tab 4 Reference Reference data for commands variables and other language elements Reference tab 5 Settings Settings and actions applying to all scripts Settings tab The first four tabs share the same format list on th
384. the layout in the list window To add layouts from Windows Explorer 1 Open Windows Explorer and position it alongside TrainP layer 2 Navigate in Windows Explorer to a folder containing layouts and or subfolders In this example we are bringing in a folder called My Layouts with two subfolders 3 Position the mouse on the folder in Windows Explorer press and drag to an unlocked folder in the chooser tree shown by the arrow below left d di Fax di Drafts m Inbox dJi JesseDB E aa Femin 4b My Layouts 2 testfolder2 E a standard b Four_Easy n de CD Laymis a Boy Tiare gt Wid P10 P c tfold p My Music z ay cD Layouts gt tab My Pictures A My Favorites b Mv Shanec When you release the mouse button the new folder and subfolders appear in the chooser tree above right Dragged in folders are automatically marked as locked because their contents reflect files on the disk Missing Car Scenery Alert To report and optionally download missing cars and scenery Comes up automatically if you open a layout which references data not found in your local collection qa x Com i a This layout requires car or scenery types not found in your chooser Collection not found Colorado Scenery image not found uk specfic coal staithes1 bmp Scenery image not found uk specficlrailway sleepers bmp Proceed using standard cars and scenery Cancel opening the layout Get collections from web Permanent
385. the list in this tab List contents ID Unique program assigned id for each row Starts with S for subroutine P for proc Name Name of subroutine file or proc Subroutine files are in folders under lt TP app data dir gt Scripts Subfolder Name of subfolder under Scripts directory First Line First line of routine Actions Click list item Selects routine and displays it in the text window For subroutine file brings up Notepad For proc does nothing editing must be done in code where proc is defined Right click row Brings up context menu commands as listed below Text is editable Text is in code style fixed size font no wrap Changes are saved on clicking OK or Apply or on changing tabs Double click row Text window Context menu Edit in Notepad Brings up Notepad for editing and viewing subroutine does nothing for procs Delete For subroutine deletes file after confirmation Not applicable to procs Refresh Rebuilds list sometimes needed if changes have been made externally Clock Settings For setting clock parameters Called from Settings on Clock context menu Clock Settings Start Time 05 00 AM Speed Factor Cancel The TrainP layer clock has properties you don t find in an ordinary clock it can run at the speed of your choice and with one click it can be reset to a specific time when you want your operating session to begin These properties are set in this dialog D
386. the window automatically updates every time the train goes across a switch so that it shows the next switch in the direction of travel This feature can be disabled see below r m To throw the switch centered in the switch window click the blue highlight or press the space TEUN throw any other switch visible in the window click its frog point To change characteristics of switches or the switch window see Switch Preferences Upcoming Switch As you drive the program knows what switch is coming up next along your direction of travel whether an inch or a mile away and makes it easy to see and throw When the Switch Window is on display it automatically shows a close up of the upcoming switch while a red double frame highlights it on the layout as shown here Switch To throw the upcoming switch press the space bar This works whether or not the switch window Is on display The upcoming switch changes whenever the train a passes over a switch or b reverses direction The switch window automatically updates at those events or not see note below as well as whenever you position the mouse cursor over a different switch on the layout Coupling and Uncoupling TrainP layer allows cars to be coupled or uncoupled anywhere on the track You cannot couple if you are going too fast but you can uncouple at any speed There are two general ways to uncouple a indicate which cars are to be uncoupled then i
387. them all as move How you do these moves is up to you The brute force method would be to move each car one at a time a choose an engine or train with engine b couple to the given car c drive it to the destination d uncouple e repeat for each car listed The more prototypical method is to start by collecting all cars into a yard assembling them into a train then delivering them all in one trip For maximum efficiency the train should be blocked all cars headed for the same destination are grouped together so they can be dropped off as a unit This process is Spelled out in the Freight Operations article on the How To Clinics page on the TrainP layer website A move is completed when two conditions are met a the car arrives at the destination station and b the train stops When this occurs you hear a ping sound and an X appears in the Done column of the switchlist grid What it means for a car to arrive is described in About Arrivals and Departures in the Stations chapter When the entire switchlist is completed there is no special reward other than the satisfaction of a day s work well done At this point you can e Save the layout This saves the switchlist in its completed state Next time you open it and generate a new switchlist it will more or less continue where this one left off i e cars will startin their current positions and go on to the next cycle of the waybill e Rewind to the beginning and start ov
388. then release The object appears on the layout possibly somewhat resized 5 Click the object to select it so it shows drag handles on the sides and corners as shown here To move the object press and drag by the middle To resize drag one of the handles To rotate drag by the handle at the upper right For more information see Editing Scenery 6 Repeat steps 2 5 to add more objects When you are finished click Done To add a single scenery object The drag and drop method above works no matter how many objects you are adding but if you only want to add one object there is an alternative method e Click to select an object in the middle pane then click OK The object is deposited in the middle of the layout window and the dialog is taken down Note once you have dragged an object from the dialog the OK button changes to say Done and will not add an object when clicked What you are creating on the layout is a rectangular object with a bitmap fill You could get the same result by creating a rectangle object and editing its properties Downloading Scenery from the Web To see the scenery objects available on the TrainPlayer web site click the Web tab For details see Scenery Web Chooser Objects you see in these folders must be installed to your disk before you can add them to your layout Here s how 1 Click a folder in the tree to see its contents in the middle pane This may take a minute the p
389. ther choosers the preview is not interactive Buttons Each chooser has four buttons at the lower right which differ depending on the context Click the left button which might say OK Download Install Add Car or Done to carry out the default action on the selected item Cancel to take down the chooser without further action Browse to browse the file system for a layout available only in the local Layout chooser or Help to go to the appropriate page of the help system Resizing A chooser window can be resized by dragging its lower left corner Individual panes can be resized by dragging the divider bars between them Modality Layout and Sound choosers are modal meaning once you click OK the selected item is opened and the chooser goes away Car collection and Scenery choosers are not they remain on the screen as you choose multiple items Context menus Right click an item in either the tree or list window to see a menu of context specific commands Menus differ depending on the chooser see the individual help pages for menu screen shots and details Web tab If you have a live internet connection the web tab of each chooser shows content available on our website Selecting an item or collection from this tab causes it to be downloaded to your machine and added to your local content Details vary depending on chooser see individual help pages The content you see in a web tab depends on your license for example you won t see Pr
390. this and the layout opens without the background e Ifthe layout refers to cars or scenery objects which cannot be found in your local collections the Missing Car Scenery dialog comes up and offers to download the missing items e Ifthe layout refers to other layouts linked to it you will get an alert when the train reaches the jumping off spot on the track and tries to go to the missing linked layout Revert To Saved New in version 6 0 is the main menu command File gt Revert To Saved This restores the layout to the same state as when it was last opened Ithas the same effect as closing the file answering No if asked to save changes then reopening the file This command is handy for resetting trains and switches back to a fixed starting point Popular with script developers Read Only Layouts New in version 6 0 is the ability to mark a layout file as Open for read only This mark gives the layout author a way to protect the file from inadvertently being overwritten This mark is applied using a checkbox in the Advanced Layout Properties dialog When a file is marked for read only it means that when you choose File gt Save the program instead brings up the Save As dialog and offers a new filename different from the original You can then click OK to save the file without modifying the original If you do wish to overwrite the original you can change the name in the Save As dialog Change it back to the original name then answer Yes
391. to select the curve to be moved shown at left The curve turns blue 3 Press and drag carefully As you drag attached straight sections and curves on the far ends of those are automatically adjusted See above center If you drag too far some curves may not be able to stay tangent and you can end up with a spiral above right If this happens Edit Undo and try again Because of the requirement that curves remain tangent you cannot drag a junction which joins a curve and a straight in the diagram at left dragging the highlighted point has no effect because anywhere you try to drag it will cause the tangency to break Loops and S Curves You don t have to draw curves one ata time Some constructs like loops and S curves work better if you draw more than one circle before you add the Straights To draw a loop 1 Draw two circles Use the Circle tool Remember use the shift key to move unshift to resize ao 2 Begin on either circle and drag a tangent to the other 3 Release when the destination circle is highlighted 4 Repeat the procedure on the other side of the loop 5 When you release the second tangent both circles become curves and the loop Is complete To draw an S curve 1 Draw two circles Leave a little space between them 2 Begin a tangent on the inside edge of one circle fe 3 Drag to the inside edge of the other circle Release when the destination circle Is hig
392. tory The files and folders you see in the web tab are those on our website In addition most chooser trees have additional special folders for example Recent Downloads or What s New As of Version 3 3 1 you can no longer modify the Car Scenery or Sound chooser trees If you want the files in these sets to be Organized differently you can rearrange them on the disk and the chooser trees will reflect your changes The exception Is the local Layout chooser where you can add folders of your own and reorganize the tree to sult New in Version 3 3 1 you can now easily locate and inspect your application data directory Choose Open Data Folder from the File menu and it will bring up Windows Explorer in that location Operating a Chooser Components of a chooser work generally as follows Details differ see the individual help pages Tree Click a folder to select it If it contains files you will see a list of them in the list window If it contains subfolders click the Sign to expand itso you can select a subfolder List The list window shows a collection of files or objects as either a table or a set of icons Icon view can be changed to list view using the context menu Click an icon or a row of the table to make a Selection in most cases you will then see a picture of the selected object in the preview window Preview The preview window shows a small picture In the Sound chooser you can click the picture to play the sound in o
393. track is easy to work with you just draw a series of line segments and you re ready to drive trains Draw three or more tracks to the same point and you automatically get a working switch Since you can draw any curve as a series of short straight segments it is possible to build the entire layout using nothing but straight track but you ll get better results if you take the trouble to learn about curves too Before you work on a real layout we suggest you start with a blank screen and learn some of the basic drawing operations The tool you use most in TrackLayer is the Straight Track tool A used for creating straight track segments and switches Since curves can be represented by a series of short segments you can build the entire layout with the Straight Track tool although you ll get better results if you learn to make curves as described in the next chapter In this chapter we describe how to create straight track If you want to add ties and or roadbed to your track those are covered in the scenery chapter See Ties and Roadbed Drawing Straight Track and Switches Editing Track Special Track Drawing Straight Track and Switches To draw straight track Choose the Straight Track tool Fal Press the mouse button where you want one end of a track segment 3 Drag to where you want the other end release the button NO You have a point to point railroad If you wanted to you could add a train and start operating 4 P
394. ts the chosen car Pullman at the specified location on the track Use a i this to place the first car of a train or to N fai deposit an isolated car Reefer e right click a train and choose Add Car Hopper This deposits the car in the clicked train at Eee the clicked position Use this to add or insert a Boxcar a car into an existing train FS 5 e choose Train gt Add Car from the een Ear main menu This inserts the car into the E C TEE selected train atthe position of the eee AT uncoupling pin the orange spike in sa the train window Reposition this pin by clicking in the train window or by selecting a different car The uncoupling pin can be moved usinga j m menu command or the keyboard The raletan iach elo i gainii jas iii command is under Train gt ATE Left lt Left Uncoupling Pin The assigned Keys are the right and left arrow keys Using the Add Car menu On the Add Car menu pick one e By Name This brings up both the Car Inventory Bar and the Car Type Names list box gt showing the layout s default car set Choose a car type by a clicking a name in the list box or b double clicking an image in the car bar or c dragging an image from the car bar onto the layout or the train window For more info see Car Inventory Bar m e Car Chooser This brings up the i Sea Car Chooser where you can browse naira and select from the entire catalog of ari cars and locos including bo
395. tton brings up the Load Chooser for selecting incoming outgoing loads Edit button unlock selection to allow editing This button is dimmed if the selection is in the local layout folder local industry definitions can only be edited in Station Properties Clicking Edit activates the name and load boxes so you can modify their contents To validate and commit the changes click OK or select a different record in the list OK validate save changes and dismiss dialog The same validations apply as in Station Properties If you click OK you save all the changes you have made to the industry list Cancel discard changes and dismiss dialog All changes made to the list are discarded not just those on the current record Help Brings up the appropriate Help page Route Finder If the switchlist tells you to deliver a string of hoppers to Punky J unction the first thing you ll need to Know is how to get there Even on a small layout it s not always easy to figure this out That s why we developed the Route Finder a device which calculates all possible routes between two points and displays them interactively so you can choose one To use select the Route Finder menu command or click the Find Routes toolbar button You see this dialog E Route Finder To penerote routes select From and To fecahenns than check Go Speoty bostian by choosing ether station mame or juncion Route 1
396. tton in Track Preferences Any track you draw from that point on will be in the specified color This would be useful for example if you drew the standard gauge line of your layout first then changed colors before drawing the narrow gauge part Editing Track If you ve drawn some track and want to make changes there are several choices You can correct a mistake by undoing it You can delete a single track object track segment curve circle turntable by point and press or you can select several and delete them all atonce You can move or resize track objects or copy them from one place and paste them into another Once a network of track is laid and interconnected it s a little tricky to move it around without fouling something up This is especially true where curves are involved the program attempts to keep straight segments tangent to their curve arcs and this can restrict movement Undo Redo If you make a mistake the easiest and safest way to fix itis to immediately undo it To undo the latest drawing or editing operation 1 Choose Edit Undo lt or press Ctrl Z The last operation is undone and the layout reverts back to Its previous state The menu command includes the type of operation which will be undone e g Undo New Track 2 You can use the command repeatedly to undo earlier operations There is no limit on the number of undo s you can go all the way back to the blank screen or the file you Started with 3 If
397. u mark a track untouchable otherwise you wont be able to In the above example tracks added in each of the following steps should be marked hidden before going on to the next step 3 4 8 10 e If you mark a track untouchable by mistake you can no longer select itso you can t unmark It Instead choose All Retouchable from the track context menu All untouchable tracks become unmarked and touchable Turntables and Transfer Tables The TrainP layer portion of the M p o St prer manual describes how r ae turntables and transfer tables look and behave This section describes how to build them w with TrackLayer A turntable consists of two objects a circle and a ee bridge trackwhich crosses the circle and passes through the center When you rotate the table by double clicking a point on the rim or right Clicking and choosing a Rotate command from the menu the bridge rotates until either end is touching an end of an external connecting track At this point it stops and the superimposed endpoints become a single junction a train can cross An alternative to a turntable is a transfer table a rectangular bed with a bridge which moves laterally In this case a double click inside the table area causes the bridge to move slowly in the direction of the click until it locks onto the next connecting track This section describes how to build and edit turntables and transfer tables Creating a Turntable
398. u want to send the collection to another user zip the files in the output folder Include the xml file plus the folder of image files which has the same name as the xml file Dialog controls Name of the collection This can be any name you like Name Changing the name here will affect only the published collection not the original Description and author If this box is blank please provide Comments some Information to be included in the published version Full pathname of original collection xml file This file is not input file modified by the publish operation Destination for the published collection The xml file will Output folder go in this folder along with a subfolder containing the image files To select a new output folder use the Browse button Name to be given to the published xml file This is usually Output file the collection name plus xml extension Use caution when changing this name you may break existing layouts Notes Errors encountered while processing if any Click to carry out the publish operation A confirmation message Is displayed on completion Publish Note no warning is given if the output collection already exists it will be overwritten Cancel Click to abort without publishing For more information see Car Collections Cars Window The Cars Windows shows the full inventory of cars on the layout Each row shows one car with its ID picture class load location and other
399. us copy The name of the file is the same as your layout with bak appended You see an indication on the status bar while the file is being saved To retrieve an auto saved layout use the command Restore Backup on the File menu This opens a file browser in the directory where saved layouts are stored Choose the one you want and open It Track Preferences Settings for displaying and building track Called from menu command File gt Preferences Snap Toangle v 4 I HE iW 90 degrees E es To parallel 2 l Toradius 18 HG par E 2 ar E fis Track display options In general track is all the same color as setin this dialog However you can override the general settings on selected sections to make them some other color see Track Properties Click to change the default track color the color applied to all Default color track not specifically colored otherwise Click to set the color to be applied to track you have yet to draw For new track You can set this to a color of choice draw a region or yard or area in that color then set it back to default Width in pixels of track lines on the screen The same width is Thickness used in printing and exporting an image file Rail options If you are displaying double rails around the track See Double Rail Display you can adjust the color and rail Separation here To display rails use View gt Rails on the main menu Color Separation Clic
400. user the dialog offers you a chance to buy them shown below Click Purchase to go to the checkout page on our online store Check out with credit card or PayPal and you will receive an e mail with download instructions and serial number PGRADE AVAILABLE Your version is up to date Your installed version po Fa at Available for download 5 1 0 5 Ci Chall Efa g CF Cars are not installed a To buy the set 29 dick Purchase and await instructions by e mail The Train Window This page is obsolete The Train Window is now described under Train Control Bar Local Sound Chooser The local sound chooser is for selecting locomotive horn sounds or layout sounds to play when the train passes a given area Sounds Loco Wow Click to play sound For general information about choosers see Choosers To Add a Sound to your Layout The sound chooser shows a subfolder of sounds on your disk which folder depends on whether you are choosing an engine horn sound or a layout sound 1 Click the folder in the tree to show the list of sounds it contains 2 Click a sound in the list to select it 3 Click the icon on the right if you want to hear the sound 4 If you like it click OK to choose the sound and take down the dialog Tree Contents Sounds Loco Engine horn bell whistle sounds Shown when chooser is called from Other on Horn menu in Train Properties below left Sounds Layout Sounds to play when the train passes a
401. vert to Transfer Table Rectangle only replace object with a transfer table Convert to Polygon Rectangle only replace with a closed four sided polygon 8 Delete Polygon Segment Polyline polygon only delete the right clicked segment 9 Close Polygon Polyline only connect first point with last to form closed polygon Start Stop Animation Animated object only start or end animating action Notes 1 Load Bitmap is a shortcut for bringing up the objectproperties dialog setting the background type to Bitmap and browsing for an image file It calls up the Scenery Chooser in image mode showing image files only no SCNs 2 These commands are also available on the main Edit menu Paste is found on the layout context menu you get by right clicking a blank spot Scenery objects can be copied from one layout and pasted into another 3 The Smoothing submenu appears only for a polyline or polygon object It affects vertex points points shared between pairs of segments a smoothed vertex has a curve fitted automatically between the two segments For more see Polygons 4 Smooth This Vertex requires that the polygon be in point editing mode where vertex points are highlighted instead of the standard drag handles see Polygons 5 Auto Smooth means that smoothing is applied whenever you draw two segments sharing an endpoint When auto smooth is in effect you see a red construction arc as you draw each segment as shown here 6 When you save se
402. vice w Flatcar Well Car 40 containers bulldozer ee heavy duty flat 12 18 wh ecien a a a a GA Gondola Dop Bottom balast GE ol Mill solid bottom scrap metal 1G Side Dump gravel Inthe AAR Car Types list just above you can see that a default load is assigned to each car class or AAR type This allows you to open a random layout and find meaningful loads on all cars without having to specify anything In the Car Collection Editor above right a default load can be assigned to each car type overriding the default based on the AAR code The default load for a car type applies only when you create a car of that type it does not automatically change the load of every such car on the layout For example the diagram shows that the next time you create a gondola class G from the named collection its load will be scrap metal In the Car Properties dialog top left a specific load can be assigned to any car on the layout overriding any defaults The same result is achieved by dropping a load on the car from the load chooser or choosing it by name from the load menu In the illustrated example gondola G1 is modified to have the load crates2 The loaded unloaded status of a car is also changed by the program to accommodate switchlist moves or as a car is delivered to Its destination No user action Is required for this Creating Your Own Loads Creating a new open car load is just like creating a new
403. w button next to the Painter tool The clicked object will inherit the fill type along with the associated color or hatch pattern or bitmap If the object you click is a member of a group only the clicked member becomes filled unless the grouped object is selected in which case the entire object is filled and all members get the same style e Click a linear scenery object line or unclosed polyline and it will change to the current default Jine style To view or edit the default line style click the arrow button next to the Line P olygon tool e Press Shiftas you move around the screen and it activates the Dropper The cursor changes to an eye dropper and wherever the tip is positioned on the screen the dropper picks up the color at that position You can see this color changing dynamically in the little color bar under the paint bucket When you release the mouse button the color sticks and becomes the new default These two tools can work together With the Painter tool active you can press Shift to pick up a color then release Shift and click around the screen to paint objects with that color This applies as long as the current background style is set to Solid and the clicked objects are fillable Choosing Scenery TrainP layer offers a large and growing collection of scenery objects of all types buildings trees factories streets vehicles background patterns industrial complexes a regular Walthers catalog of
404. we re using the Reddy River amp Piedras RR plan 4 If you have this layout and want to follow along open the file LO4 tpg in your TrainP layer Layouts lmages directory How well the default grid lines up with the image depends on several factors the main one being the resolution of the image If you start with a low resolution image 72 dpi then the initial alignment will be way off 2 Select the Edit Track tool i 3 Hold down the shift key point to any intersection point on the grid press and drag toward the lower right The entire grid moves and the red origin lines become visible 4 Drag until the red lines are superimposed on two lines in the image then release This establishes the origin point 5 Without holding the shift key press and drag a grid intersection point The grid resizes while it remains square Red lines do not move 6 Release when the grid is aligned with the image If the grid on the image is not square you can get a better fit by adjusting horizontal and vertical spacing independently dragging lines instead of intersection points Layout Properties 7 Check your work Right click the layout choose Properties Layout tab and Car Train Layout see if the indicated size is what you expect In this example the dialog says the layout is roughly 4x6 in HO which corresponds to the size in the book Hame Reddy River amp Piedras RR 8 While you re in Layout Properties choose a modellin
405. when a car Is classified as closed see Types of Cars Percent of car length which can be occupied by load For most cars leave this as 0 default and loads will look ok change to a smaller value if load images stick out over the ends of the car Applies to both top and side views Check means this car type is closed and a graphical load image will not work instead display the load by name above the car Applied by default to closed cars use this checkbox to override normal behavior for special cars Load image is to be displayed in front of car image Use this for example in a barrel rack car where there is one inner wall instead of two outer ones and the load shows visibly Height of car floor above ground for positioning loads within gondolas or drop bottom flats Default of zero gives acceptable positioning in most cases Distance load should be inset from outer edges in top view These values represent the wall thickness of the car ends x sides i e a larger value for the first value will cause the load to sit less close to the end walls Units apply to insets and floor height Click to move through the collection same as on the Car Type ta Show load Toggles display of load in the car panel Adding a New Car Type To add a new type to a collection click the Add button on the Car Type tab This creates a new undefined type and blanks the dialog for entry of data To provide a complete definition you will need to enter data i
406. when crossed by car s as specified below or disabled do not trigger When Crossed By Controls enabled if trigger is not disabled Trigger Type Trigger type as listed above Name Direction Take Action Or Actions Arrows Add Delete Buttons Name or identifier or other required argument if any see note below Choose one E W W E or Any Choices change to N S S N depending on tracks at junction Action script an editable text box Other actions defined at the same junction Move through list dimmed if only one entry Create a new action at the end of the list Delete the current action from the list If there is only one action this removes It from the junction Apply update actions on layout not saved permanently until layout save OK apply and dismiss Cancel dismiss without saving changes to Done after any save Note The choices offered in the Name drop down are limited to cars and trains currently sitting on the layout You cannot assign a trigger to a car or aar type which is not present This is a limitation we may remove in future versions On clicking OK if you have created a new action ata junction itis displayed with a J unction Action indicator as long as edit or track tool is active Script Central Settings Tab For script related actions and settings See also Script Central Tabs Script Central Sa Scripts Junction Actions Subroutines Reference settings Rewi
407. will need to use a bitmap editing program such as Paint which comes with Windows You will also need to be aware of certain size and style limitations details are spelled out on the Car Collections page Large Car Images As of Version 5 2 certain car collections provide large detailed side views In addition to the normal toolbar sized ones Here for example is an Athearn boxcar from the Chris Pedersen Cars collection Bo st on amp M ai a In Version 6 0 we went a step further and introduced a new 50 pixel medium sized car image When you are working with any of these collections the large and medium images can be seen in several places e Car Properties in the car panel scalable up to full size e Car Collection Editor in the car panels scalable up to full size e Car Chooser in the Preview window e rain Window in the resizable train window e Car Inventory Bar in the resizable car bar All of these displays are resizable for optimal viewing enlarge until the image reaches its full size 50 Pixel Cars New in Version 6 0 are several new car collections in a new size category Car collections now come in three sizes e small the original cars since Version 1 0 with side images made from train gifs maximum height around 28 pixels e medium new more detailed images with side views maximum height 50 pixels sample shown above at full size e large the Chris Pedersen cars with side views actual size
408. wn based on their semi arbitrary positions in a list This order may be changed using special editing commands e To move an obscured object in front of its neighbors select the object and choose Bring to Front Th This changes the order of objects so the selected one comes all the way to the front Use Bring Forward E to bring the selected object s one step closer to the front e To move a front object behind its neighbors select the object and choose Send to Back H This moves the selected object all the way to the back Use Send Backward EJ to go one step backward You can use these commands on multiple selected objects in which case all of them will be moved up or down relative to the unselected neighbors These features come in handy when you re adding details like sidewalks vegetation etc The images below show a concrete driveway being added to the scene In the left image the driveway Is on top sending itto the back gives the image on the right Another way of changing the display order of objects is to move them from one layer to another For example moving an object from the foreground to the background will cause it to be drawn behind all foreground objects e To move an object from one layer to another select the object and cut it to the clipboard using Edit Cut or Ctrl X activate the alternate layer using the Background Layer sill or Foreground Layer 4 tools then paste using Edit Paste or Ctrl V e An alternat
409. wo free ends of the polyline forming a closed figure The resulting polygon Is automatically filled with the default background color N As a shortcut for step 5 you can right press on any segment and choose Close Polygon This automatically adds the closing segment It does not matter in which order or direction you draw each segment as long as one end or the other coincides with the endpoint of another segment they will join Another shortcut for creating a polygon create a rectangle with the Rectangle tool then right press and choose Convert to Polygon This results in a four sided polygon Two editing modes When you select a polyline or polygon object its drag handles are on the rectangular space around it Dragging by these handles changes the overall size and shape of the figure To adjust the position of a single vertex point click a second time on the object and change from normal editing mode to Point Editing Mode drag handles now appear on the vertex points and can be used to move those points individually Click repeatedly to toggle between these two editing modes Drawing Polygons Using Track Tools Track To Scenery An alternative method of creating a polyline or polygon allows you to create shapes containing straight line segments and circular arcs using the track drawing tools This feature is convenient for creating custom benchwork shapes To create scenery using this method Link to Layout Grow Roadbed S
410. y an arbitrary angle or flipped horizontally or vertically To rotate or flip track 1 Select one or more track sections To select an entire area Such as a yard you can start by dragging a selection rectangle around the area then shift click to include or exclude individual sections 2 Right click a selected section and choose a Transform Selection command Flip or Rotate Flip Horizontal Rotate Track Selection Flip Vertical Ctrl x 5 Rotate 90 deg CW Copy Ctrl C Angle in degrees 1 0 z 3 LAS F Delete Delete Rotate 90 deg CCW 190 to 180 Select All Ctrl hes Cancel Place Train Here To rotate by an arbitrary angle choose Rotate and enter an angle in the dialog A positive value rotates clockwise The selected tracks are rotated or flipped about the center of the rectangle enclosing the selection If there are adjacent unselected tracks these will be reoriented as necessary to remain connected For example here is a rotation of 10 degrees on a selected yard 10 deg J unctions shown in red remain fixed while those touching the selected tracks move Transform Selection is undoable so you can experiment with it then undo and nothing will be harmed Ties and Roadbed If you want to add ties and or roadbed to your track see Road Preferences Special Track Once you have some track down you can mark sections of itto have special properties A section can be marked as Hidden track When a tr
411. y change cars to standard on next save When you open a layout it attempts to retrieve the required cars and scenery from your local data folder If it fails to find some of them you see this alert with a list of the missing items in the window To proceed you have four choices Click one Dialog controls Open the layout without the missing items Cars not found OK are converted to generic types missing scenery objects are simply omitted These conversions are temporary the next time you open the layout you will get this alert again Cancel Cancel and do not open the layout Connect to the web and look for missing items there Ifa missing car type is found on the web the entire car Download collection is downloaded and installed missing scenery items are downloaded individually so that you may end up with partially filled scenery folders on your local machine Permanently convert missing cars to generic types so that Convert the next time the layout is saved the missing cars will be dropped Applies only to cars not scenery If you choose to download missing items you may not get all of them If for example the layout author included custom scenery objects not in the TrainP layer collections then the download will not retrieve them Advanced Layout Properties For viewing and editing advanced properties of the layout Called from Properties on the Layout context menu See also About the Properties Dialog Adva
412. y of cars on the layout Features the two have in common are described below For screen shots contents and details specific to each see Switchlist Window and Cars Window By default these windows come up as a tabbed pair docked to the right hand side of the layout window with the Switchlist Window in front Ops Window Features How To The following is a combination feature list and task oriented instruction set These instructions apply to all grid windows except where noted Feature eel Move and dock windows Split tabs into separate windows Resize grid columns Rearrange grid columns Show or hide columns Edit the grid Group rows by data value Sort the grid Print the grid Select rows or cells Copy to clipboard Auto resize columns Zoom to an object Reduce grid row height x10 GIG Boxcar x H2 BE Hopper H2 BE Hopper T3 SR akar T 124 SR Tarkcar T o Pacar F GREG oor x ED oor x JE i F63 Press and drag on the title bar of a window The window becomes undocked and you see docking navigator arrows as X65 shown below Position over one of the arrows you see a shadow where the window will dock then release the mouse button As above but start by pressing on one of the tab buttons To rejoin tabs into a single window first dock one of them to a side then drag the other onto the middle button of the navigator Press the divider between two column headers and drag right or left Press
413. y shown on all cars and stations in the switchlist and car id s are also displayed on the cars To turn all color codes on or off use View gt Color Codes on the main menu To turn car id s on or off use Train gt Show Car IDs You can toggle the display of Car IDs on moving trains by using the checkbox Preferences gt Trains gt T urn off while moving To highlight a single move you can interact with the switchlist window for a more detailed look at your assigned job Click to select a row in the switchlist window and it will turn off all color codes EXCEPT the one on that car and its destination This gives you a handy way to click down through the list and see where each car Is located and where it s going To turn all color codes on click any empty spot on the layout or the bottom of the switchlist window This cancels any single selection and shows all colors for the switchlist Car Collection Publisher Copies a car collection to an output folder Called from Export button in Car Collection Editor Publishing a car collection means preparing it for delivery to other users checking for errors gathering all the image files in one place giving them uniform names splitting multi image files into separate parts creating a new xml index and so on The job is done in this dialog called up when you are editing a car collection It does not modify the original collection but makes a new copy ina differen
414. you can modify Most industries are created by you for your railroad to suit your needs and designs The location of an industry is specified by attaching It to a station a named area on the track A single industry can span several Stations each with its own list of incoming and outgoing loads For example a manufacturing industry might have two Stations a factory siding where raw materials arrive in hoppers and a loading platform where finished goods go out in boxcars aluminum bars steel bars steel plate Choose Loads Creating An Industry Here are the general steps for creating an industry on your layout 1 Decide where load exchange will take place You will need a single section of track where cars must sit to be loaded or unloaded The length should suit the industry and the expected traffic Only one station may occupy a single section of track If you plan to have two stations for one industry Such as shipping and receiving you have to place each station on a separate track section To isolate this you may have to chop or redraw a longer section see Isolating Track Note If you are using a plan imported from AnyRail it may be necessary to redraw several of the short segments that AnyR ail creates in order to make one section long enough for the station 2 Create a station there Activate the Station tool Press and drag a small rectangle so it highlights just the loading track then let go The Station
415. yout is whether a train navigates it correctly Drive around and see Track Checker TrackLayer can help you find errors Use the command Tools gt Check Track This runs a series of tests against the layout as listed in the table below Results are reported in the Track Check dialog If errors are found they are listed in an alert box as shown Each error is listed with an object type 3 letter code from the following table the object s number and the error text the corresponding track or junction on the layout is highlighted in pink STR straight track section CUR curved track JXN junction switch GLR circle center CAR car TRN train CIR circle TTB turntable Don t show me this again TrackLayer In the example shown tracks 34 70 and 153 meet near a common point but there is no switch there The fix is to drag Junction 152 on top of 68 so a Switch is created A STR 70 Endpoint on track but no junction 152 Error conditions found by Check Track include Object flagged for delete object has been deleted Same junction number on both ends of track track has both ends on same junction Bad track length acklengthiszero SS Junction has no tracks invalid junction disconnected from any track Invalid track number on junction junction is connected to invalidtrackID Invalid radius circle radius is zero or negative Station is missing name tation object has no name Tracks superimpose
416. zero until you rotate past the stop button at 6 00 If the train is already in reverse when you rotate into yard mode it stays in reverse Continue to rotate counterclockwise The train speed increases in the usual way slowly at first as the train moves in reverse You can rotate all the way around to maximum reverse speed at the 7 00 position While yard mode is in effect the stop button flashes To end yard mode a rotate back clockwise past the starting point or b click the stop button which immediately stops the train and returns to normal mode To use Yard Mode with the speed slider When yard mode is enabled the speed slider divides into two sections as shown here Normal a a a ee a a Yard In normal operation zero speed is at the left moving to the right increases speed In yard mode zero is in the middle moving to the right increases speed while moving to the left begins yard mode and switches into reverse To disable yard mode click the brass Y on the control panel or click the toolbar button T or uncheck Enable yard mode on the context menu Switches Where three or more tracks join at a point they form a throwable switch Green lights indicate the open route through the Switch reds indicate closed tracks A train doesn t necessarily crash if it attempts to pass through a red light it can roll right on through or throw the switch automatically depending on settings in

6.2 User`s Manual as PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents